JP2022148832A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of realizing diversification and optimization of a performance.SOLUTION: When shifting to a ball-entry-easy-state after the end of a special game, there are cases where the number of symbol variations from the end of the special game to a specific end of the ball-entry-easy-state is first number of times and the number of symbol variations is second number of times greater than the first number of times. In the ball-entry-easy-state, it is possible to display actual remaining number of times until the specific end or false remaining number of times that is less than the actual remaining number of times. When the false remaining number of times is displayed, a number of times increase performance that increases the false remaining number of times cannot be executed if the number of symbol variations after being shifted to the ball-entry-easy-state is less than predetermined number of times that is less than the first number of times, and the number of times increase performance can be executed if the number of symbol variations after being shifted to the ball-entry-easy-state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

The present invention relates to a pinball game machine having a game area from which game balls are shot.

Conventionally, among various pinball game machines, a game machine called a so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided approximately in the center of the game board. display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display"). This game machine shifts to a special game called a jackpot in which more prize balls than in a normal game can be obtained when a combination of symbols becomes a specific mode when the variation of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped. known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only are multiple symbols variably displayed, but the variable display time is usually set in a state called a so-called reach screen, in which if one more symbol is aligned, a big hit will occur. The performance is intended to increase the player's sense of expectation, such as making it longer. In addition, the player's expectations are heightened by effects that use characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display, and advance notice effects that suggest the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714

A large number of conventional gaming machines employing the above-described configuration already exist. In order to differentiate from conventional models, there is a demand for diversification and optimization of presentation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of realizing diversification and optimization of effects.

A pinball game machine according to one aspect of the present invention includes a game board having a game area formed thereon, a first start port provided in the game area, and a game ball provided in the game area to make entry of game balls relatively difficult. Judgment of success or failure based on a second start opening having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change from a state to an easy state, and a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first start opening or the second start opening. a symbol display device that variably displays the symbols and indicates the result of the success/failure determination by stop-displaying the symbols; special game control means for making it possible to execute a special game more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop display; A ball-entering state control means for shifting to a ball-entering easy state in which the ease of entering a ball into a starting hole is relatively high, and an effect control means for controlling an effect are provided. When transitioning to the easy-to-ball-enter state after the end of the special game, when the number of changes in the pattern from the end of the special game to reaching the specific end of the easy-to-ball state is the first number of times, or the first number of times. In the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to display the actual remaining number of times until reaching a specific end or a false remaining number that is less than the actual remaining number. When the remaining number of times is displayed, if the number of changes in the pattern after transitioning to the easy-to-enter state is less than a predetermined number of times which is smaller than the first number of times, the number-of-times-increase effect for increasing the false remaining number of times cannot be executed. Yes, and if the number of symbol changes after the transition to the easy-to-ball state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the number-of-times increase effect can be executed.

In addition, any combination of the above constituent elements, and those in which the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are replaced with each other between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification and optimization of effects.

It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a functional block of the pachinko game machine. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a main substrate; FIG. It is a figure which shows typically a right/wrong determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing range setting of winning/failing lottery values for each set value; It is a figure which shows a pattern determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination; It is a figure which shows typically the preliminary right/wrong determination table corresponding to game setting. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure which shows typically the outline of a mobile cooperation system. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main board and sub-boards; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the main board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. 15; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the sub-board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing in detail the main process of S518 in FIG. 20; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board; It is a flow chart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special design variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a decorative design variation display. It is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small-hit game. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen of a production|presentation display apparatus. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of contraction of a frame image in a screen deformation effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of frame image swing in a screen deformation effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a layer structure of a rendering screen in a screen deformation rendering; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the process of a movable accessory effect executed concurrently with a screen deformation effect; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a plurality of buffer areas obtained by dividing a frame buffer; 4 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of a frame buffer area; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area; It is a figure which shows the example of a screen of a 3rd special production|presentation pattern. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern; 1 is a perspective view showing the basic structure of the outer surface of a slot machine; FIG. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the housing door exposed when the housing door is opened; FIG. 4 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base exposed when the housing door is opened; It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. It is a functional block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flow chart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a main control unit and a sub control unit. 4 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of an effect display control section; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main program control processing of the main controller in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control unit. This shows the transition of the game state after shifting to the high-probability state and the easy-to-enter state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation|variation start processing of a special design. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the design stop processing of a special design. It is a figure which shows the game flow which concerns on an Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the switching timing of a production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the 1st production|presentation triggered by operation instruction|indication production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the 2nd production|presentation triggered by operation instruction|indication production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of opening production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of opening production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the normal color variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the variation production|presentation of a special color. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the role thing operation|movement production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation process which can select the execution mode of suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of the frequency|count increase production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution process of individual production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition process of the variation pattern selection state at the time of shifting to latent mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of output of a test signal and an outer end signal regarding an easy-ball-entry state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of output of a test signal and an outer end signal regarding an easy-ball-entry state;

(Base technology 1)
In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Moreover, in order to make these game characteristics compatible, it is equipped with a plurality of starting prize winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of holding lamps. It is designed so that the number of jackpot balls released in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with variable probability, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that make up the special game when the second game hits (the opening time of the big winning port is A long long opening unit game and a short opening unit game having a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is longer than the first game. ), the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game. On top of that, at first, the first game is aimed at the first hit, and after the big hit in the first game is given to shorten the working time, the second game is repeatedly aimed at to obtain a lot of balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, A decorative lamp 111 is included. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 to a position to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body aligned with the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door 104 . The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray 106, and the like. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds are output according to the game state and the performance by means of controlling the performance. Most of the resin member forming the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the translucent interior. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by a means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on a game area 81 partitioned by rails 82. , an outlet 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central part of the game area 81 and its upper and right parts. 60 protection, decoration and other functions. A stage 65 is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64 on which the game ball that has flowed in rolls. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. Above the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 is provided which is driven along with the content of the performance to perform a performance action. In the game area 81, mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path for game balls are installed. In this specification, "entering the ball", "winning", and "falling" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entrance may be configured as a "passing hole" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which game balls pass. ', 'winning', 'falling in' and 'passing' may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first game, and the second starting port 12 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible to aim for entry into one of the game balls according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided substantially at the lower center of the game area 81 , and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11 . Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first start hole 11 and the second start hole 12, while right-handed. That is, if the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting hole 12, but it is impossible to enter the first starting hole 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is usually covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of the game ball is hindered, unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12 is impossible or difficult to enter. The winning lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is executed each time a ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. be.

In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to target one of them depending on the launch strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be arranged separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one side is difficult to enter the other side. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when the ball is hit left-handed, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly so as to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64 . The second starting hole 12 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when hitting the ball to the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly so as to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64 .

The first starting port 11 is provided with a first starting winning detection device 16 . The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 11, and generates first start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting prize detection device 17, a normal electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 90. Prepare. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 12, and generates second start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry.

The first operation opening 31 is provided at a left side position of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36 . The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operation opening 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when it passes. The second operation opening 32 is provided at the right side position of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37 . The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operation opening 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. Passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery for determining whether or not to spread the normal electric accessory 90 . When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol, which is the symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display portion 45. - 特許庁Therefore, the open lottery is also called "normal symbol lottery". After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display of normal symbols stops. When the normal symbol stops at a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of the ball entering the second starting port 12 increases. As a modified example, the number of operating ports may be set to one, and the configuration may be such that one is provided at the left side position of the game area 81 .

The three general winning openings 33 are each equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of game balls. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry of the game ball at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20 . The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 20, and generates big winning hole winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big winning opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34 . In addition, as a modified example, one more large winning opening may be provided in the central lower portion of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port from which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and includes an out detection device 39 . The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out port 34 is provided at the central lowermost end of the game area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be arranged side by side while ensuring a game ball passage with a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A pattern display unit 120 is arranged outside and below the game area 81 on the game board 80 . The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display portion 41, a second special symbol display portion 42, a first special symbol reservation display portion 71, a second special symbol reservation display portion 72, a normal symbol display portion 45, and a normal symbol display portion. Display units such as a holding display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, an abnormality notification unit 77, and the like are provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display portion 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display portion 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol Variations of 51 and second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second success or failure lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are, for example, an 8-segment LED consisting of 8 segments, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". is a display device. An 8-segment LED can express a numerical value of 8 bits by combining 8 segments. The first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily form letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments. . These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42, or predetermined display (eg "-") and non-display (eg all lights off) are switched. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after repeating for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 use an LED dot array that is not an 8-segment LED, and a plurality of kinds of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are combined with the lighting pattern and the lighting color. A special pattern 52 may be expressed.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have a role of production, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol on the lower left side of the game area 81 are displayed. It is displayed in an inconspicuous size on the display part 42.例文帳に追加However, when adopting a method of expressing without using a decorative pattern by giving the special pattern itself a dramatic role, the special pattern is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to allow

Above the first special symbol display part 41, a first special symbol reservation display part 71 is provided as a suspension lamp for special symbol variation corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display part 42, a second special symbol display part 71 is provided. A second special symbol reservation display portion 72 is provided as a special symbol variation reservation lamp corresponding to the game of . The first special figure reservation display unit 71 consists of two lamps, and the number of pending lottery values in the first game depending on the number of lights or blinking numbers (hereinafter, the number of pending lottery values) (also simply referred to as "holding number"). The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display unit 71 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the first start port 11 during the variation of the first special symbol 51 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The second special figure reservation display unit 72 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display unit 72 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the second start port 12 during the variation of the second special symbol 52 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The pending number of win/fail lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in the form of the number of lit pending lamp images.

A normal symbol display portion 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120 . For the sake of convenience, the normal symbol display portion 45 is composed of two lamps, and the normal symbol display state is represented by a lighting combination thereof. First, by flashing the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, the variation of the normal pattern is expressed, and finally, the combination of the lighting state of the first lamp and the second lamp is the stop pattern of the normal pattern. is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop pattern of losing, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first winning mode, and the first A second winning mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

In addition, on the right side of the normal symbol display portion 45, a normal pattern suspension display portion 75 is provided as a suspension lamp for normal symbol variation. The normal pattern reservation display unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of normal pattern fluctuations reserved by the number of lights or the number of flashes. The number of pending normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during normal symbol fluctuations, and the number of normal symbol lotteries in which normal symbol fluctuations have not yet been executed. indicates

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77 . The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by lighting a lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and extinguishing when the normal state. to display the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies an abnormality of a part of the game machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality with a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of abnormality. It should be noted that these display units may be configured individually without being collectively arranged in the pattern display unit 120, or they may be divided into a plurality of display devices grouped as appropriate. Further, the notification of the game state such as the specific game state may be configured so as to be limited to a predetermined period of time, for example, a certain period of time after the power is restored.

Approximately in the center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative pattern 61 interlocking with the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 is displayed. Display the variation of the effect image including. Such display is hereinafter referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display".

The effect display device 60 is a display device composed of a liquid crystal display that variably displays the decorative pattern 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 . The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually directing the determination result display of the lottery indicated by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 . The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative pattern 61, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of patterns imitating a slot machine game, for example, are varied in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, symbols composed of numerals "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and varied, and finally the combinations of the three symbols that are stopped and displayed indicate hits or misses. Each of the plurality of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns. It may be configured in such a manner that a different pattern is added to each and integrated. The pattern is a pattern depicting a motif related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a person or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 is switched between a case where a pattern integrally included in the pattern is variably displayed and a case where the pattern is separated and only numbers, letters and symbols are variably displayed according to the development of the performance. The configuration may be such that In the background of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a performance effect related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko game machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern variation.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot-matrix display device. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the game ball with maximum strength as a so-called "right-handed hit", the right side passage is almost certain. A game ball can be passed through, and it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "left-handed". The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes, such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub-liquid crystal, may be combined. (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). If installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured by mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the effect. A performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102 . The production button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the production button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the production button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be protruded. The rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a performance lever 112 in a state of protruding outside, and the player can grip the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105 .

The game method and control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the shooting handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided by the rail 82 one by one and shot to the game area 81 with the intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. . When the player manually fixes the rotating position of the shooting handle 107, the shooting of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball shot to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center ornament 64, etc., and falls in a direction according to how it hits. When the game ball falls into each of the winning openings of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 20, the prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening enter the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray. It is dispensed onto the ball tray 106 . A game ball falling into each winning hole such as a general winning hole 33 is treated as a safe ball, and a game ball falling into an out hole 34 is treated as an out ball. The ejection of safe balls may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or the specification may be such that the safe balls are guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all of the ejections are detected by the out detection device 39. may be Alternatively, guidance of safe balls and detection of safe balls by the out detection device 39 may not be performed, and the number of discharged balls may be determined by adding the number of detected safe balls to the number of detected out balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display part 45, and is stop-displayed after the lapse of the variability display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbols are stop-displayed in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded based on the winning mode of the stopped-displayed symbols and the game state when they are stopped. . That is, when the game state when the symbols are stopped is the normal game state and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a short period of 0.1 seconds. Further, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode during the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state), the normal symbols are displayed in the second winning mode during the normal time and the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state). When the stop display is performed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 . Here, the winning probability of normal symbols and the execution probability of long opening are set differently depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal pattern wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning pattern of the first winning mode is selected) is 1/100. 3. The execution probability of long opening (the probability of selecting the winning pattern of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. In addition, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, easy ball entry state), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability between the first win mode and the second win mode is the same as in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed even if the lottery is won in any mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal pattern (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (0 when the opening time is displayed stopped in the first winning mode) 0.1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced. In addition, the function (long opening) of extending the operation period of the normal electric accessory 90 may be called "open extension".

In addition, as described above, the probability of long opening in the normal state is higher than the probability of short opening, so that the long opening is executed at a certain rate even in the normal state when winning the normal pattern. . As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening. good. Further, in the ball-entering easy state, it is possible to increase the ease of ball-entering the second starting port 12 by using three functions including a function of shortening the variation time of normal symbols. In that case, the normal pattern variation time is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. It should be noted that the winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the specification may be such that the normal electric accessory 90 can be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded, it may be notified in advance to that effect, or may be notified before the start of the normal pattern variation by reading in advance the suspension of the normal symbol variation, or the normal symbol variation may be notified. Notification may be made during the change.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is extended to about 6 seconds by repeating the 2-second opening, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It is good also as an aspect. Alternatively, a plurality of combinations of the open time and the number of times of opening may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of three 2-second openings, the total opening time is the same as in the case of one 6-second opening, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modification in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former is the one who enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening matches the hitting direction with the second starting port 12 from that point. The chances are long. In addition, it is possible to configure such that there are a plurality of winning types of normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism differs according to the winning types. For example, when the normal pattern is the first hit, the normal state is 0.1 seconds open once, and the easy ball entry state is 1 second open three times, and when the second hit is the normal state. In this case, the ball may be opened once for 6 seconds, and in the easy-to-ball state, the open for 2 seconds may be opened twice.

On the other hand, when the ball is entered into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display section 41, the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60. , and the decorative pattern 61 are variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to a variation pattern in which the variation mode from the start to stop of variation is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed according to a variability performance pattern in which a variability mode from the start to stop of the variability is determined. Plural kinds of variation patterns and variation performance patterns are prepared respectively, and each of them has various lengths of variation time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative design 61 is variably displayed according to the variation performance pattern having the same variation time. In the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation display time is set for each pattern as a condition for ending the pattern fluctuation, and when the fluctuation display time elapses, the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 change. be stopped. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern will be exemplified, and the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. In addition, details such as a method of determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, first, the symbols in all three rows are changed like the rotation of the reels of a slot machine at the start of the variation, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped row by row, thereby finally stopping. Display the symbol combination as. Incidentally, as an operation when the variation of the decorative symbols 190 is stopped, it is possible to control not to stop one row at a time but to stop a plurality of rows at the same time so as to attract the attention of the performance display other than the decorative symbols during the variable display, or in a shorter variation time. You may enable it to display a design variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 190, control is performed so as to delay the start of variation of a part of the rows according to the subsequent development of the variation (type of production pattern, etc.), so as to produce a sense of expectation. can be

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable performance pattern includes a normal out of reach performance pattern, a reach out performance pattern, and a reach big hit performance pattern. The normal outlier effect pattern is a effect pattern when displaying a normal outlier pattern combination. The out-of-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern when a combination of out-of-reach symbols is displayed through a ready-to-win state in which a big win is achieved if one more symbol is aligned. The ready-to-win big-hit production pattern is a production pattern when a big-hit symbol combination is displayed through the ready-to-win state. In particular, the reach state pattern includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. A reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ”. The usual out-of-ordinary performance pattern, the out-of-reach performance pattern, and the ready-to-win big hit performance pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second pattern variation corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the big hit will change and the number of unit games of the special game will increase. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first variation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, a pattern for chance presentation may be used to indicate that there is a chance for a relatively advantageous big win to occur. In addition, although the pattern for time saving is used in a time saving state in an Example, since it accompanies time saving in a probability variable state, the time saving pattern is used also in a probability variable state. However, in the modified example, it may be a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation that is different from that for time saving in the probability variation state. Alternatively, it may be a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation, or a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation in a probability variation state without using a pattern for time saving.

When the number of winning lotteries held reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of losing is shortened (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened variation") in order to improve the game efficiency. Similarly, when the number of pending lotteries is 4, the pattern variation time in the case of losing is further shortened than the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "super shortened variation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping become a stop mode indicating a big win after the above-described symbol fluctuation, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is started. The mode of stopping the decorative symbols 61 indicating a big hit is, for example, a mode of combination in which the types of three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there is a big difference in the profit from winning prize balls. A normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called start demo time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the big winning hole 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls fall, it is temporarily closed. The operation from opening to closing of such a large prize winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be cases where multiple short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the big winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 10 times, the normal special game is ended by displaying an effect screen called end demo time. In normal special games, 9 or more balls can be sufficiently expected to be entered per unit game, and sufficient prize balls (also referred to as ``discharged balls'') can be obtained through 10 unit games, resulting in a large profit. is obtained. A special game in which the unit game is repeated 10 times is arbitrarily called a "10R big hit", and a special game in which the unit game is repeated 4 times is arbitrarily called a "4R big hit". In addition, although the unit game is repeated 10 times, the unit game is substantially repeated a few times by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as "substantial nR jackpot") similar to the one.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost short (eg, 0.1 seconds), and the big winning opening 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice and the shortened special game is ended. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the big winning hole 20 is repeated only twice for a very short period of time, almost no ball can enter the big winning hole 20, and the number of balls that come out is substantially zero or few (for example, a few It is a special game equal to the number of payouts corresponding to 1 to 2 balls in one round, such as about 10 balls to about 10 balls. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also called a "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, a shortened special game can be realized by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

Further, through the above-described pattern variation, when the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 and the decorative pattern 61 at the time of stop are in a predetermined small winning mode, a small winning game composed of one unit game , and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game that constitutes the small winning game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is similar to that of the 2R big winning.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop pattern at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), a probability variation, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the special game is finished. During the probability variation, a lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the determination result of the win/fail lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with a probability change may not be clearly indicated on the outside, and may be in a latent probability change state in which it is not explicitly reported as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the probability is variable or non-variable even during the variable probability. It should be noted that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect display device 60 may indicate whether it is a probability variation or a non-probability variation.

An easy ball entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started in the normal game after the special game ends. In the ball-entering easy state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed to extend the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90. - 特許庁Since the number of hits of normal symbols per fixed period of time can be increased and the ease with which a ball enters the second starting port 12 also increases, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will also increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls in possession or gradually increasing the number of balls in possession.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, so-called time saving is further executed in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state. The fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, but the fluctuation number is reached. If a big hit occurs before, the time saving will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is shortened in the reduction of working hours, compared with the case of the normal state in which the pattern is changed with the normal fluctuation time, it is possible to wait until the big hit occurs. time can be shortened, and the easiness of obtaining a big win can be relatively increased. In a modified example, it may be a specification that does not implement the time saving of the special symbol in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko game machine 100 . The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and processes overall game operations such as a lottery when winning the first start port 11 and the second start port 12 in particular. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151 and controls display contents in the effect display device 60 , and particularly changes the effect display contents according to the determination result by the main board 200 . The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 according to the winning to each prize winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154 . The shooting device 156 shoots the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 to the game area 81 one by one. A firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the launcher 156 . The power board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . A performance display section 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200 . The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number indicating the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of shot balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200 . The setting change device 170 is a device for changing settings to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of winning a big hit can be varied according to the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be for the player. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set value. It includes a setting display section 173 that lights up and a setting memory that stores set values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey switch for shifting to a state in which settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") and a state in which settings can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, and the setting key is turned to turn it on. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the setting change state is entered, the number “1” indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172 . The setting display section 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . . . When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, and the setting change is confirmed. , it becomes a playable state. On the other hand, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display portion 173 . In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state to turn it off, the game becomes ready for play. When the setting key is turned off to enable a game, the setting display section 173 is turned off and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key OFF state), the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key ON state), the RAM is cleared and the setting change state is entered. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is off, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display section 173 may also be used as the performance display section 159 . In this case, the combined display section may function as the performance display section 159 in the playable state, and may function as the setting display section 173 in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, and the change of game settings may be disabled.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described. For the part already described as , the term may be used as it is for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 includes a power board 158 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. , a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 for controlling the launch of game balls to the game area, and controls the performance operations and processes. It is configured in a form in which the function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-controller.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, a group of general winning ports (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the output port 34, the pattern display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200 , the firing control board 157 and the payout device 154 . The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the control state of the prize ball payout and the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200, and indirectly controls the launch control board 157. , and the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154 is controlled. Dispensing device 154 includes dispensing motor 166 and ball counting sensor 167 . The firing control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching device 156, and the ball feeding device 164, and controls the ball feeding device 164 and the ball feeding device 164 based on a firing permission signal or the like transmitted from the payout control board 155. A device 156 is controlled to shoot a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes the effect display device 60, the movable accessories 66 (the drive motor 67, the position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109, the cross key 110), the decorative lamp 111 and the electrical and transmit and receive various control signals to and from each other.

The main board 200 and the sub-board 300 are configured so that data transmission/reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is one-way from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300 . Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main substrate 200 to the sub substrate 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub substrate 300 to the configuration included in the main substrate 200. I can't even ask. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 , and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157 , data transmission/reception is performed bidirectionally. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data can be sent and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157. A configuration for data transmission/reception may be employed.

Each functional block included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, and the sub-board 300, which will be described below, is merely an example. may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Also, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. may be divided and provided on a plurality of substrates so that one functional block is configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main substrate 200. As shown in FIG. The main board 200 includes an entry determination means 201, a performance display section 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a normal figure lottery means 213, a reservation control means 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small winning game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening and closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, It comprises main error detection means 284 , setting change means 286 , setting confirmation means 287 and command communication means 205 .

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The entering ball determining means 201 determines entering of a game ball into each winning hole. The ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11 when receiving the first start winning information, and determines that the game ball has won the second starting opening 12 when receiving the second start winning information. to decide. A ball entry judging means 201 judges that the game ball has entered the big prize winning slot 20 when receiving the big winning slot winning information, and judges that the game ball has entered the general winning slot 33 when receiving the general winning slot information. The entering ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 when passing information is received. The entering ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34 when receiving the discharge information. The entered ball determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display section 159 . The ball-entering determination means 201 calculates the "number of balls paid out"/"number of out-balls"×100 when the probability of winning a big hit is normal probability and normal ball-entering state (so-called low probability and low ball-entering state). is displayed on the performance display unit 159 . Therefore, the performance display section 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random Number Generation Means 202>
The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various decisions in the first lottery means 211 , the second lottery means 212 and the normal pattern lottery means 213 . Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number (also referred to as a "lottery value") used in the lottery by the first lottery determination means 221 and the second lottery determination means 222. A range of random numbers is generated by predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 selects from "0" to "255" as a random number (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in design determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. A random number in the range of up to is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 uses "0" to "255 ] is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 generates a random number in the range from "0" to "99" as a random number to be used in the success/failure lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 by means of a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as a random number used when determining the normal symbol. In addition, "random number" here refers to physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, true random numbers in a mathematical sense, and pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using random number generation algorithms. It's okay. Alternatively, random numbers generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used. The random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generating means, or may be generated by different generating means. .

<Universal drawing lottery means 213>
The normal pattern lottery means 213 generates a random number used for the lottery of the normal pattern and the random number used for determining the stop pattern of the normal pattern when the game ball passes through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. 202 to execute a lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 includes a normal symbol success/failure determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. to hold the table. The correspondence relationship between the lottery value for win/fail lottery and the win is defined in the normal symbol determination table, and the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol is defined in the normal symbol determination table. Based on the winning probability and the selection probability of the symbol, the success or failure of the normal symbol and the stop symbol are determined. When the lottery value for the success or failure lottery of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit, the normal symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol with reference to the normal symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the success or failure lottery of the normal symbol is determined. If it falls under the deviation, always determine the aspect of the 1 deviation symbol. When the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit corresponds to a hit, and the normal symbol stops in a predetermined pattern (first winning mode or second winning mode), the opening/closing control means 275, which will be described later, determines the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. The normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening. The normal symbol lottery value is temporarily reserved by a reserve control means 240, which will be described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when it does not exceed the predetermined upper limit number of reservations reserved by the reservation control means 240 .

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success/fail determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination as a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game. A means 231 is included, and a first win/fail lottery is executed as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 causes the first special symbol display section 41 to display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second propriety determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12. A second winning lottery is executed as a winning lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol display section 42 to display the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG.

<First Lottery Value Obtaining Means 216 and Second Lottery Value Obtaining Means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 . Specifically, the first success/failure lottery value for success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern A first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determining means 231 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means. The second lottery value acquiring means 217 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generating means 202 when the ball enters the second starting hole 12 . Specifically, the second success or failure lottery value for success or failure determination by the second success or failure determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determination means 227, the second variation pattern A second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determining means 232 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means.

The first success/failure determination means 221 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the first success/failure lottery value. The second success/failure determination means 222 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the second success/failure lottery value. In the success/failure determination, more specifically, "big hit" indicating transition to a special game, "small hit" indicating transition to a small hit game, " It is determined whether it corresponds to "out of". The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 hold a right/wrong judgment table referred to in the right/wrong judgment. In addition, in order to distinguish the success/failure determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation from the prior success/failure determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "the success/failure determination as the main determination". In this specification, when the term "table" or "selection criteria" is used, the relationship between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined in the table structure. It not only refers to data, but also broadly includes implementation by a program structure that derives a second parameter from a first parameter as such a correspondence relationship. The concept including them is substantially synonymous with the "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

The first right/wrong determination means 221 and the second right/wrong determination means 222 hold tables corresponding to respective right/wrong determinations as right/wrong determination tables referred to in the right/wrong determination. Specifically, a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means 221 (also referred to as a "first right/wrong determination table") and a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the second right/wrong determination means 222 ("second (also referred to as "validity judgment table") is held, and a table to be referred to is selected according to the validity judgment to be executed. Judgment results of big hits, small wins, and misses are associated with winning/failing lottery values in a plurality of winning/failing determination tables, and winning/failing probabilities are determined according to the range setting of the associated big wins. In addition, a plurality of types of win/fail judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. is prepared. In addition, when the probability of a big hit, a small win, and a loss is the same among a plurality of game settings, a winning/failure determination table that is common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a propriety determination table. This figure shows a win-or-fail determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a win-fail determination table corresponding to setting 6. FIG. In the hit/fail determination table of this figure, the determination results of big wins, small wins, and misses are associated with the win/fail lottery values. is determined. The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 refer to the right/wrong judgment table of this figure in the right/wrong judgment as the main judgment. In both of the first success/failure lottery by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure lottery by the second success/failure determination means 222, a big win is usually made only when the success/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0-299. When the odds are variable, the range of the big win is expanded, and the big win is achieved not only when the win/fail lottery value falls within the range of 0-299, but also when it falls within the range of 300-2999. Thus, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state. In this figure, a single hit/fail determination table shows the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability, but the hit/fail determination table may be prepared separately for normal time and for variable probability. It may be separately prepared for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning/failure lottery value does not fall within the big winning range, it will be a small winning if it falls within a predetermined range. In the example of this figure, if the winning lottery value acquired by the first winning judgment means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, it becomes a small hit, and the winning lottery value acquired by the second winning judgment means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first win/fail lottery has a wider range of small wins than the second win/fail lottery, and the small wins are more likely to occur. In this way, when it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all "missing", but in the example of this figure, the winning or not lottery value range when it does not correspond to the small hit among the cases where it does not correspond to the big hit is especially expressed as "outside". In other words, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "whether it is a big hit or not", "minor win" may be included in the broad sense of "loss" in the sense of "not a big hit". Further, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "minor win" and "big win" may be included in the broad definition of "hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the determination table for whether or not the big hit is made and the determination table for whether or not the small win is made are realized in the form of a single winning or not judgment table. good. Further, the "small win" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may be provided in neither game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding success/fail determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning lottery value for each set value. FIG. 1(a) shows the correspondence relationship between the first win/fail lottery value acquired by the first win/fail determination means 221 and the win/fail determination result. FIG. 2(b) shows the correspondence relationship between the second win/fail lottery value acquired by the second win/fail determination means 222 and the win/fail determination result. The range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit at normal time and probability change is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", and the setting value is " 0 to 296 if the set value is "3", 0 to 297 if the set value is "4", 0 to 298 if the set value is "5", and 0 to 299 if the set value is "6". Therefore, the larger the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that result in a big win in the normal time, and the probability of winning a big win in the normal time increases. In addition, the range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit only at the time of probability change (that is, the loss in normal times) is 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "1", and if the setting value is "2". 296 to 2959 if the setting value is "3", 297 to 2969 if the setting value is "4", 298 to 2979 if the setting value is "4", 299 to 2989 if the setting value is "5", and if the setting value is "6", 300-2999. Therefore, the greater the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that will result in a big win at the time of variable probability, and the higher the probability of winning a big win at the time of variable probability. The range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the ratio between the normal big win probability of winning a big win in a normal time and the big winning probability of winning a big win in a variable probability is constant irrespective of the set value. In this figure, the range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the variable probability jackpot probability is 10 times the normal jackpot probability, and is common to all set values "1" to "6". . In addition, the range of win/fail lottery values is determined so that the probability of winning a small win is constant regardless of the set value. In all set values "1" to "6", if the range of the first winning lottery value falls within 56500 to 65535, it will be a small hit, and if the range of the second winning lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535, it will be a small hit. It hits. The range of win/fail lottery values outside the range of a big win or a small win is "off". In this figure, the big win probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence relationship between the win/loss lottery value and the win/fail judgment result may be determined so that the big win probability is the same for different set values.

<First Symbol Determination Means 226 and Second Symbol Determination Means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stop symbol at the start of symbol fluctuation based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning/losing determination. . The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the results of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, A plurality of symbol determination tables are held according to the determination result. A first win/fail determination means 221 holds a first pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to when winning big, a first symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a first symbol determination table for loss to be referred to when losing. A second win/fail determination means 222 holds a second pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to for big wins, a second symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a second symbol determination table for misses to be referred to for misses. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the success/failure determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination to be executed when the symbol variation is started from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately called "symbol determination as the final determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a miss, and FIG. 7(c) is a This is a table to be referred to when the result of winning/failure determination is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of this figure in the symbol determination as the final determination. Each symbol determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the types of special symbols and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value. The types of special symbols are associated with the judgment results of big wins, small wins, and misses, respectively. "10" corresponds to an out. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by combining segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a big hit and probability fluctuation after the big hit. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144”. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "actual 4R hit") with probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first design lottery value, and in the case of the second design lottery value It is associated with "145 to 149". The type "2" indicates a 2R big hit with variable probability, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "150 to 189". Type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot. Type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot, and type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the contents of the jackpot and whether or not there is a change in probability thereafter) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery values.

In addition, it is also possible to provide more types of special patterns, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of types of special patterns, it is possible to increase the number of types of patterns and increase the number of jackpots. You can set less types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into a larger number of types of jackpots corresponding to the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one kind of jackpot is determined so as to correspond to each of the kind of special symbols selected at the time of the first lottery and the kind of special symbols selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of the probability change to be the same between the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery values of the entire range when the winning/failing determination result is out. Therefore, it is decided that the same special symbol should always be stop-displayed in the case of a loss. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of being out.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0-49", and the type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50-99". The type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as the preliminary symbol determination table also in the preliminary symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 indicate the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination, indicating that the value is the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of reservations. As the pre-symbol determination table, a table that is further subdivided so that complicated determination can be performed, or a table that summarizes and simplifies the determination range of the big hit symbols for executing a similar special game may be used. . In addition, when the pattern is uniformly determined at the time of loss as in the present embodiment, a specific pattern can be selected without referring to the obtained symbol lottery value and without preparing a pattern determination table for loss. may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 obtains from the random number generating means 202 the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is determined. It is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determination means 232 uses the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 as the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined. Based on this, it is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main substrate 200 include a variation pattern table to be referred to for determining the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and a change pattern table to the start port. Each holds or shares a pre-pattern determination table used to generate information for determination of execution of look-ahead processing at the time of ball entry. In the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the stop when the special symbol is variably displayed is determined, and the fluctuation time varies depending on the type. That is, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is determined, a variation display time is substantially determined for each pattern as a termination condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbols are displayed. is stopped from fluctuating. Incidentally, the variation pattern determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation is also appropriately called "variation pattern determination as the main determination" in order to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative design to be described later, it may be defined as different types of variation patterns with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table of this figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of this figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), if the success/failure determination result is out of the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select "normal 2”. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, the pattern range number "4" and "no reach out" are selected. As "no reach out", different variation patterns are selected according to the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0 to 2, 7 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 3, number of holds is 4, a variation pattern of 4 seconds is selected.

In this figure, an example in which five types are mainly classified according to the variation time will be described. A plurality of variation performance patterns are prepared for each variation pattern on the sub-board 300, and there are dozens of variation performance patterns in total. is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "No Reach Out" also varies depending on the number of holds. When the number of reservations is 0, 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" narrows, and the lottery value of "no reach out" Wider range. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, and the probability that the variation pattern with a long variation time is selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence relationship between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of reservations decreases.

If the success/failure determination result is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, it selects "Super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6". If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "normal 2”.

In the normal state, when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, select "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, it selects "normal 3" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10".

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determination means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value of the pattern range number (0 to 10) is It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is the lottery or the second lottery, and the number of pending lotteries. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the preliminary pattern determination is exemplified so as to have a table for each success/failure determination result. In addition to deriving only information about the range in which it is positioned, the control means of the sub-board 300 may be controlled so as to determine what kind of variation is to be performed along with the result of the preliminary suitability determination.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the variation time is the same as in FIG. "No reach out, shortened" is a variation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as the "no reach out" in FIG. 8(a). "Reach without reach shortening" also selects a different variation pattern depending on the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0, 1, 1 second variation pattern when the number of holds is 2 to 4 are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the game state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery, and the second lottery is given priority over the first lottery, the ball-entering state is easy due to the time saving. A situation in which the holding of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the loss fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table in which a long-time (for example, 10 seconds) fluctuation pattern that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reservations is referred to. You can do it.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4 , the reservation control means 240 includes a special figure reservation means 241 and a normal figure reservation means 242 . When the special figure holding means 241 newly acquires the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value, the symbol variation corresponding to the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value acquired before that. is displayed, the start of pattern variation corresponding to the newly obtained first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is suspended, and the win/fail lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding pattern. Here, for the first special symbols, the upper limit is four, and the first success or failure lottery value, the first pattern lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored. A second lottery value, a second pattern lottery value, and a second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal pattern reservation means 242 stores the normal pattern lottery value acquired by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. The numbers of these reservations are represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure reservation display portion 71, the second special figure reservation display portion 72, and the normal figure reservation display portion 75, respectively. The number of reservations by the special figure reservation means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60. - 特許庁

The lottery value of the second success/failure lottery retained in the special figure retention means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first success/failure lottery, and the pattern variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the big win lottery value is reserved as the first win/fail lottery, the pattern variation corresponding to the big win lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is not displayed as long as the lottery value is held as the second win/fail lottery. Therefore, even if the big win is reserved in the first win/fail lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of consecutive big wins can be obtained by continuing to beat until the big win is held in the second win/fail lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251 , a second special figure control means 252 and a general figure control means 254 . The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the first winning lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let The first special figure control means 251 makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win-or-fail lottery or the second win-or-fail lottery made before is completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let The second special figure control means 252 also makes the completion of the fluctuation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery performed before that a new symbol variation start condition.

The first special figure control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success/failure lottery when the success/failure lottery value of the second success/failure lottery is stored by the special figure retention means 241.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second success or failure lottery regardless of whether or not the success or failure lottery value of the first success or failure lottery is stored by the special figure reservation means 241.例文帳に追加Thus, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read and the pattern variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out and the symbol variation does not start until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes zero.

The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing to start and stop the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, and the variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and the value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. The normal pattern control means 254 causes the normal pattern display section 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as the fluctuation display of the normal pattern.

<Special Figure Adjustment Means 276>
The special figure adjustment means 276 waits the start of the other variation display while one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 is the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball entered the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The variable display of 52 is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are reserved, the second win/fail lottery value is always preferentially consumed and the second special pattern 52 is continuously varied and displayed.

In addition, the special figure adjustment means 276 in the modified example changes the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 It may be selectively variably displayed. For example, when the ball is entered in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the display fluctuates in the order of the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52. be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the success or failure lottery value. Which special symbol should be varied is determined according to the order of game ball entry, that is, the retention order of the winning lottery value in the retention control means 240, so the player can easily grasp the variation order visually.

Even if the special figure adjustment means 276 in another modification displays the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entry. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 . For example, when both the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed alternately. Which special symbol should be varied is simply alternated regardless of the order of game ball entry, so the player can intuitively grasp the order of variation.

When one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner, the special figure adjusting means 276 waits for the other to start the variable display. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols is not started while the special game is being executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The prior determination means 235 includes a first lottery prior determination means 236 and a second lottery prior determination means 237 . First lottery pre-determination means 236 includes various random numbers acquired by first lottery value acquisition means 216 before execution of various determinations by first success/failure determination means 221, first symbol determination means 226, and first variation pattern determination means 231 Before the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol control means 251 using the information about the fluctuation is determined in advance. The second lottery pre-determination means 237, the second lottery value acquisition means 217 various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before executing various determinations by the second success/failure determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 Before the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252 using the information about the fluctuation is determined in advance.

The first lottery prior determination means 236 includes a first prior lottery value determination table, a first prior symbol lottery value determination table, and a first prior variation pattern random value determination as determination tables for prior determination of the first lottery means 211. hold the table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior variation pattern determination table. These determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information about the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub board 300 by command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination. The first lottery prior determination means 236 (preliminary success/failure determination for the first game) refers to the first prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the result of the prior suitability determination. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the prior winning judgment result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (preliminary determination regarding the first game) is performed by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry of the ball (indicating that it is the first lottery), the information indicating the number of pending balls, and the like.

The second lottery prior determination means 237 (preliminary success/failure determination for the second game) refers to the second prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. If the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the result of prior suitability determination. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "64000 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, referring to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . If the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the second preliminary variation pattern random value judgment table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern judgment result. . If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (preliminary right or wrong determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. (Indicating that it is a second lottery), information indicating the number of pending balls, etc. are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The various types of information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 are stored in a predetermined preliminary determination result storage area with an upper limit of 4, similarly to the number of reserved storages. It should be noted that the pre-determination result may be stored using the reservation storage area that the reservation control means 240 stores. The information may be erased based on transmission of the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas and erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Further, as the determination table for preliminary determination, the determination table for main determination may be used without providing a table dedicated to preliminary determination, and the preliminary determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second game may be performed. A part or all of them may share a common pre-determination table. In this way, by sharing this table with other determination tables, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the main board 200 . It should be noted that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the prior determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, such as transmitting only the determination result of acceptance or rejection, for example. In addition, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 without being judged by the advance judgment means 235, and the sub-board 300 may be configured to determine the content of the preliminary determination.

The prior determination means 235 may refer to a prior success/failure lottery value determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the success/failure lottery value and the prior success/failure determination result differs according to the setting value set by the setting change device 170 . As with the win/loss determination table described above, a plurality of types of pre-win/fail lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the pre-win/fail lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set values of the game settings. In addition, a pre-win/fail lottery value determination table that can be used in common among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be pre-determined by a combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the pre-win/fail determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior success/failure determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 3(a) is a prior determination table referred to by the first lottery prior determination means 236, and FIG. 4(b) is a prior determination table referred to by the second lottery prior determination means 237. If the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 294", the result of the prior win/fail determination is "11", indicating that all the settings 1 to 6 will result in a big hit. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the result of prior win/loss determination is "12", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 2 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "296", the result of prior win/loss determination is "13", which indicates that a big hit is achieved with the normal setting of 3 or more or with all the settings during the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "14", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 4 or more or in all the settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "298", the result of prior win/fail determination is "15", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "299", the prior win/loss determination result is "16", indicating that a big win is achieved with the normal setting of 6 or all the settings during the variable probability. Also, when the win/loss lottery value is "300 to 2949", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "21", indicating that all the settings at the time of probability change will result in a big win. If the win/loss lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the result of prior win/loss determination is "22", indicating that a big hit is achieved at the setting of 2 or higher at the time of variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the prior win/loss judgment result is "23", which indicates that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 3 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the result of prior win/loss determination is "23", indicating that a big hit is achieved when the odds are set to 4 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the prior win/loss determination result is "25", indicating that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 5 or more. When the win/loss lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the prior win/loss determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability variation will result in a big hit. Furthermore, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary judgment result is " 30”, indicating that it will be a small hit in all settings. In addition, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the advance judgment result is " 40”, indicating that it is out in all settings. By using such a prior success/failure determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate prior success/failure determination result for each game setting value.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game. A special game is executed by determining that a condition is met and opening the big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in indicating the transition to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. A special game is executed by determining that a special game operating condition is established and opening a big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加

The special game is a game in which the operation of opening and closing the big winning opening 20 is continued a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated ten times, a 4R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot in which a unit game whose opening time is shorter than the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot is repeated twice. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first lottery. In the 10R big win and 4R big win, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in principle in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the big prize opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 terminates the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is consumed. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big prize opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
A small winning game control means 265 operates a small winning game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small winning mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small winning. A small winning game is executed by judging that the condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit, the small hit game control means 265 determines that when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small win mode, the small win game control means 265 A small winning game is executed by determining that a winning game operating condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加

In the small winning game, the unit game is executed once, and the big winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small winning game control means 265 opens the big winning opening 20 for only about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the big winning opening 20 to end the small winning game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability variable state, the time saving state, and the ball easy state. A specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to a variable probability state, a time saving state and an easy ball entry state after the end of the special game when the special symbol is a pattern of a specific jackpot accompanied by a shift to variable probability. The variable probability state, the time saving state and the easy ball entry state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally shortened. do. However, in a normal state, reference is made to the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of retentions of the winning/failure lottery value by the retention control means 240, and as the number of retentions by the retention control means 240 decreases, a variation pattern with a longer variation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of variable probability of normal symbols, short time of normal symbols, and extension of the opening of the second start port 12 is performed, so that the entry to the second start port 12 The ball frequency (ease of entering the ball) is improved. During the variable probability state, the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 is a big hit is maintained at a high value. In addition, the specific game control means 270 makes the second starting port 12 open extension state when the specific jackpot is obtained, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning lottery is the second winning lottery. It shifts to a probability variable state higher than the normal probability state.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening/closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 and the big winning opening 20 . The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 when the normal pattern is stopped in a specific manner. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 with a short or long opening time according to the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and opens the second start port 12 with a long opening time in the easy-to-enter state. 2 Open the starting port 12 . To improve the easiness of entering a ball into the second starting port 12 and to enable the player to continue the game without reducing the number of balls in his possession. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the big winning gate solenoid 92 to open the big winning gate 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution unit 280, main power failure processing execution unit 282, main error detection unit 284>
The main initial process execution means 280 executes a control start process for the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored. The main power-off process executing means 282 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the main substrate 200 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200 . The control start process, the abnormality handling process, and the abnormality detection process of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting Changing Means 286, Setting Confirming Means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting change means 286 shifts to the setting change state described above. The setting change unit 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is changed to the setting change state. The setting change unit 286 sequentially changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in response to pressing of the setting change button 172 in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . , the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as displayed on the setting display section 173 . When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change means 286 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. If the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the setting confirmation state described above. The setting confirmation unit 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. Unlike the setting change unit 286 described above, the setting confirmation unit 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and also updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not do. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting value data managed by the setting memory may be numbers "0" to "5" instead of numbers "1" to "6". In this case, setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , setting value “4” may correspond to setting 5, and setting value “5” may correspond to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the set value data is set to the initial value "0", it will not be determined to be abnormal. can be simplified. In addition, when executing a lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each set value in the prefetch process, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when "1" to "6" are used as set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as the offset data. In addition, the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display section 173 when numerical values of "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 173 . In the latter case, the numeric data of "0" to "5" are converted into the numeric values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the manager of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 for transmitting control commands necessary for executing payout etc. to the payout control board 155, and a sub-controller for transmitting control commands necessary for executing performance control etc. to the sub-board 300. A command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the determination of the entering ball into each winning hole by the entering ball determination means 201, and the main board 200. Sends a command that indicates the status of an error that occurred in The sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command when starting the symbol variation.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 varies at the timing when the first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, and the variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and the value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. Also, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303 . After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, regardless of whether or not the pattern variation display corresponding to the lottery starts immediately, the winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (first start opening 11, second start opening It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the type information of the port 12), the information of the number of reservations, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, on the side of the sub-board 300, it is possible to speculatively recognize the winning result before the turn to start pattern variation, based on the received preliminary determination result. Processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. Sub-control command transmitting means 207 is set by special game control means 260 information on the special game, information on the small winning game by small winning game control means 265, information on the lottery result by normal figure lottery means 213, setting change means 286 setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300 . Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits various kinds of control in the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing by the main initial process executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284, information on errors, and the like. information about various signals and the like to be sent to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes pattern mode determination means 301, pattern storage means 302, effect determination means 303, effect control means 304, timer means 307, effect setting means 308, sub-initial process execution means 360, sub-power-off process execution means 362, A sub-error detecting means 364 , a command receiving means 370 , and a sub-side prior determination means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of production patterns in which the content of the production image to be displayed on the production display device 60 and the display process thereof are determined when the decorative pattern 61 is changed. The performance patterns include a plurality of variable performance patterns in which the variation process from start to stop of variation in the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 and the performance process are determined, and the degree of expectation for the big win displayed separately from the variable display of the decorative pattern. and a plurality of forewarning effect patterns that foretell the height of the variable display before stopping.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205 , and the sub-side preliminary determination means 371 holds the preliminary determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The effect determination means 303 includes normal effect determination means 373 and prefetch effect determination means 374 . The normal effect determination means 373 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first lottery or the determination result of the second lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker 108, decides the content of the presentation to be output to the decoration lamp 111 or the like. The effect determination means 303 determines the content of effect according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal effect determination means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232, and is selected from among a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern transmitted from the command communication means 205. Either one is selected and read out from the pattern storage means 302 . The normal effect determination means 373 sends the information of the read variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304 . The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. In addition, there may be a case where the variable effect pattern is determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the contents of the look-ahead effect determined by the look-ahead effect determination means 374 are varied. A production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determination means 374 more accurately specifies the result of this determination based on the result of prior determination from the command communication means 205, the result of prior determination in the past held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the results obtained, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before this determination and the execution details are determined. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the prior determination result prior to the prior determination result received this time. determine whether or not to Based on the judgment result, it identifies the result of this judgment related to the pre-judgment result received this time, the selected variation pattern, etc., and determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the execution content of the pre-reading effect based on the specific result. . Since the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate in many parts of the effect determining means 303, the effect determining means 303 will be described as including both, except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determination means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of effect images having the same variable time according to the change pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stationary symbols of the decorative symbols 61 based on the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is determined according to the variation performance pattern of the design. The symbol mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the effect control means 304 . The symbol mode determination means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 61 is formed as a combination of three patterns. For example, when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 indicates a transition to a 4R big hit or a 10R big hit special game. , a specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as "777" and "111" is selected. A specific combination such as "357" is also selected when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, but these specific combinations are not necessarily combinations of three symbols. It doesn't have to be. If the result of the judgment is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination of three patterns such as "312" or "946" that does not match, and it is a specific combination selected at the time of a 2R big hit or a small hit. Non-applicable combinations are selected. If the hit/fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and if a variation pattern that indicates an outlier with a reach is selected, a combination that does not have a single pattern such as "191" or "727" to select.

The variation display pattern of the decorative symbols defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, that is, the performance process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation. The variable effect patterns include a pattern for displaying a normal winning pattern, a pattern for displaying a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state in which one more pattern is aligned, and a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state. Contains patterns for when In particular, the pattern when passing through the reach state includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. A performance determining means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of decorative symbols having the same variation time as the special symbols according to the variation pattern of the special symbols.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 determines the variation for which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The effect content for time saving is an effect in which a background image or sound is output to give the impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to the time saving or probability change.

The advance notice effect pattern is a effect pattern for temporarily displaying an image, animation, video, etc. of a specific character or motif, a effect pattern for moving a character, or a effect pattern for outputting a specific sound. The performance by the foretelling performance pattern is executed in parallel with the pattern variation, and preliminarily suggests that the degree of expectation that the pattern variation is stopped in the big hit mode is high. For example, there is a normal foretelling effect in which only one character image is displayed on the screen, and a group foretelling effect in which a large number of characters are displayed so as to pass from one end of the screen to the other. In addition, a step-up notice performance is further included in which the display process of the notice performance is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big win.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (post-read notice) for predicting the final stop state of the pattern by executing the effect at the timing after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-win state, and the decorative pattern 61. There is also a pattern (prior notice before reach) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at a timing that is not always stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the preliminary performance on the performance display device 60 according to the determination result of the win/fail lottery or the preliminary determination result by a predetermined preliminary lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and displays it. To decide a notice performance pattern. A performance determining means 303 holds a preliminary announcement determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the preliminary performance and a preliminary announcement type table to be referred to when selecting the kind of preliminary performance pattern. The advance notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to according to the judgment result of the success or failure lottery or the result of prior judgment, and the advance notice effect is displayed at a higher probability when the lottery is successful than when the lottery is lost. As described above, the correspondence relationship between the determination result of the win/fail lottery and whether or not to display the advance notice effect is determined. Thus, the display of the advance notice effect itself can suggest a high degree of expectation for the big win.

The effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern 61 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The production control means 304 sets the reception of the command to start the variation of the decorative pattern 61 as a condition for starting the variable display of the new decorative pattern. When the effect determining means 303 determines to display the notice effect, the effect control means 304 displays the notice effect according to the selected notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form superimposed on the pattern change effect. Let

A performance control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery when the win/fail lottery value of the second win/fail lottery is stored, and whether the win/fail lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is stored. The pattern variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery is started regardless of whether or not. As a result, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read and the variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes 0, and the decorative design does not start to change. In this manner, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol 61. - 特許庁

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66 . The effect control means 304 has effect display control means 305 , sound control means 306 and lamp control means 309 . Effect display control means 305 controls display on the effect display device 60 , and sound control means 306 controls sound output from the speaker 108 . The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decoration lamp 111 .

During the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is varying. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is variably displayed, but other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, is regarded as the main performance content in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal-sized decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加A special effect may be displayed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the pattern is fluctuating by variably displaying the substitute pattern, which is a decorative pattern smaller in size than the normal-sized decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing from an alternative pattern, a normal-sized decorative pattern is also called a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern".

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern for directing the result of the judgment result, and has a display form simplified (in other words, simplified, simplified) than the normal decorative pattern, and the normal decorative pattern It is displayed in a more simplified variation process than The alternative pattern has an external display form corresponding to the portion indicating the pattern type of the normal decorative pattern, for example, has a display form representing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the pattern type. In addition, the alternative pattern is variably displayed in an area narrower than the area where the decorative design is variably displayed. Typically, it is located at a position where it is difficult for elements other than the design to interfere with the main effect, such as a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Fluctuating display. The alternative pattern is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative pattern, but has a display form in which at least the type of pattern can be identified in appearance. The alternative pattern may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

A plurality of substitute patterns displayed in place of a plurality of normal decorative patterns suggest a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning lottery will be in an advantageous state for the player due to the combination of stop modes at the end of variation. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols suggest that the likelihood of a big win in the variation is high when two of the three alternative symbols are in a ready-to-win state. In addition, the left and right symbols in the reach state are “3” and “7”, which indicate that the expectations are relatively high, and the expectations are “1” and “2”. The degree of expectation of the reach state may be suggested by becoming a pattern of a type that suggests a relatively low degree. It should be noted that the alternative pattern does not appear to be in a definite stop state, but is in a temporary stop state in which slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. In addition, the display periods may overlap instead of displaying the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern exclusively. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, the variable display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued and the variation of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative design, the special design is fluctuating in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 while the first special design 51 and the second special design 52 are changing, with an image that is about the same as or smaller than the alternative design. A simple symbol suggesting that there is something may be variably displayed. The simple design may consist of a variable display of a combination of three patterns in the same way as the normal decorative design, or may consist of a variable display of a single design, or may be a simple symbol ("O", "X", etc.). may be configured in such a manner that they are sequentially switched. The simple design is not related to the variable display mode of the normal decorative design or alternative design, it displays a constant variation from the start to the end of the variation of the special design, and when it is stopped, it is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative design. may be displayed as It should be noted that the simple symbols may be changed as long as the indication that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbols are reported at least, and the simple symbols may be displayed in a combination of two symbols or the like. Also, the simple design may be called "simple decorative design", "sub decorative design", "sub design", "mini decorative design", "mini design", and the like. Aside from the effect display device 60, variable display of a decorative pattern called a fourth pattern that shows a display equivalent to the simple pattern by means of a light emitting mode such as an LED may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during variation of special symbols, display of results) in the event that a problem occurs in the effect display device 60 or the like. As an example of the display mode of the fourth pattern, the LED lights up in sequence as "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). Alternatively, the variable display may be suggested by blinking in a single color according to the type of the special pattern, and the luminescence color when stopped display may suggest the type of loss or big hit.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used for games. The clock means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from power-on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit that incorporates a battery and can continue to measure the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off or during a power failure may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is the possibility that slight differences may occur in the time of each game machine due to individual differences or time lags. is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the clock means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronization effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 in a synchronization effect period which is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the pattern fluctuation and the game state. The synchronization performance period lasts for several minutes, its length is longer than one symbol variation time, and can include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronizing effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and reproduction of a predetermined music piece and video is determined in the effect pattern. A plurality of types of performance patterns for the synchronized performance are prepared, and different types of performance patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as the month, date, day of the week, and time.

Synchronization performance is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or during a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, the "during normal game" includes (1) "normal game during variable display" in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which symbols are not displayed in variable display and the standby demo screen is not displayed. , and (3) ``Normal game during display of standby demo screen'' in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of the variable display of symbols. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the case of (2) and (3), the output mode for control such as volume reduction and brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). can be different from when Also, while the standby demo screen is being displayed, the player can input information related to the mobile cooperation system, which will be described later, by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronization effect are output. It is suppressed, and screen display such as effect customization by the mobile cooperation system is given priority.

The synchronization effect is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined musical piece or video is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as "synchronization effect start time"). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronization effect may be the time that arrives after a predetermined time interval from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time on the hour or half past the hour based on the standard time. may be Alternatively, times may be set that may vary depending on the date or day of the week, not at regular intervals such as "every hour", but at different intervals such as one hour later, then three hours later, and so on. Intervals may vary by date or day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be designated by a game clerk for each game parlor. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of machines of the same model installed in the same game parlor. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the arrival of a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, a plurality of machines are powered on at the same time in an amusement arcade. As a result, when the predetermined time is reached, the same synchronizing effect is executed on the plurality of game machines all at once. As a result, the performance is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized on multiple devices, and the same music and images are played at the same time, creating a synergistic effect with a sense of realism, as if a live performance or movie was being shown on the spot. A dramatic effect is obtained.

The function of synchronized performance is similarly built in other game machines of the same model, and a plurality of game machines on the same game island are simultaneously turned on by the game clerk every day. Then, all of the plurality of game machines that are powered on at the same time reach the synchronization performance start time almost at the same time, so that the synchronization performance can be executed all at once. This is called multi-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only will the video display be synchronized across multiple units, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized across multiple units. increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes the history of game results and the history of effect results. The history of the game result is the result of the game that leads to the number of balls that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of variable probability, and the number of time reductions. Unlike game profits, the history of performance results is recorded in order to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of performance and the right to make it easier for specific types of performance to appear. It is information such as the score of For example, in order to convert the number of appearances of a predetermined effect or the result of a mini game into a score and give it to the player, encoded information indicating the score or game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, the score and game history information obtained by decoding are accumulated in the player's mobile terminal. A cooperation system between the gaming machine and the mobile terminal of the player via the two-dimensional code will be described later. It should be noted that the score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). With this as an opportunity, the number of customizable items increases.

Effect setting means 308 stores settings for selecting one of a plurality of types of effect content options as effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and game history. For example, a pattern storage means 302 prepares a plurality of types of performance patterns with different motifs, characters and music to be displayed as performance patterns to be displayed during special games, and the player is allowed to select which performance to display. It is assumed that Alternatively, a plurality of kinds of motifs or character patterns are prepared in a pattern storage means 302 as designs of patterns included in decorative patterns to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which pattern to display. In these cases, when the player operates the production button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed, and the production pattern is selected through the operation, the production setting means 308 selects the contents of the selection. Remember. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting means 308. - 特許庁

The sub-initial processing executing means 360 executes control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored. The sub-power-off process execution unit 362 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the sub-board 300 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300 . When the sub-error detection means 364 detects power interruption, the sub power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as power interruption processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player is registered as a user by setting an account and a password on the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354 in advance. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 causes the screen of the performance display device 60 to display the two-dimensional code 350 encoded with the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. - 特許庁Character information (also referred to as "password information") in which the player's identification information and performance score history are coded from the dedicated site is transmitted to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display the input screen of the password information, and allows the player to input the password information through button operation such as the cross key 110 . The performance setting means 308 decrypts the entered password information and registers it as the identification information of the player and the performance score history, so that the player's previous game contents and performance score state can be handed over. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization for selecting various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko game machine 100, with the progress of the game and the performance, the performance setting means 308 adds the score given to the player as a profit in the performance at any time and accumulates it as a performance score history, and the player , it is possible to carry out production customization at any time and select and set favorite elements as various production elements. Scoring in performance is basically added for each pattern variation, and a higher score is given to a performance type with a higher degree of expectation for shift to a special game, and a higher score is given when shifting to a special game.

As effect customization, the player utilizes a part of the cumulatively acquired points, and according to the number of points used, colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc. that constitute the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 are changed. You can change production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. Multiple types of items are prepared for each customizable production element, and a different value is set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance is given to increase the customizable items. When a player operates a button to instruct the end of a game or performance customization, a performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and controls the performance display. Means 305 displays on effect display device 60 . The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, and decodes the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354 . Further, the information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to a game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as performance benefits and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via transmission means such as display and reading of the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol changes and the number of presentations increase, so that points can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. As shown in FIG. The main substrate 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, a main ROM 292, and the like. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling game operations in general. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 , and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290 . Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A ball entry signal from each ball entrance and a payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as winning opening solenoids, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the result of the win/fail lottery, the determination result of the pattern, the determination result of the variation pattern, and the like. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 by one-way communication.

The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte command type data called MODE data and 1-byte command content data called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and the command content data and transmitting them to the sub board 300 . The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned in advance to each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of instruction type data and instruction content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 requires two transmissions of 1 byte each in order to transmit 2-byte command data due to the specification of transmitting 1-byte data per data transmission. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise, etc., the main circuit board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the sub circuit board 300 reads the same data twice in succession, the completion of transmission and reception of the data is determined. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice in succession, and transmits it up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, effect control device 313, and the like. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data defining a effect process and display pattern data defining a effect display process. A sub-control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and sound pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and effect control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. FIG. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A signal from an external device such as the effect button 109 is acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives external devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 by the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , voice output, lighting of lamps, and performances by character actions. Sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and sound pattern data to effect control device 313 . In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, but are separated and connected to each other. may be formed as a separate substrate with the

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. As shown in FIG. The performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320 , a control RAM 322 , a data ROM 324 , a display control circuit 326 and an audio control circuit 314 . The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding raw material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display and effect display as a effect object indicating the result of winning or failing lottery determination. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data that defines the action when adding a dramatic action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and lines of characters that are output during production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data designated by the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. is executed by the control CPU 320 . As a result, the control CPU 320 transmits commands relating to effect display, effect image data, and motion data to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, the control CPU 320 transmits commands and audio data relating to audio output to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332 , a drawing memory 334 , a drawing circuit 336 , a frame buffer 338 and a display circuit 340 , each connected via a bus 330 . For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure generically represents buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334 , and compressed data among these data are decoded by the decoder 332 . The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the decoder 332 decodes effect image data and motion data, and used as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60 .

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 . At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "general display pattern data" that defines the outline of the effect display process. For example, in the general display pattern data, a rough flow of a series of effect display processes is defined, such as the start and stop timing of variation of decorative patterns, the order of reproduction of a plurality of moving images, and the timing of start and stop of reproduction. . On the other hand, detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns, and the display processing order for each frame to display moving images based on motion data. A process is defined.

When performing display control based on the "general display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the process from the data ROM 324, and uses both display pattern data. display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "general display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other. ”. For example, when the effect control means performs specific processing based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In the modified example, even if the display pattern data is not divided into the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data", and the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324, good.

In this embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313, a configuration including a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324 and a display control circuit 326 is shown. In a modification, control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Also, the processing that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320 , the control RAM 322 or the data ROM 324 . For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute processing that is supposed to be performed by the decoder 332 , the drawing circuit 336 and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326 . Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338 . In addition, the hardware configuration may not include the display control circuit 326 in the effect control device 313, in this case, the processing to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU320, the control RAM322 or the data ROM324 may be

Further, in this embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300, a configuration including a production control device 313 in addition to the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311 and sub-ROM 312 is shown. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312 and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU310, the sub RAM311 or the sub ROM312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320 , the sub RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322 , and the sub ROM 312 may function as the data ROM 324 . In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. may

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the main board 200 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process executing means 280 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process executing means 280 . When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as setting internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y of S122), setting change processing is executed (S124). On the other hand, if RAM clear is OFF (N of S122), setting confirmation processing is executed (S126). In S105, if the setting key is in the OFF state (N in S105), the processing of S122 to S126 is skipped.

Subsequently, according to the operating state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of data stored in the main RAM 291, power-off recovery processing or initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power interruption information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the power interruption recovery process is executed. do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on or even when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power interruption information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch has not been turned on (N of S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N of S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y of S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is checked (S110). As will be described later, if the processing was completed normally when the power was turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 uses the checksum to The data in the main RAM 291 are inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 are not normal (N of S112), the data in the main RAM 291 are initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y of S112), a process for returning to the state before the power was turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initialization of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Next, it clears the command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off, and requests the command transmission of various information indicating the game state. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed states of the second starting port 12 and the big prize winning port 20 are restored to the states before the power was turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the initialization of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are held as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start an interrupt process, which will be described later, and an interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) thereafter, and interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S132), the process of S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the setting change state is entered (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y of S140), the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are updated, and the setting values stored in the setting memory are updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N of S144), the processing of S138 to S142 is repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display section 173 is hidden so that the setting values cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The setting confirmation state is entered (S156), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N of S160), the processing of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y of S160), the setting display section 173 is hidden. to make the set value invisible (S162), and return.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors power interruption (S204). When a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) detects a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158, the power supply voltage monitoring circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290 to execute power-off memory. In the process, the power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and when the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y of S206), executes the power-off process. Therefore, the process proceeds to S212. If the value of the power interruption confirmation flag does not match the power interruption confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial random number per special symbol, and the soft initial random number per special symbol, An initial value random number update process is executed (S208), a timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. Thereafter, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is disabled (S202-S208), after the timer interrupt is enabled in S210, the interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

When power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the contents of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the power-on data was not saved normally, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216) and proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the power-on data has been saved normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power off information flag. (S218). Next, when the power is turned on next time, in order to check the backed-up data of the main RAM 291, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the loop continues until the power is turned off. Note that the main power-off processing executing means 282 implemented by the main CPU 290 executes the above power-off processing.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes interrupt processing. First, an interrupt operating condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , 2nd starting port effective period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening effective period setting process (S332), special symbol variation start monitoring control Processing (S334), Abnormality detection processing (S336), Ball passing time abnormality detection processing (S338), Game state display processing (S340), Handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), Launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch attached to the game board surface, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, door / frame open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch state signal are monitored. , data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291 . The data indicating this input state consists of level data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt, and input port data at the time of the previous interrupt). This is data indicating a switch for which switching is observed by comparing the data of the input port by exclusive OR).

In various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. A normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, a predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value of each random number, the maximum value, and the initial value are read out from the main RAM 291, and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. Also, when the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 to update the initial value. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, the range of the random number is completed. Then, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. An initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to zero. A similar process is performed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, no timer update is performed.

In the second starting opening valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting opening 12 is set. In the second start port 12, there is an effective period during which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters and a lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and a prize ball payout and a second special symbol are executed even if a game ball enters. An invalid period is set during which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the second starting opening winning monitoring process is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting opening 12, so the game ball enters the second starting opening 12. Even if it does, the payout of prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting opening 11, the big winning opening 20, the first working opening 31, the second working opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "ordinary electric accessary product in operation", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is valid is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. If the state of the normal pattern is not "ordinary electric accessories in operation", if the value of the second start opening effective extension timer is not 0, the second start opening valid period flag indicates that the second start opening 12 is valid. If the value of the second starting port valid extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second starting port is in the invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag.

In the prize winning monitoring process (S316), it is checked whether the game ball has passed through the switch. If so, update the win counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155 are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation opening 31 and the second operation opening 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32. When the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit value of 4, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and a random number related to normal symbols is stored in the main RAM 291 .

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol control is in progress, the process relating to the normal symbol display section 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal design is "during normal design fluctuation", normal design fluctuation processing is executed, and when it is "normal design stop design display", normal design stop design display processing is executed, "normal electric If it is "in operation", the normal electric auditors operation process is executed, and if it is "demonstrating the end of normal electric auditors operation", the normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation process, after the normal symbol fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the normal symbol fluctuation stop setting is executed, and the state of the normal symbol is changed to " Set to "Normal symbol stop symbol display". In the normal pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is over, the operation end setting of the normal pattern corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, set the state of the normal pattern to "normal electric accessory in operation", save the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time of normal electric accessory operation start, and start normal electric accessory operation Execute the operation setting of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time. In the case of loss, the normal design state is set to "normal design fluctuation standby". When it is determined that the winning number of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessories 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings by monitoring the winning of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessories 90 of the game ball in the normal electric accessories operating process. , executes the operation end setting of the normal electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. When it is determined that the number of winning prizes of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum winning number, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored. When it is determined that the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening is completed, and the opening of the entrance of the series of normal electric accessories 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the normal electric accessories 90 and the second start opening valid Execute the extension time setting. When it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not performed. In the ordinary electric accessory operation end demonstration process, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol Set to “Waiting for fluctuation”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal symbol fluctuation" and the value of the number of normal symbol operation pending balls is other than 0, the normal symbol fluctuation is determined to start When it is determined to start the normal pattern variation, the number of normal pattern operation suspension balls is decremented, hit determination, stop pattern determination, normal pattern variation pattern number setting, and normal pattern variation time setting are executed. . After that, the state of the normal design is set to "during normal design fluctuation", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for normal design state setting, hit determination, and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 winning and the second starting opening 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls with the operation pending of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number, It is stored in the buffer as a special symbol per random number used in big hit determination. In addition, as the random number which relates to the special design, it acquires and remembers the design random number and the fluctuation pattern random number. When the reservation of the second special design is prioritized over the reservation of the first special design, only the renewal of the reservation related to the winning is executed. In addition to updating the pending status of the winning, the total pending number is updated and the winning order is stored. Subsequently, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number to be stored at the time of start-up winning, the state of the game machine is checked, and if it is determined that it is a command transmission period, a hit notice effect request, a winning pattern notice effect request, and a pattern notice Execute production requests in order. Here, (1) while waiting for a hit and while the probability variation function of the normal symbol is not operating, when storing the random number related to the first special symbol, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number associated with the second special symbol is stored while the probability variation function is not in operation, or (3) when the random number associated with the second special symbol is stored during the big win or the small win. , is the command transmission period. Subsequently, a production command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of activated balls with special symbols has been updated. As described above, in pre-reading, four sets of preliminary determination information (preliminary correctness determination information, preliminary pattern determination information, and preliminary pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 . In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, if there is a ball entering the starting hole, it is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub-CPU 310 may make various judgments such as whether it is a period or not. Subsequently, the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is checked, and if the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the effective period, the first starting opening winning prize In the same way as in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the invalid period, the second starting opening winning monitoring process is not executed. In addition, when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1, and then a control process relating to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. .

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is checked, and if the special electric accessary product is in operation, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric accessory is not in operation, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if "standby for special symbol variation", end the special symbol control general-purpose processing, and if "variation start", special symbol variation Start processing is executed, and if ``special symbol fluctuation is in progress'', special symbol variation in-process is performed, and if ``special symbol stop symbol display is in progress'', special symbol stop symbol display in-process is performed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub board 300 starts the effect display. Request a command for additional pattern information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special pattern to ``during special pattern variation'', and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special pattern variation pattern with 0. . In the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol variation is performed, the variation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the special symbol variation time has ended, the special symbol variation stop setting is performed, and the special symbol state is changed to "special Set to "symbol stop symbol display". In a special pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is over, the operation end setting of the special pattern corresponding to the result of hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special design, the state of the special design is set to "waiting for special design fluctuation", the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, and the probability of special design The variable function, the variable time shortening function for special symbols, the probability variable function for normal symbols, the variable time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening extension function for normal electric accessories are deactivated, and the state of the game machine is prepared for the opening of the big winning mouth. Set to medium, set the winning start demonstration display time, command request for winning start demonstration effect, and command request for firing position specification effect (command request to execute effect that suggests recommended firing position such as "right shot") to run. When the result of the hit determination is a small win, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is requested. In order to end the operation of the special symbol, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol fluctuation", set the state of the gaming machine during the small winning start demonstration, set the winning start demonstration display time, set the winning start demonstration effect Execute the command request and the command request for the firing position designation effect. If the result of hit determination is lost, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is determined. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "standby for special symbol variation", and the command request for the launch position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric auditors control process (S330), in order to execute the processing related to the special electric auditors, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric auditors is inspected, and the condition device is in operation or the special electric auditors are in operation When it is determined, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, processing during preparation for opening the special electric accessory, processing during operation of the special electric accessory, processing during closing of the large winning opening, processing during the jackpot end demonstration, processing during the small winning start demonstration, small winning special electric In-operation processing, small-hit big winning opening closed processing, and small-hit end demonstration processing are executed.

In order to save the result of valid period determination of the big winning opening 20 in the big winning opening valid period setting process (S332), when the value of the big winning opening valid time is 0, the big winning opening valid period flag is set. Stores the mouth invalid period data, and when it is other than 0, stores the big winning mouth valid period data in the big winning mouth valid period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operation state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is ready to start varying. When the order of digestion of the reserved balls of the special symbols is the priority digestion of the second special symbols, (1) not during the big hit or the minor hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3) ) that the second special symbol is waiting for variation, and (4) that the number of balls with which the special symbol is held is not 0. When all of these conditions are satisfied, the special symbol can start varying. I judge. In addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls with special symbols must be other than 0, and (6) the relevant When the judgment is satisfied with the order of execution, that is, the order of winning, it is judged that the special symbols are ready to start to fluctuate.

When it is determined that the special pattern is ready to start fluctuating, the number of operation reserved balls of the special pattern is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is requested. As a result, the sub board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Subsequently, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss based on the special symbol hit random number, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, determine the pattern. In the determination of the pattern, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit pattern is decided based on the special pattern per pattern random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit pattern is decided, and if it is a loss, it is a losing pattern. is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit pattern determined in the design determination process, the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol is determined, and the special symbol is determined. The game state after the end of the big win is set, such as the operating contents of the variable time shortening function and the easy winning state of normal symbols. Subsequently, the settings during the big win are executed, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big prize opening. Subsequently, based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of normal symbols, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big win. Next, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set with reference to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the small hit, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are set, and the hit The area of the main RAM 291 used for judgment and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is a loss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, disconnection/short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame opening signal, and detects any change in the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub board 300 is requested to display the error state presentation of the game machine. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request for storing the error state and displaying the error state rendering is not executed.

In the entering ball passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous ON time of each switch level to detect the entering ball passing time abnormality, and measures the continuous ON time ( For example, when it is determined that the value of a counter that is incremented at each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the entry passage time abnormality, the command transmission request, and the security information output to the external information output terminal 160 Create an output claim in order. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled in accordance with the ball passing time abnormality. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, security output request creation is not executed.

In the game state display process (S340), in order to request the display of the number of times the special electric accessary product operates continuously, the error state, the number of operation pending balls of normal symbols, and the number of operation pending balls of special symbols, respective displays are displayed. Create data.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the steering wheel. Update, set the steering wheel state monitoring timer, and request to send a steering wheel state rendering command. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of activated balls of the special symbol, the number of activated suspended balls of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are displayed continuously. Initialization of the display to display the number of times it operates, display the operating state of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, display the hitting division, display errors, and display the prize ball ratio , acquisition and output of display data.

In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the firing of game balls, the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the setting of the prohibiting/permitting the firing corresponding to the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition/permission data, outputting the firing prohibition/permission signal is executed.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test equipment is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 is obtained, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data output. The operating flag and operating timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operating flag and solenoid operating timer are acquired. Subsequently, the solenoid activation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), it is checked whether or not there is a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the sub board 300, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired, and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

Random numbers used in the operation process of the main substrate 200 will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include random numbers per normal symbol and normal pattern variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to normal symbols, and random numbers per special symbol (hard random numbers) as random numbers related to special symbols. , special symbol per soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, as the random number for giving the initial value of the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, which is the initial value update type random number, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value per special symbol There are random numbers and soft default random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The random number per normal symbol is, in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, the normal number of reserved symbol variations. is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol random number is used for determination of winning and stop symbol when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. Normal symbol variation pattern random number, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt processing, the normal symbol variation is suspended. If the number is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used for determining the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The random number per special symbol is obtained when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of the operation suspension balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , the values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and the two are added together, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol hit random number is used for executing the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The soft random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). and is used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The special symbol per symbol random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Stored. The special symbol per symbol random number is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of activated balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). , and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine a big hit symbol in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process, when the hit determination is a big hit.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is set to a predetermined value in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in operation is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

Normal per symbol initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special symbol per soft initial value random number are the same range values as normal per symbol random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the normal per symbol initial value random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special symbol per soft initial value random number are the normal per symbol random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol per soft initial value random number. When updating soft random numbers per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt process is executed at fixed time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at fixed time intervals. be. That is, the normal per symbol random number, normal per symbol variation pattern random number, special per symbol random number, special per symbol soft random number, special per symbol per symbol random number, and variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the period from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer is calculated. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process varies depending on the game state, etc., the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) may be replaced with various random number update processes (S306) or initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random each time.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the sub board 300 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub initial process executing means 360 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub initial process executing means 360 . When control of the sub board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs register setting and port initialization of the sub CPU 310. Initialize the hardware (S504). The control program is read out from the sub-ROM 312 and stored in the sub-RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are set to zero-clear data. Thus, the sub-RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes, as interrupt processing executed with the highest priority, processing upon power-up and reset processing upon occurrence of various abnormalities when the watchdog function is enabled. As interrupt processing of priority level 7, which has the next highest execution priority, there is command processing received from the main board 200. As interrupt processing of priority level 3, which has the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection is performed by a watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The interrupt processing of priority level 2, which has the next highest priority, is processing related to commands sent and received to and from the control CPU 320. The interrupt processing of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, is communication processing with the real-time clock. and various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If the interrupts related to the various processes described above occur simultaneously, the interrupts having the highest priority set in advance for each type of interrupt are preferentially executed. The processing shown in the figure consists of the highest priority level interrupt, which is processing at power-on and reset processing upon occurrence of various errors, and the reset processing upon detection of CPU runaway, which is priority level 3 interrupt. include.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the relevant model is set from all pre-stored error information for all models (S512). . All lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main processing of S518 does not return to this flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In order to check whether or not the control program arranged in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 of FIG. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and devices such as motors and solenoids are initialized (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative pattern counter is updated so that the combination of the decorative patterns is random (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is monitored (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a counter, in the case of the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the missing symbols. , the process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the missing decorative symbols using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is received from the main board 200 in S552 as will be described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state and, when various errors are detected, reports the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546), An advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In addition, the advance notice lottery in S548 sends the notice effect command to appear immediately after the start of the pattern fluctuation to the effect control device 313 as early as possible, so that the lottery process is not processed in one loop, but multiple times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect to appear immediately after the start of pattern fluctuation is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, solenoid, etc., the operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command is immediately after analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y of S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N of S554), the lottery soft random numbers are updated as low-priority processing that can be performed during idle time (S556), and the processing returns to S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed indicates a special symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol variation effect pattern is determined in the processing of S552, and when the analyzed command indicates a special symbol stop symbol, a lottery sheet is drawn. In the case of the method of determining the outlier pattern of the decorative pattern by using, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is decided in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200 . The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command of priority level 7, which has the highest priority next to reset interrupt and error interrupt. The data received from the main substrate 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in succession, the data is determined as a new command (Y of S600), and the determined command becomes the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y of S602), the first command is stored in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606) and the original routine is returned to. By obtaining a hard random number every time there is an interrupt of a main command from the main board 200 in this manner, the randomness of the value is enhanced without generating periodicity in the timing of obtaining the random number. If the data read in S600 do not match two times in a row (up to five times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned to (N of S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N of S602), if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y of S608), the command buffer (command data (S610), and stores the first command and the second command in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned to. When the first command has not been received in S608, the process after S610 is skipped (N in S608) and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command relating to effect display from sub CPU 310 to control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data transmission to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 a command indicating normal reception on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the setting of the read address of the buffer is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned to. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N of S622), the processing after S624 is skipped and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320 . This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been received normally. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for lamp control such as the decorative lamp 111, solenoid and motor control for driving the movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and occurs at a cycle of 1 ms. Since the interrupt is of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640). , input/output of ports for inputting/outputting drive signals to devices to be controlled such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power failure is input, the process immediately proceeds to backup processing. Data related to device control, such as count processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids and on/off control of buffers for writing data to ports in S642, is updated (S644), and a timer for measuring the timing of performance is set. update (S646), update the timer for managing the effective input time of the production button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. to create a 16 ms period (S650).

Note that the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, in the case of counting a relatively long period of time, such as error reporting for 30 seconds, if one interrupt (1 ms) cycle count is used, the count value will be longer than necessary. The count value can also be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

The task control has 16 kinds of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 . Lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and when the count values of the task control counter are 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring at a period of 8 ms is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that turns on and off every frame, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms with the same value, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, the timer that manages a relatively long error notification period, such as error notification for 30 seconds, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends at the timeout.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the process of special symbol variation display. When the second success/failure lottery value is reserved (Y of S700), the second success/failure determination means 222 reads out the second success/failure lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 wins or fails (S702). The determination means 222 determines the stop pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and the variation start command is issued along with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub board 300 and the pattern variation of the second special pattern 52 is started (S716).

If the second lottery value is not reserved (N of S700) and the first lottery value is reserved (Y of S708), the first winning/losing determination means 221 performs the first lottery The value is read out and the validity of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first validity determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the first A variation pattern of one special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is transmitted to the sub board 300 along with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/fail lottery value is not reserved, the process from S710 to S722 is skipped (N of S708).

The special symbol pattern variation display is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display stops after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), a variation stop command is transmitted to the sub board 300 to stop the symbol variation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the variation display of the special symbols is terminated. do.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the process of decorative symbol variation display. The effect determining means 303 of the sub board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the contents of the effect display from the main board 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbols according to the received stop symbol, variation pattern, and success/failure determination result of the special symbol. A mode is determined (S752), and a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, if the premonitory setting is turned on by prior determination (Y of S756), the already determined variable effect pattern is a pattern that includes specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758), and if it is not a symbol change that triggered the turning on of the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting to display a predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is executed. If it is the symbol variation that triggered the turn-on (Y of S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not ON (N of S756), or if the specific effect content is included in the variable effect pattern (Y of S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

After that, the variable effect display of the decorative symbols is started (S766), the variable effect display process of the decorative symbols (S768), and the display process of the notice effect are executed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated (N of S772), and when a variation stop command is received (Y of S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774 ), and ends the decorative symbol variation effect (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the special game effect processing (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N of S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has passed ( Y in S804), but the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), but when the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning hole. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N of S810), add 1 to the number of rounds and return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y of S810), effect display. The control means 305 terminates the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, ie, variable probability, short working hours, easy entry state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the process of the small winning game. In the small winning game, a unit game executed only once is started (S819), the big winning opening 20 is opened (S820), the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822), and the opening is continued. If the time has passed (Y of S822), the big prize opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the set number of times of opening and closing has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of times of opening and closing, and the process returns to S820. (S828), if opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y of S826), the small hit game is terminated.

In the base technology, the number of jackpot balls in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game. , but in another example, the first game may be designed so that the expected value of winning balls is higher than that of the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected values of winning balls in the first game and the second game are substantially equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 7 times is executed with a probability of 100%, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game may be executed in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. Also, in any case, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening, and if the game ball that entered the big winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game ends It may be configured such that a specific game such as a variable probability state is implemented. In this case, the special game executed when the second game results in a big hit is more likely to enter the specific area than the special game performed when the first game results in a big win. is high, and the probability that the normal game in the variable probability state is executed after the special game is finished may be configured to be high. For example, there are a first win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area, and a second win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area. It may be configured such that the second game has a higher probability of winning the second prize than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of getting the second win in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of getting the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(First embodiment)
This embodiment proposes suitable control and effects in a pachinko game machine having a screen deformation effect as a special effect. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as or correspond to elements that constitute the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology will be described by attaching the same reference numerals. In addition, the contents already explained in the base technology will be omitted as appropriate, and mainly the contents different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the base technology will be described.

<Special production>
A screen transformation effect will be described as a special effect in this embodiment. The screen transformation effect referred to here involves adding transformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, fluctuation, color reversal, and color conversion to the frame images included in the video being displayed, along with the frame images arranged around them. It is a performance. There are two ways to transform a frame image: one is to transform one frame image included in the original video in sequence (also called "frame still effect"), and the other is to transform multiple frame images included in the original video. There is a case where deformation is sequentially applied to each of them (also referred to as “in-frame animation effect”). In the frame still effect, the original video that was being displayed is frozen, and by adding deformation to the frame image at the time when it was stopped, the so-called screen capture image is inserted into the frame image as a still image and deformed. It is a performance. The in-frame moving image effect is an effect in which each frame image of the video being displayed is deformed so that the original video is inserted into the frame image as it is and deformed. A frame image of the original video is temporarily stored in a frame buffer, and a new frame image is sequentially generated by enlarging, reducing, moving, distorting, shaking, color reversing, color conversion, etc., the frame image. A new moving image is displayed as a screen deformation effect by storing it in the frame buffer. In this way, by dynamically generating a deformed image for one scene image of a moving image, frame images after deformation corresponding to a large number of scenes in a plurality of moving images are prepared in advance. It is not necessary, and it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of data and the processing load.

First, the screen before execution of the screen deformation effect will be described.
FIG. 30 shows a screen example of the effect display device 60. As shown in FIG. FIG. 30(a) shows a state in which fluctuation is stopped. In a performance screen 500 of a performance display device 60, a normal decorative pattern 502 is vertically fluctuatingly displayed as a decorative pattern 61 by using a substantially central area, and a simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed vertically as a decorative pattern 61 in the upper right corner. is displayed. Thus, the decorative pattern 61 of this embodiment includes the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 . The normal decorative design 502 is composed of a first normal decorative design 502a as a left design, a second normal decorative design 502b as a middle design, and a third normal decorative design 502c as a right design.

As reserved images, a normal reserved image 506 and a simple reserved image 507 are displayed. At the bottom of the effect screen 500, a normal reserved image 506 indicating the reserved number of lottery values with an upper limit of four is displayed. In the figure, a first normal reserved image 506a, a second normal reserved image 506b, a third normal reserved image 506c, and a fourth normal reserved image 506d are shown in order from left to right in order of ball entry (that is, order in which variation is started). displayed horizontally. The first normal reserved image 506a, the second normal reserved image 506b, the third normal reserved image 506c, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d are usually displayed as images imitating balls lit in a predetermined color (for example, blue). Each hold image is a so-called look-ahead at the time of entering the ball, that is, when it is determined that the big hit expectation is high by the pre-determination information of the lottery value corresponding to each hold, it lights up in a color corresponding to the high degree of the big hit expectation. Display an image imitating a ball. In the example of FIG. 30(a), only the third normal reserved image 506c is displayed as an image imitating a ball lit in a color different from blue (for example, red). Such an effect of lighting in a color different from blue due to pre-reading is the pre-reading forewarning effect in the present embodiment. For example, the effect determining means 303 suggests that the degree of expectation for a big win suggested by the normal color "blue" is the lowest, and that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of "green", "red" and "rainbow color". determines the color of the normal reserved image 506 . The number and color (or pattern) of these pending images suggest the number of pending images and the degree of expectation for a big win to the player. The symbol variation corresponding to the third normal reserved image 506c, which is scheduled to start symbol variation thirdly, is the symbol variation that is the target of look-ahead (opportunity for execution of look-ahead notice effect), and is hereinafter also referred to as "target variation".

At the right corner of the effect screen 500, a simple pending image 507, which is a simple pending image smaller than the normal pending image 506, is displayed. The simple pending image 507 is an image showing the number of displayed normal pending images 506 by a number, and the number "4" is displayed in FIG. 30(a).

FIG. 30(b) shows the state during symbol variation display. FIG. 30(b) is a state during variation display after the start of symbol variation following the state of FIG. normal held image 506 is shifted one held image to the left from each position. The first normal pending image 506a in FIG. 30(a) moves to the left and is displayed as an image 508 during fluctuation. The changing image 508 is an image showing the lottery value that is currently undergoing pattern change, has a larger diameter than the normal reserved image 506, has a background pattern displayed around it, and is distinguished from the normal reserved image 506 and is undergoing pattern change. It is emphasized that Note that the changing image 508 and the normal pending image 506 are not separate image data, but common image data. Specifically, the image data includes only the image data of the changing image 508 , and the normal pending image 506 is displayed by reducing the image data of the changing image 508 . The second normal reserved image 506b, the third normal reserved image 506c, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d in FIG. 3 normal reserved image 506c. The first normal decorative pattern 502a is displayed in a state of temporary stop after the variable display has already been completed, that is, in a state of being substantially stopped but oscillating finely, and the stop is not confirmed. The second normal decorative pattern 502b is fluctuating at high speed. The third normal decorative pattern 502c is in a state of changing at a low speed after high-speed rotation and about to come to a stop. The simple decorative pattern 504 is rotating at high speed, and when the first normal decorative pattern 502a, the second normal decorative pattern 502b, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c all stop (fixed stop), the simple decorative pattern 504 also stops (fixed). stopped). Note that, unlike the temporary stop, the fixed stop refers to a stop mode in which fine swinging is not performed and there is no slight movement. However, when the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of numbers (or letters or symbols) and patterns depicting human or animal characters, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is composed only of numbers (or letters or symbols) , the numbers (or letters and symbols) which are the simple decorative patterns 504 do not become a temporary stop, but only a fixed stop. On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be temporarily stopped, and when it is temporarily stopped, the numbers (or letters and symbols) and patterns are finely swayed, and when it is fixed, the numbers (or letters and symbols) are also swayed. The pattern does not move slightly and does not move slightly, but after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the fixed stop, at least one of the numbers (or letters or symbols) or the pattern is at the time of fixed stop. A fine oscillation is performed even if the

A simple pending image 507 displayed at the right corner of the effect screen 500 is an image that indicates the number of normal pending images 506 that are displayed, and the number "3" is displayed in FIG. 30(b). Incidentally, the movable accessory 520 is a movable decorative lamp with the logo of the model title of this gaming machine, and is operated at a predetermined timing to expressly suggest that the expectation of a big hit is high. Although details will be described later, a plurality of movable accessories other than the movable accessory 520 are provided in this embodiment.

FIG. 31 schematically shows an example of contraction of a frame image in a screen deformation effect. FIG. 31(a) shows a state in which an enemy character 512 appears at a predetermined timing in a predetermined symbol variation effect such as a super ready-to-win effect having a story of fighting with an enemy character 512 as a motif. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 31, it is preferable to hide the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 during execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (super ready-to-win effect). The middle image 508 may continue to be displayed even while the normal pending image 506 is not displayed. For example, when the super reach effect develops, the normal pending image 506 is not displayed, but the changing image 508 is configured to be displayed during at least a part of the execution period of the super reach effect (for example, the first half). You may In addition, during execution of such a predetermined pattern variation effect (super reach effect, etc.), as shown in FIG. If it is a normal decorative pattern 502 composed of a pattern and a pattern, the display may be continued as only numbers). For example, when it develops into a super ready-to-win effect, the normal decoration pattern 502 is configured to be displayed in a ready-to-win mode in at least a part of the execution period of the super ready-to-win effect (for example, the first half period) in a small size and/or only with numbers. You may Here, when executing the in-frame still effect as the screen transformation effect, as shown in FIG. The still frame image is reduced to a slightly smaller size, and a frame-like frame image 510 that has not been displayed before is displayed around the reduced frame image. Although it is not shown in particular when executing the moving image effect within the frame as the screen transformation effect, deformation processing such as sequential reduction is applied to each of the plurality of frame images included in the original video in the same manner as the still effect within the frame. A plurality of frame images are also included in the object of transformation unless otherwise specified. Note that at least part of the frame image 510 may be displayed in advance (for example, a part of the inner region of the frame image 510 may be displayed). The inside of the frame image 510 is hereinafter referred to as an in-frame image 514 . Here, the frame image 510, which was not displayed on the effect screen 500 in the state of FIG. 31(a), is displayed around the in-frame image 514 in the state of FIG. 31(b). This frame image 510 portion is arranged at a position corresponding to the outside of the frame of the effect screen 500, although the display control process itself is actually being executed by the effect display control means 305 even at the time of FIG. 31(a). This is an image portion that has not been displayed in the effect screen 500 and has not been visualized because it is a portion that has been displayed. As illustrated, in this embodiment, the entire frame image 510 is visualized, but only the upper portion of the frame image 510 is visualized (i.e., other portions are invisible). Alternatively, only the left and right portions of the frame image 510 may be visualized (that is, the upper and lower portions may be invisible).

Here, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are not included in the in-frame image 514 obtained by reducing the frame image of FIG. 31(a). That is, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are not targeted for the screen transformation effect, and are displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer where the screen transformation effect is displayed. The normal decorative pattern 502, normal reserved image 506, and changing image 508 that were displayed at the stage of FIG. That is, while the normal decorative pattern 502 is hidden, the display of the simple decorative pattern 504 is continued to ensure the display of the decorative pattern (make it possible to recognize whether it is fluctuating), the normal reserved image 506 and While the changing image 508 is hidden, the display of the simple hold image 507 is continued to ensure the display of the hold image. there). In a modified example, the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 may be included in the in-frame image 514 and subjected to deformation. That is, as described above, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 are configured to continue to be displayed even in a predetermined pattern changing effect (super ready-to-win effect, etc.), the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 are displayed within the frame. It may be included in the image 514 and used as a target for screen transformation effects. In addition, the normal pending image 506 is also configured to be continuously displayed in a predetermined pattern variation effect (super reach effect, etc.), and is included in the frame image 514 in the same manner as the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508, and the screen is deformed. It may be used as a target for production. The in-frame image 514 is an image in which the frame image in FIG. 31(a) has been reduced as described above and color-inverted (also called "negative-positive inversion"). The in-frame image 514 and the frame image 510 are objects to be subjected to subsequent deformation processing, and are therefore referred to as target objects 516 .

FIG. 32 schematically shows an example of swinging of frame images in a screen deformation effect. After the target object 516 is further reduced from the state of FIG. 31(b), what has been changed two-dimensionally is also changed in the depth direction to be three-dimensionally deformed. As a result, the target object 516 is displayed on one side of the three-dimensional object as a frame image of the moving image that was displayed until immediately before (in the case of a static effect within the frame, an image such as a captured image in which the moving image of the effect is frozen). There is, and if it is a moving image effect in the frame, it will be an image that is pasted or projected. The target object 516 has a shape in which the in-frame image 514 is arranged inside the curved frame image 510 as illustrated, and is not strictly rectangular. The left side is called the left side, the right side is called the right side, the upper side is called the upper side, and the lower side is called the lower side. In FIG. 32(a), four-vertex transformation is performed to make the left side of the target object 516 move forward and the right side backward. That is, the left side is lengthened, the right side is shortened, the upper and lower interior angles of the left side are made smaller than the right angle, and the upper and lower interior angles of the right side are made larger than the right angle. In FIG. 32(b), the right side of the target object 516 is moved to the near side and the left side is moved to the back side by four-vertex transformation. That is, the right side is lengthened, the left side is shortened, the upper and lower interior angles of the right side are made smaller than the right angle, and the upper and lower interior angles of the left side are made larger than the right angle. By alternately repeating the states of FIGS. 32A and 32B at high speed, the left side and the right side are alternately reciprocated in the forward and backward direction to make the target object 516 appear to shake.

<First aspect>
(Feature 1) The effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a screen deformation effect as the effect content to be displayed on the effect screen 500 of the effect display device 60 according to the variation pattern. The screen transformation effect is a new frame image obtained by synthesizing at least an image of the target object 516 obtained by transforming the frame image stored in the frame buffer 338 at a predetermined timing, a background image 518, and an image showing the game situation. are sequentially generated and stored in the frame buffer 338 to be displayed as a moving image. Here, the background image 518 is solid black (painted black), but it is not limited to such a display mode. It is good also as an aspect.

FIG. 33 schematically shows the layer structure of the effect screen 500 in the screen transformation effect. The layer structure of the effect screen 500 includes an error display layer 521, a volume/light amount display layer 522, a game situation layer 523, a effect layer 524, and a background layer 525 in this order from the foreground to the bottom. An error display layer 521 on the foreground displays an error warning image 536 indicating that an error has occurred, the type of error, and the like. A volume setting image 532 indicating an interface for volume adjustment by the player and a light amount setting image 534 indicating an interface for the player to adjust the amount of light are displayed on the next layer, ie, a volume/light amount display layer 522 . be.

The game situation layer 523, which is the next layer, displays images such as a simple decoration pattern 504, a simple hold image 507, a moving image 508, and a guidance display 530 that guides a right-hand shot, and the display contents are constantly updated. . As a modification, the changing image 508 may be displayed on the effect layer 524 instead of the game situation layer 523 . A production layer 524, which is the next layer, is a layer in which mainly the variation of the normal decorative pattern 502, the normal reserved image 506, and the target object 516 are displayed. The shape, color, and display position of the target object 516 are constantly updated, but the contents of the framed image 514 included in the target object 516 are changed, such as by deformation and movement, in the case of static effects such as screen capture. The content is fixed as long as it is not set, and in the case of rendering such as inserting a moving image into the in-frame image 514, the frame images included in the original video are sequentially inserted. The normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506 may be subject to deformation as part of the target object 516 in the screen deformation effect. Further, as described above, when the changing image 508 is displayed in the effect layer 524 instead of the game situation layer 523, the changing image 508 is also transformed as part of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect. It may be a target. The backmost background layer 525 is a solid black background image 518 . By displaying the background image 518 on the background layer 525, it is possible to make it look like a three-dimensional space with a sense of depth, and the target object 516 displayed on the effect layer 524 can also be made three-dimensional. At least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device 60. In the screen deformation effect, A special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and a second image not deformed in the predetermined manner are displayed. The first image group refers to images that make up the deformation target effect described later, that is, a group of images categorized into images to be transformed, and the second image group refers to the deformation target effect described later. It refers to images other than the constituent images, that is, a collection of images that are categorized as images that are not subject to deformation processing. The first image is an image that can be transformed in the screen transformation rendering, and an image that can be displayed on the rendering layer 524 . The first image group includes, for example, the target object 516 as the first image, and may further include the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506 . The second image is an image that is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effect, and is an image that is displayed on a layer other than the effect layer 524 . The second image group includes, for example, a simple decorative pattern 504, a simple pending image 507, a changing image 508, and a guidance display 530 as second images. The special first image is, for example, the target object 516 after deformation. An image 506 may also be included.

(Feature 2) The effect determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of variable effect patterns as the variable effect pattern. The plurality of types of variable performance patterns include variable performance patterns to be executed for screen transformation performance in the performance process and variable performance patterns not to be executed for screen transformation performance. The variable effect pattern subject to execution of the screen transformation effect may be defined so that the screen transformation effect may or may not be executed depending on the result of a separate lottery, or the screen transformation effect is always executed. may be defined as As a result, even with the same variable performance pattern, or even with the same progress contents of the performance until the middle, the way of showing the performance can be made different depending on whether the screen transformation performance is executed from the middle or not. . For example, in the case of the flow of production that develops into a super reach production, the production of "variation start → reach state formation → super reach production development → no screen deformation production occurs during super reach production → super reach production end → fluctuation end". It can be either a flow or a production flow such as "start of fluctuation → formation of ready-to-win state → development of super ready-to-win production → occurrence of screen deformation production during super ready-to-win production → end of super ready-to-win production → end of fluctuation".

A performance determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of preview performance patterns as the preview performance pattern. There are multiple types of announcement effects patterns that are subject to the execution of screen transformation effects during the production process (for example, in addition to the above-mentioned effect of stopping the enemy character during the super reach effect, the effect before reaching the reach state) A step-up notice effect that is part of the notice effect, etc.) and a notice effect that is not subject to execution of the screen deformation effect (for example, it is part of the notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the normal decorative pattern 502 is temporarily stopped. A notice effect pattern in which a special normal decorative pattern 502 (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the letters “NEXT” attached) displayed during the pseudo-continuous effect that fluctuates again with is displayed, the above-mentioned super reach (e.g., an advance notice effect pattern in which the movable accessory 520 is driven after the end of the effect to make the enemy character stand still during the effect, and the screen is dyed in rainbow colors). The advance notice effect to be executed for the screen transformation effect may be defined so that the screen transformation effect may or may not be executed depending on the result of a separate lottery, or the screen transformation effect is always executed. may be defined as As a result, even with the same notice effect pattern, the effect can be shown differently depending on whether the screen transformation effect is executed or not. Note that the effect that is the object of execution of the screen transformation effect, ie, the symbol variation effect and the advance notice effect in which the screen transformation effect can be executed in the process of effecting, will be hereinafter referred to as "transformation target effect".

(Feature 3) The effect determination means 303 suggests in advance the high degree of expectation that the determination result of the winning lottery will be a hit when a hold corresponding to a new ball entering the starting hole is triggered, so-called look-ahead. Execution or non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined according to the information of advance determination (preliminary information transmitted from the main board 200 as the main control device triggered by a new ball entry). Also, the degree of expectation for execution of the screen transformation effect differs depending on the mode of the preview effect (prefetch preview). In other words, when the target variation is suspended for a variation scheduled to execute a screen transformation effect, or is a suspension for a variation with a high probability that the screen transformation effect will be executed (furthermore, If the notice effect that is the target of the execution of the screen deformation effect is a hold related to a change that is executed), a high-expectation pre-reading notice (if it is a hold change effect described later, the blue The normal pending image 506 in red is a pre-reading notice with a higher degree of expectation than the normal pending image 506) is executed. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure such that even if the effect pattern is the same, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the screen transformation effect is executed than when the screen transformation effect is not executed. , the effect to make the enemy character stand still is executed during the super reach effect (the screen deformation effect is executed), but the effect to stop the enemy character is not executed during the super reach effect (the screen deformation effect is executed). It is preferable to configure such that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the case where the enemy character does not stop and the enemy character does not stop. The advance notice effect by the look-ahead is, for example, a production that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit or the degree of expectation of execution of the screen transformation effect by the lighting color of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the target change that is the target of the look-ahead shown in FIG. ). As a result, the ease with which the screen deformation effect is executed can be made different depending on the type of notice effect, that is, the lighting color of the normal pending image 506 . For example, it is better to display a red normal reserved image 506 (for example, a 50% expected jackpot) than a blue normal reserved image 506 (for example, a 10% expected jackpot). It is easy to execute the screen deformation effect. Such a pending change effect may be executed not only for the normal pending image 506 but also for the changing image 508. For example, when the first normal pending image 506a moves and becomes the changing image 508, (1) In the first normal reserved image 506a, the blue normal reserved image 506 is displayed, and the blue normal reserved image 506 (more precisely, the blue changing image 508) is displayed in the changing image 508, so that the current fluctuation (2) The first normal reserved image 506a displays a blue normal reserved image 506, and the changing image 508 displays a red normal reserved image 506 (exactly, By displaying the red fluctuation image 508), it can be understood that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the current fluctuation has increased from 10% to 50%. It should be noted that whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed when the variation effect pattern to be executed for the screen transformation effect is selected is determined at the start of the pattern variation according to the variation effect pattern, and the look-ahead that is executed by the start of the variation. The execution probability of the screen deformation effect differs depending on the type of notice. As a modification, when the pre-reading notice is executed (when the execution of the pre-reading notice is decided), the change (target change) that triggered the execution of the pre-reading notice determines whether or not to execute the screen transformation effect. may

(Feature 4) The degree of expectation for execution of the screen deformation effect differs depending on the mode of the change notice effect. It should be noted that the variation referred to here means the current variation, and when the pre-reading notice is executed, it is the variation (target variation) that triggered the execution of the pre-reading notice, and the pre-reading notice is not the variation (pre-target variation) running In addition, the aspect of the notice effect of the change referred to here is the aspect of the notice effect (excluding the screen change effect) executed in the change in which the notice effect targeted for the execution of the screen transformation effect is executed, and is a look-ahead notice. , that is, it is not the mode of the forewarning effect in the variation prior to the variation in which the foretelling effect to be executed for the screen deformation effect is executed. In addition, whether or not the notice effect of the change is executed and its mode, and whether or not the notice effect to be executed for the screen transformation effect is executed and whether the screen transformation effect is executed are all determined by separate lotteries at the start of the change. . As described above, even when a variable effect pattern to be executed for the screen transformation effect is selected, the screen transformation effect is not always executed. For example, as an aspect of the change notice effect, the dialogue notice effect, which is an effect in which the dialogue of the appearing character is displayed in the form of a balloon is executed at a timing earlier than is executed), it is better to have a giraffe pattern (a display mode with a higher expectation for a big hit than blue) than when the color of the balloon is blue. It may be configured to have a higher degree. As a modification, whether or not to execute the notice effect of the change and its mode, and whether or not to execute the notice effect to be the execution target of the screen transformation effect and whether to execute the screen change effect are collectively determined by the same lottery at the start of the change. You may

Depending on whether or not the screen deformation effect is executed, even if the contents of the progress of the effect are the same, the presentation can be made different. Further, the expectation regarding the difference in presentation of the effects can be made stepwise by combining the effect contents of the pre-reading notice executed in advance and the effect contents of the target variation. It should be noted that the suspension change effect and the speech notice effect described above can be executed in both the target change and the change before the target. After making it look like the expectation level is high, by displaying a blue dialogue balloon in the target change effect, it is possible to make it look like the execution expectation level of the screen transformation effect is low. Further, for example, by displaying the blue normal pending image 506 in the pre-reading notice, it is shown that the execution expectation of the screen transformation effect is low, and then, in the target change effect, the giraffe-patterned dialog balloon is displayed to transform the screen. It is possible to make it look as if the degree of expectation for execution of the performance has increased. In the modified example, a series of processes from the start of execution of the pre-reading notice (variation before the target) to the target change, or a series of processes from the pre-reading notice to the execution timing of the screen deformation effect in the target change are collectively determined. When the specification is set, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation of the execution of the screen deformation effect from being hindered in the middle.

<Second aspect>
FIG. 34 schematically shows the process of the movable accessory effect executed concurrently with the screen deformation effect. FIG. 34(a) shows the initial stage of operation of the movable accessory 520, and FIG. 34(b) shows the state in which the movable accessory 520 operates. The movable role 520 in this embodiment includes a first movable role 520a, a second movable role 520b, a third movable role 520c, and a fourth movable role 520d. The first movable accessory 520a is a movable decoration lamp with the logo of the model title of this game machine, and is designed to fall downward at a predetermined timing during a predetermined presentation, as shown in FIG. 34(b). By making a large move, it is suggested in a dramatic way that the expectation of a big hit is high. The second movable accessory 520b and the third movable accessory 520c are scissor-arm type decorative members, and the second movable accessory 520b moves from the left side of the presentation screen 500 to the presentation screen 500 as shown in FIG. 34(b). Extending to the center, the third movable accessory 520c acts to extend from the right side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, thereby suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high. The fourth movable accessory 520d is a mountain-shaped decorative lamp like a saw blade. , directing that the expectation of a big hit is high. As shown in FIG. 34(b), the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 include the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d. It is displayed in a position that does not interfere with visibility even when it is in motion. In addition, when the fluctuation is stopped and for a predetermined time until the fluctuation is stopped (for example, the period from 2 seconds before the fluctuation is stopped until the fluctuation is stopped), none of the movable accessories will operate, that is, at the initial position. At least at the boundary of the game (that is, in a situation where the progress of the game is temporarily stopped), it is possible to ensure more reliable visibility. As a modification, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d. may be configured to be displayed at a position where the visibility is not hindered during the movement of the movable accessory. For example, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are displayed at a position where visibility is hindered when the third movable role 520c is in motion, but visibility is not hindered when other movable roles are in motion. In such a configuration, the frequency at which the third movable accessory 520c operates is any of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, and the fourth movable accessory 520d. It is also preferable that the time during which the third movable accessory 520c operates within one fluctuation is shorter than the time during which the third movable accessory 520c does not operate. be. In such a configuration, in all variation patterns (variation times), the time during which the third movable accessory 520c operates within one variation is set to be shorter than the time during which the third movable accessory 520c does not operate. It is more preferable to

(Feature 5) The movable accessory 520 is provided in the vicinity of the effect display device 60 and operates in a dramatic manner in conjunction with the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 . Whether or not the movable accessory 520 is operated and whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed are associated so that the display of the screen transformation effect and the action of the movable accessory 520 are relatively often executed in parallel. . For example, the screen deformation effect is more movable than other types of effects that do not involve screen deformation effects (for example, capture effects, reversal effects, step-up notices, dialogue notices, pending change effects, group notices, etc.). 520 are often executed concurrently. Also, for example, the screen transformation effect is more often accompanied by the action of the movable accessory 520 than when it is not accompanied by the action of the movable accessory 520 . The effect control means 304 operates the movable accessory 520 according to whether or not the movable accessory 520 operates determined by the effect determining means 303 . By linking the screen transformation effect and the motion of the movable accessory 520 in this way, the three-dimensional effect and dynamic feeling of the effect contents displayed on the effect display device 60 can be further enhanced when the screen transformation effect is executed. In other words, not only the three-dimensional effect and dynamic movement are expressed by the displayed effect content, but also the three-dimensional effect and dynamic effect are produced around the effect display device 60. - 特許庁Conversely, in the screen transformation effect that does not involve the movement of the movable accessory 520, the content of the screen transformation effect itself can be made more conspicuous by refraining from the movement of the movable accessory 520. When the movable accessory 520 is in operation and viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 520d operates so as to have a position and shape that do not impede the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 .

(Feature 6) The decorative patterns include a normal decorative pattern 502 displayed as a main pattern on the production display device 60 at least when the special patterns are stopped, and a normal decorative pattern 502 when at least the normal decorative pattern 502 is difficult to see. A simple decorative pattern 504 displayed in a simplified display form is included. The normal decorative pattern 502 is a pattern displayed in a larger size than the simple decorative pattern 504. - 特許庁The normal decoration pattern 502 is composed of three patterns, and after the variable display, the patterns are stopped one by one in principle. The simple decorative pattern 504 is also composed of three patterns, but the three are stopped at the same time after the variable display. As the combination of the stop symbols of the simple decorative symbols 504, the same combination as the combination of the stop symbols of the normal decorative symbols 502 is displayed.
It should be noted that during execution of the super reach effect, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be displayed in a small size (an alternative pattern may be displayed) in at least a part of the period, or the normal decorative pattern 502 may be hidden ( (Alternative patterns may also be configured not to be displayed), but in such a situation, the simple decorative pattern 504 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the effect display device 60, and while the special patterns are fluctuating, the display is changed, and while the special patterns are stopped, the display is stopped. , three symbols are displayed in a variable and stationary manner, similar to the normal decoration symbol 502 . By providing this simple decorative pattern 504, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be reduced or hidden (for example, when executing a super reach effect, the effect is performed by a movable accessory, and the center of the effect display device 60 is hidden, etc.), it is possible to notify that it is in the process of changing (in other words, that the result of success or failure has not been determined). In other words, it can be said that this simple decorative design 504 is a design for security of display (for compensating the display state of the normal decorative design 502). In addition, when the simple decorative pattern 504 is variably displayed, it is preferable to always continue the variative display from the start of the special design to the stop display, that is, the normal decorative design 502 temporarily stops on the way. (For example, when a special normal decorative pattern 502 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo-continuous effect), the simple decorative pattern 504 is not temporarily stopped on the way. (Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 504 is not provided with a special pattern for displaying characters such as "NEXT", and the simple decorative pattern 504 is only fixed and stopped). In order to prevent misunderstanding that it is a big hit when it is a losing variation, and not to detect that it is a big hit in advance when it is a big winning variation, whether it is a losing variation or a big winning variation On the other hand, variably displayed while maintaining the combination of symbols indicating the deviation (for example, if the types of simple decorative symbols 504 are "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → "456 ”→“567”→“671”→“712”→“123”→ . . .). Furthermore, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to fluctuate from the fixed and stopped state, the starting point of the pattern combination (the first pattern combination immediately after the start of the fluctuation) is 1 from the pattern combination at the time of fixed stop. However, if the simple decorative pattern 504 starts to fluctuate from the fixed and stopped state, the starting point of the pattern combination will be a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the combination at the time of fixed stop. . For example, in a situation where both the number combinations relating to the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed and stopped at "243", when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to fluctuate, the normal decorative pattern 502 The starting point of the pattern combination is "354", but the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 504 is fixed at "123". , the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to fluctuate, the pattern combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative pattern 502 is "444", but the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 504 is "444". The resulting symbol combination is fixed at "123". In addition to this, the simple decorative pattern 504 has the following characteristics, and can be clearly differentiated from the normal decorative pattern 502 in role.
(1) The display area of the normal decorative design 502, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple decorative design 504 for display collateral (for compensating the display state of the normal decorative design 502). This is a situation in which the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed and stopped, and the normal decorative pattern 502 is in a ready-to-reach state immediately after forming a ready-to-win state (a ready-to-reach state in a state not developed into a super ready-to-win effect), and a simple decoration. The pattern 504 is not limited to the situation in which the variable display is in progress. It is preferable to configure as follows.
(2) The display position of the normal decoration pattern 502 is either in the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or in the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By setting different display positions according to the mode, it is possible to realize the diversity of the production in the normal decorative pattern 502 according to the production mode. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 only has to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, so regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, the same display position is redundant. It is preferable to avoid extensive development design. Details of the effect mode will be described later.
(3) The display mode of the normal decoration pattern 502 is either the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By using a different display mode depending on the mode, it is possible to realize the diversity of the production in the normal decorative pattern 502 according to the production mode. For example, in the first production mode, the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed only of the normal decorative patterns 502 of numbers (normal decorative patterns 502 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second production mode The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed by combining the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number and the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7"+"characterg" (502). On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 only has to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502. Therefore, regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, only the same display mode, For example, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative pattern 504 only with the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers, and to avoid unnecessary development and design.
(4) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 varies (moves, small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether it is during normal reach, whether it is during super reach, etc.). By doing so, the production of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be diversified. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play a role of compensating the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 is not changed (does not move, does not become a small pattern). It is preferable to forgo development design.
(5) The normal decorative pattern 502 has a variable speed, such as low speed, medium speed, high speed, and super high speed, depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, is it at the start of the fluctuation, is it in the middle of the fluctuation, is it near the end of the fluctuation, etc.)? By doing so, the production of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be diversified. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only has to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, the variation speed of the simple decorative pattern 504 is not made variable, or the number of stages in which it is variable is reduced (for example, low speed and high speed only) to avoid unnecessary development and design. As for the direction of fluctuation, the normal decorative pattern 502 allows for fluctuation not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allows for fluctuation in multiple directions). , preferably from top to bottom only.
(6) The normal decorative pattern 502 is a temporary stop (temporary stop during the fluctuation of the special pattern) before the final stop (stop at the timing when the special pattern stops). At that time, a specific pattern (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 written with the word "super" that foretells the development to a super ready-to-win performance), which is a normal decorative pattern 502 other than numbers, is temporarily stopped. Thus, the effect of the normal decorative pattern 502 and other effects can be associated with each other. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502. Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 504 is not temporarily stopped, and the specific pattern is not temporarily stopped. It is preferable to avoid extensive development design.
(7) The normal decoration pattern 502 overlaps the display area of other notice effects (for example, comment notice effects, step-up notice effects, etc.), that is, is superimposed. Such a superimposed display is permitted in order to perform a powerful effect by using the area on the effect display device 60 as much as possible. In order to achieve this, it is desirable to design the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 so as not to overlap (not to be superimposed) the display area of the other notice effects. However, regarding the relationship with special forewarning effects that inevitably overlap (for example, group forewarning effects displayed on the entire effect display device 60, background foreground effects, etc.), the display priority of the simple decorative pattern 504 is It is preferable to set the display priority higher than the display priority of the special notice effect (set so that the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in front of the special notice effect). In addition, a right hitting notification image (different from the image displayed during the special game, a right hitting notification image dedicated to the high base state displayed during the high base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game) ) is also desirably visible to the player, it is desirable to design so that the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 and the display area of the right-handed informing image do not overlap (are not superimposed). . However, when the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the display area of the right-handed notification image may overlap (superimposed). In that case, the display priority of the normal decorative pattern 502 is set lower than the display priority of the right-handed informing image (the normal decorative pattern 502 is set to be displayed behind the right-handed informing image). is preferred.
(8) During the special game, the normal decoration pattern 502 may be displayed not in combination but only one. For example, when the special game is executed after "777" is fixed and stopped, "7" is displayed during the special game, and when the special game is executed after "222" is fixed and stopped, "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize which normal decorative pattern 502 has resulted in a big hit during the special game. As a modification, only the normal decorative symbols 502 corresponding to the high-advantage jackpot (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc. indicating a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) are in the special game. may be displayed in In this way, the display area for displaying one normal decorative pattern 502 displayed during the special game includes the other display areas during the special game, namely, the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize. It is desirable to configure such that it does not overlap with the number-of-balls display area, that is, it is not superimposed (however, it may be superimposed with the highlighted display, in which case the highlighted display has higher display priority). In addition, the simple decorative pattern 504 is preferably hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), but it may be displayed during the special game. , it can be configured so that it does not overlap, that is, it does not overlap with the other display areas during the special game, such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the winning ball acquisition display area, and the accumulated winning ball number display area. Desirably, it is desirable not to highlight or superimpose.
(9) In the normal decorative pattern 502, in addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom), predetermined operations are performed at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after reach establishment, during temporary stop, etc. (The actions in each situation may be referred to as fluctuation start action, temporary stop action, ready-to-reach establishment action, and shaking action). For example, when it becomes non-reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "624" at the time of fixed stop), when the fluctuation starts, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right in the normal decorative pattern 502 All the symbols start to expand after performing an operation, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "6" temporarily stops and shakes After that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, the swinging action continues after "4" temporarily stops, and then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, After performing a bouncing action, "2" is temporarily stopped and shakes for a little while, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the actions of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are finished. In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any action. Also, in the case of normal reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the normal decorative pattern 502 After performing an operation that expands all of them, it starts to fluctuate, and after that, when the left pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "2" temporarily stops and then shakes. Continue, after that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, perform a bouncing action, then continue the swinging action after "2" temporarily stops, and then left to notify that it is a reach The pattern and right pattern rotate and continue the shaking motion again. After that, when the middle pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, "1" temporarily stops and shakes for a while. After that, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left design, the middle design, and the right design are finished (the middle design does not rotate). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any action.
Also, when developing into a super reach effect (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, the left pattern and the middle pattern in the normal decorative pattern 502 , All the right symbols will expand and start to change, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "2" will temporarily stop Continuing the swinging motion, and then, when the right pattern temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, then continue the swinging motion after "2" temporarily stops, and then notify that it is a reach. For this reason, the left and right symbols rotate and continue to swing again, and then the middle pattern fluctuates while the left and right The pattern is magnified and fluctuates from top to bottom, and the left and right patterns that previously did not overlap or had a low overlap rate overlap or have a high overlap rate), After that, in order to execute the super reach effect, the background is changed from the normal background to the reach background, and when the result of the failure is notified in the super reach effect, the reach background is changed to the normal background, and after the transition, the left The pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern will continue to swing for a predetermined time, and then at the fixed stop timing, all the left, middle, and right patterns will end (the middle pattern will also bounce and rotate). do not have). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any action. By configuring in this way, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be produced with diversity, while the simple decorative pattern 504 only has to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502. It is preferable that the decorative pattern 504 is configured so as not to perform any particular action, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. Also, even during the period from when the fluctuation is stopped until the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 performs a swinging motion after a predetermined time has passed (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 does not operate at all. By constructing in this way, it is possible to arouse the willingness to play the game even during the game standby (while the symbols are stopped), and since the simple decorative symbol 504 does not swing, the fact that the game is on standby can be recognized. Notification can be guaranteed. In addition, when the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 is hidden, but the display of the simple decorative pattern 504 is preferably continued. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the display of what symbols are stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demonstration effect screen. However, since the game is not being played during the standby demonstration effect, the simple decoration pattern 504 may also be hidden.
In addition, among the normal decoration patterns 502, a specific pattern (for example, a middle pattern "7") may be configured so that the probability of not performing a predetermined action or performing it is lower than that of other patterns. This predetermined motion may be, for example, the above-described temporary stop motion (jumping motion) (especially for the middle symbol "7" after the ready-to-win state is established). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of actions in a specific pattern. The normal decorative pattern 502 is formed by combining the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number and the normal decorative pattern 502 of the friendly character (“1”+“character a”, “2”+“character b”, . . . ). , "7"+"character g" (502), both the normal decorative patterns 502 of the numbers and the normal decorative patterns 502 of the ally characters perform the shaking motion. is the swing width (swing distance). Vibrational motion may be realized by varying the width), and in such a configuration, the swinging width of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number is set to be larger than the swinging width of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character. Alternatively, the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number may not be shaken, and only the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character may be shaken.

The normal decoration pattern 502 is included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and can be the object of transformation, that is, it can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, and is displayed in the effect layer 524. be done. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 is not included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect, nor is it subject to transformation. It is an object that can be included in the image showing the situation, and is displayed in the game situation layer 523 . In addition, a predetermined situation in which the screen deformation effect processing is executed including the normal decorative pattern 502 (for example, while the normal decorative pattern 502 is fluctuating, while it is temporarily stopped, a ready-to-win state is formed In this situation, the scroll movement of the normal decorative pattern 502 instead of the static screen, and the shaking motion during the temporary stop and the ready-to-reach state formation are continued. The movable accessory 520 can also be operated in the case where the image is deformed while being reproduced and displayed. When the movable accessory 520 in action is viewed from the front, at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d in action. 34, the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, the third movable accessory 520c, and the third movable accessory 520c are in operation as shown in FIG. In any of the four movable accessories 520d, the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 during the screen deformation effect is not hindered. As described above, it may be configured to display at a position where visibility is not hindered when at least one of the movable accessories moves.
In order to give a sense of unity to the screen transformation performance, the pattern variation performance not accompanied by the screen transformation performance and the normal decoration pattern 502 are conversely configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to grasp whether or not the pattern is currently fluctuating, and if the pattern is temporarily stopped, which pattern is temporarily stopped, the simple decorative pattern 504 is transformed by the screen transformation effect. The visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 is ensured as being out of the target. In that case, the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 is ensured more reliably by setting the action of the linked movable accessory 520 to an operation mode that does not hinder the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 . Incidentally, the relationship between the normal decorative design 502 and the simple decorative design 504 may be applied to the relationship between the normal reserved image 506 (fluctuation image 508 ) and the simple reserved image 507 . In other words, in a predetermined situation in which the screen transformation rendering process is executed including the normal pending image 506 (fluctuation image 508) (for example, while the normal pending image 506 (fluctuation image 508) is displayed) A situation in which the screen transformation rendering process is being executed. In this situation, if the normal pending image 506 (image during fluctuation 508) is displayed instead of the still screen with rotation animation or light emission animation, the animation is continuously reproduced and displayed), the movable accessory 520 can also be operated. When the movable accessory 520 in action is viewed from the front, at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d in action. As a result, the visibility of the normal pending image 506 (image during fluctuation 508) during the screen deformation effect is hindered, but as shown in FIG. Neither of the movable accessory 520c and the fourth movable accessory 520d interferes with the visibility of the simple hold image 507 during the screen deformation effect. As described above, it may be configured to display at a position where visibility is not hindered when at least one of the movable accessories moves.
In order to give a sense of unity to the screen transformation effect, the pattern variation effect not accompanied by the screen transformation effect and the normal pending image 506 (fluctuation image 508) are configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to grasp whether or not the symbol is currently changing and, if the symbol is temporarily stopped, which symbol is temporarily stopped, the simple holding image 507 is transformed by the screen transformation effect. The visibility of the simple hold image 507 is ensured as being excluded from the target. In that case, the action of the linked movable accessory 520 is set to an operation mode that does not hinder the visibility of the simple reserved image 507, thereby ensuring the visibility of the simple reserved image 507 more reliably.

<Third aspect>
(Feature 7) In the screen transformation effect, regardless of the contents of the frame image as the first image to be transformed, the background image 518 as the second image can It has the same content as the background image 518 . For example, the common background image 518 in this embodiment is an image whose entire surface is black, and is displayed on the background layer 525 in each screen deformation effect. By sharing the background image of each screen transformation effect with a solid black image, it is possible to suppress an increase in display processing load and an increase in image capacity. Note that, as described above, the background image 518 may be displayed in a manner such that, for example, a moving image in which the characters "CHANCE" flow like a telop is played in a loop.

<Fourth Aspect>
(Feature 8) The effect display device 60 displays a predetermined error (for example, a door open error or frame open error that occurs when a door/frame open signal is detected, a game ball shortage, an upper ball tray 105/lower ball error, etc.). When a prize ball payout error (such as a prize ball payout error in which the game balls on the plate 106 become full) occurs, an error warning image 536 indicating the error (indicating the occurrence of the error and the type of the error) is displayed. be done. Further, when the screen transformation effect is executed under the condition that the error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the screen transformation effect is executed, the display of the error warning image 536 is continued as it is. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33, the error warning image 536 is displayed on the foreground error display layer 521 and is not displayed on the effect layer 524. Therefore, the target object, which is the frame image to be deformed, is displayed. 516, and no transformation processing is applied. As a result, not only can it be configured so as not to hinder the execution of the screen transformation effect even when an error occurs, but also the visibility of the error warning image 536 is not hindered by excluding the error warning image 536 from the screen transformation effect. can be configured as
Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, it is possible to adjust the volume level (volume adjustment) through the player's operation in parallel. A volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522 . In addition, depending on the type of error (type of error warning sound) that occurred during the game progress, the effect sound accompanying the progress of the game (for example, the BGM of the super reach effect and the sound effect generated along with the screen deformation effect) It is configured so that it is not output due to the priority output of the warning sound. For example, if an error occurs during the screen deformation effect, and if the error is a prize ball payout error, both the error warning sound and the effect sound are output (however, the error warning sound is the maximum volume, which is the specified volume). , the effect sound is output at a volume corresponding to the currently set volume level), but if there is a door open error, only the error warning sound is output and the effect sound is not output (or the prize ball payout error It is configured to output the production sound at a lower volume than when it is generated). Note that the types of errors are examples. When such an error occurs during the game progress, even if the screen deformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is not displayed on the effect layer 524 either. is not included and no deformation processing is applied. As a result, it is possible not only to configure so as not to hinder the execution of the volume adjustment even when an error occurs, but also to prevent the visibility of the volume setting image 532 from being hindered by excluding the volume setting image 532 from the screen deformation effect. can be configured to
In the volume setting image 532, it is possible to display what the currently set volume level is (for example, "volume level is 1", "volume level is 5", etc. can be displayed), When the volume level is adjusted by the player's operation, the displayed content is changed (for example, when the volume level is changed from 1 to 2, the display changes from "volume level is 1" to "volume level is 5"). ). Here, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and the player's operation is further performed while the screen transformation effect is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed. When the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed, the volume setting image 532 (for example, the display of "the volume level is 1") during execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change and during the execution of the screen transformation effect and after the display change. Any of the volume setting images 532 (for example, the display of "Volume level is 2") is displayed in a non-transformed display mode. In addition, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation immediately before the screen transformation effect is executed, and the screen transformation effect is executed immediately after that (during the display of the volume setting image 532). When the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during execution of the transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 before the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, "volume level is 1”) and the volume setting image 532 after execution of the screen transformation effect and after display change (for example, display of “volume level is 2”) are displayed in a non-transformed display mode. be done. In order to ensure visibility, it is preferable that the error warning image 536 and the volume setting image are not overlapped (displayed in different display areas).

<Fifth aspect>
(Feature 9) As shown in FIG. 30, the effect display device 60 displays a normal pending image 506 indicating the number of pending when pending is stored. In addition, when a hold corresponding to a new ball entry occurs, in order to indicate that the hold has occurred, the normal hold image 506 is not displayed suddenly, but an animation that is gradually displayed (details will be described later) ), and during the animation display of the normal reserved image 506, that is, from the start to the completion of the animation of the normal reserved image 506 (until the display of the normal reserved image 506 is completed). Even when the transformation effect is executed, the animation display is not stopped. The animation display of the normal pending image 506 here is not only the animation display at the time of normal pending occurrence (when the pending notice is not accompanied by a pre-reading notice), but also when the color and pattern of the normal pending image 506 is changed as a pre-reading notice effect. (For example, when the suspension occurs, the normal suspension image 506 glows white and then changes color, and a small character appears and casts a spell on the displayed normal suspension image 506 to change the color. animation to change, etc.). However, during the execution of the screen transformation effect, or during the change to execute the screen transformation effect (situation where the screen transformation effect is scheduled to be executed in the change, but the execution timing has not been reached), the screen transformation effect In order to draw attention, if there is a new entry, if the pre-reading notice is not executed (no lottery or decision), if it is configured so that the animation display effect at the time of normal suspension is not executed, the screen deformation effect will be The specification that does not stop the animation display when it is executed is only animation display at the time of normal suspension occurrence (when suspension occurs without pre-reading notice).
Animation display of the normal hold image 506 at the time of normal hold occurrence (at the time of hold occurrence without pre-reading notice) is, for example, a fade-in display of the normal hold image 506, an animation that appears by moving from outside the screen such as the bottom of the screen, rotation There are animations that sway and sway, animations that add color changes such as flashing for a moment, and animations that scale the size for a moment. Since the normal hold image 506 is displayed in the effect layer 524, when the screen deformation effect is executed in the middle of the animation display when the hold occurs, the frame images including the image in the middle of the animation display can be sequentially deformed. Alternatively, the display content may be updated so as to continue the animation display of the normal pending image 506 included in the target object 516 while the target object 516 is being transformed, that is, while the screen deformation effect is being displayed. In this way, even when the screen transformation effect is executed during the animation display of the normal pending image 506 at the time of suspension occurrence, the animation display is continued without being stopped, so that the flow of the effect is not unnatural or uncomfortable. can be prevented.
It should be noted that even when the pending occurrence continues and the animation display at the time of pending occurrence continues, the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the preceding ball entry is not stopped, and the normal pending image corresponding to the subsequent ball entry is not stopped. The animation display of 506 is performed concurrently. Therefore, depending on the pending occurrence timing, (1) if there is a previous entry while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal Execution of the animation display of the pending image 506, and when there is a subsequent ball entry during the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the screen deformation effect and the previous entering ball, the normal holding corresponding to the previous entering ball. Without stopping the animation display of the image 506, the screen deformation effect, the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entry, and the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entry are simultaneously executed in parallel. (2) When the execution start timing of the screen deformation effect is reached during the execution of the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entry, the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entry is started. If a screen transformation effect is executed during execution, and animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entry and a subsequent ball entry during execution of the screen transformation effect are performed, the previous ball entry is performed. Without stopping the animation display of the normal reserved image 506, the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the preceding ball entry, the screen deformation effect, and the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entry are concurrently displayed. (3) If there is a subsequent ball entry during execution of the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entry, execution of the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entry. During, the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later entry is executed, and the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier entry and the animation of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later entry are executed. When the execution start timing of the screen deformation performance is reached during execution of the display, the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the preceding ball entry and the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entry are stopped. Instead, the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entry, the animation display of the normal pending image 506 corresponding to the subsequent ball entry, and the screen deformation effect are executed concurrently. In any of the situations (1) to (3), in that situation (in the situation of simultaneous execution), there is a further ball hit and the ball hit is expected to hit the jackpot. Even if there is a high hold (for example, a hold scheduled to execute a super ready-to-win effect, a hold scheduled to be a big hit), in that situation, the normal hold image 506 is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect for the hold. It is preferable not to execute the animation display that is executed when changing the color or pattern of the .

(Feature 10) In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of performance modes, and it is determined which type of performance can be executed among the symbol variation performance and advance notice performance for each performance mode.
Specifically, the effect mode and the effect contents executed in the effect mode will be described. (or variation pattern selection state) or according to the number of times of variation display of special symbols, etc., one of a plurality of types of production modes is set alternatively, and the variation production according to the set production mode is executed be done. Basically, when the game state is the normal state, the "normal mode" is set, when the game state is the time saving state, the "chance mode" is set, and when the game state is the variable state, the "rush mode" is set. mode is set. When one of the production modes is set, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background displayed on the back of the decorative pattern 61) is displayed on the screen as a production (variable production) that suggests that the production mode is being stayed. image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 108 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. Specifically, "Normal Mode" has four stages, "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage", and it is possible to predict that 20 or more fluctuations will pass or that the super reach effect will be missed. Triggered by "Stage A" to "Stage B", "Stage B" to "Stage C", "Stage C" to "Stage A" If you win the execution (transition) of, move from the stage you are currently staying to the "read-ahead stage". Stage" will display the double eyes, and if it is off, other than double eyes will be displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the next change will return to the stage before the "look-ahead stage" transition). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage" (both the stage BGM of "Chance Mode" and the stage BGM of "Rush Mode"). , In "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (end ), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation, and in the "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", the stage BGM is continued even if the fluctuation stops (fixed stop) due to non-reach. The stage BGM is output continuously to the next variation without interruption (without ending) (“chance mode” and “rush mode” are similarly configured to output continuously).
Here, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetch stage". (When a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol of the characters "NEXT") is variably displayed as a middle symbol near a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped, the stage BGM is not output. (interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-change display (re-change after the temporary stop), or it switches to a specific BGM different from before the re-change display. After that, when developing into a Super Reach effect in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were staying at) changes to the background image of the Super Reach effect. (At the same time, it switches to the BGM dedicated to the super reach effect), the stage BGM is not output during the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is executed by displaying the effect indicating the failure in the super reach effect. In the changed display, the background image of each stage will be switched again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of the Super Reach production). Even if an image is displayed, the stage BGM is not output, nor is the BGM dedicated to the super reach performance (the specific BGM which is silent or different from the BGM dedicated to the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the super reach performance is output). Therefore, the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the non-reach fluctuation stops (determined stop), and the stage BGM is output continuously to the next fluctuation "Stage B", "Stage C”, even if it is a “look-ahead stage” (even if it is not “stage A”), if it is lost via the super reach effect, the stage will be before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) The BGM is interrupted, and the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next variation.
In addition, in the "chance mode" and the "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, a special effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed (for example, it is a continuation line notice, and the execution of the subsequent pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous effect (re-fluctuation display) will be performed thereafter, but this special effect is performed in "Stage A" and " It is displayed only in "Stage C", and is not displayed in "Stage B" and "Look-Ahead Stage". In other words, by preparing both stages in which the possibility of pseudo-continuous effects being executed can be detected in advance and stages in which the possibility cannot be detected, and by repeating stage transitions between these stages, effects that keep the player from getting bored are realized. is doing. In "stage A", a special effect with character A as a motif is executed, but in "stage C", a special effect with character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is a different effect from the special effect, and a pseudo-continuous confirmation effect that confirms that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed after just occurring (for example, when the character C appears, the line "Continue confirmed!" Furthermore, it is a different effect from a special effect and a pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and it is confirmed that the pseudo-continuous effect will not be executed after that, and will develop into a super ready-to-win effect. (For example, an effect is also provided in which the line "Development is confirmed!" is always displayed when the character D appears). This pseudo continuous fixed effect and development fixed effect can be executed in any of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetching stage". In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, one or more of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and the development fixed effect are displayed in combination, so that the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect, It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for super reach production. It should be noted that during a single variable display, all of the special effect, the pseudo-consecutive fixed effect, and the development fixed effect may be executed. ), there may be a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo continuous fixed effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development fixed effect is executed. In the pattern in which the special performance is executed in the first or second time of (1) or (2) of (1), the pseudo-continuous fixed performance may be further executed during the re-variation display after the special performance is executed during the re-variation display.
In this embodiment, different types of effects can be executed depending on which effect mode is being executed. The type of suggestive effect suggesting that it can be executed and whether or not the suggestive effect is executed are different. In addition, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the pseudo-continuous effect "NEXT" is displayed, the screen transformation effect is not executed (although it is not a transformation target effect) in order to make the player aware of the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. , but not limited thereto, and a screen transformation effect may be executed (or may be a transformation target effect). In that case, the screen than other predetermined notice effects (for example, the effect of stopping the enemy character during the super reach effect described above, the step-up notice effect that is part of the notice effect before reaching the reach state, etc.) It is preferable to configure so as to reduce the possibility of deformation effects.

<Sixth Aspect>
(Feature 11) First, regardless of whether the symbol variation is executed with a screen transformation effect or the symbol variation is not executed with a screen transformation effect, the ready-to-win state can be formed during the symbol variation. In addition, the degree of expectation for execution of the screen transformation effect differs depending on the mode of the symbol variation effect and the ready-to-win pattern mode when the symbol is ready-to-win. Specifically, for example, the ready-to-win pattern mode is set so that the screen deformation effect is more likely to be executed when the symbol "7" becomes the ready-to-win than when the symbol "2" becomes the ready-to-win. Execution/non-execution (execution probability) of the screen deformation effect is associated. More specifically, when the symbol "7" results in ready-to-win, the ratio between the case where the screen deformation effect to stop the enemy character during the super ready-to-win effect is executed and the case where it is not executed is 5:5. , the ratio of the case where the screen transformation effect for stopping the enemy character during the super ready-to-win effect is executed and the case where it is not executed is 2:8. It may be configured so that when the screen transformation effect is executed, it is easier to reach the "7" symbol. The probability of reaching reach with the pattern of "7" is 10%, and the probability of reaching reach with the pattern of "2" is 15%. In this case, the probability that the symbol "7" will result in a reach is 1%, and the probability that the symbol "2" will result in a reach will be 20%.

<Seventh Aspect>
(Feature 12) In the screen transformation effect, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be included in the effect layer 524 as the target object 516, but the simple decorative pattern 504 is not included in the target object 516, and the game situation layer 523 is used as an image showing the game situation. can be included in Further, even during execution of the screen transformation effect, it is possible to display the volume setting image 532 for adjusting the volume and to adjust the volume according to the player's operation.

(Feature 13) When the screen transformation effect is executed in a situation where the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the screen transformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the frame image to be transformed. That is, the display of the volume setting image 532 is continued in the volume light amount display layer 522 which is a layer different from the effect layer 524, and the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation.

(Feature 14) The normal suspended image 506 can be transformed by the screen transformation effect, but the simple suspended image 507 is not transformed by the screen transformation effect. In addition, since the movable accessory 520 can be operated even in a situation where the screen deformation effect including the normal reserved image 506 is being executed, the movable accessory 520 can be seen from the front when the movable accessory 520 is in motion. to prevent the visibility of the simple hold image 507 from being hindered. In this case, the visibility of the normal pending image 506 may be displayed so as not to be hindered by the movable accessory 520, or it may be hindered. Alternatively, specifications may be such that the normal reserved image 506 is not subject to deformation by the screen deformation effect.

(Feature 15) When the screen deformation effect is executed, a specific effect sound (sound effect) is output. Specifically, at the start of execution of the screen transformation effect (one second from the start), a sound effect "Pikin!" Before), a sound effect "gugugu" is output, and at the end of the screen transformation effect (one second until the end), a sound effect "Pishaan!" is output. In this case, the sound effect at the start or end of the screen transformation effect is louder than the sound effect at the middle of the screen transformation effect, under the same volume level in the volume adjustment ( This means that such a relationship is established regardless of which volume level is set), so that the screen deformation effect is not only visually but also aurally sharp. can be done. Regarding the degree of transformation/transformation ratio of the transformation target effect, at the start or end of the screen transformation effect, the degree of transformation/transformation ratio of the transformation target effect is different from the volume before the start of the screen transformation effect. It is small (when shrinking, the reduction ratio is small, and when deforming 4 vertices, the initial position movement distance of each vertex is short). It is preferable to configure such that the degree of transformation/transformation ratio of the rendering to be transformed is large (the reduction ratio is large if the effect is to be reduced, and the initial positional movement distance of each vertex is long if the four vertices are to be transformed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected presentation in which visual sharpness and auditory sharpness are reversed. In addition, the volume level in the volume adjustment has, for example, 5 levels, and can be set to any of levels 1 to 5 as volume adjustment, and the volume corresponding to the volume level set for the production sound corresponding to various effects output as Here, even if the sound volume level is the same, the sound volume differs depending on the effect type. For example, as described above, the sound effect "Pikin!" is louder than the sound effect "gugugu" during the execution of the screen transformation effect (1 second after the start to 1 second before the end) regardless of the volume level set ( For example, at volume level 1, the sound effects of "Pikine!" The sound effect of "Pishaan!" is 80 dB, and the sound effect of "Gugugu" is 70 dB).
(Feature 16) As described above, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 may also be included in the target object 516 and displayed as deformation targets in the screen deformation effect.
(Feature 17) Alternatively, as shown in the game situation layer 523 of FIG. 33, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 are not included in the target object 516 as deformation targets in the screen deformation effect, and are different layers in the game. Specifications displayed in the situation layer 523 may be used.

<Eighth aspect>
(Feature 18) When a predetermined error occurs, the effect display device 60 displays an error warning image 536 indicating the error. If an error occurs during execution of the screen transformation effect, the error warning image 536 is not included in the frame image to be transformed, and the error display layer 521, which is a layer different from the effect layer 524 where the screen transformation effect is displayed, is displayed. Is displayed.

(Feature 19) The production process of the super ready-to-win effect has a first half and a second half, and the development of the second half, which is the so-called back button effect, is more deterministic in the case where the screen deformation effect is performed in the first half. Alternatively, a red light emission effect that suggests high expectations is likely to occur. The screen deformation effect here is preferably before the super reach effect, for example, the case where the screen deformation effect is executed in the step-up notice effect before reaching the reach state, etc., but other than that , For example, in the first half, a screen transformation effect that makes the enemy character stand still during the super reach effect is executed, and if the screen transformation effect is executed in the first half, the red color suggests that the back button effect will appear in the first half. luminous effects may occur more easily. The back button effect means that although no button image or button operation instruction is displayed on the screen, when the player operates the effect button 109 at a predetermined timing, a specific effect (here, a light emitting effect) appears. Here, it is executed in the first half. In addition, the light emission effect is a effect of changing the light emission color of the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color of the effect display imitating light on the effect display device 60 (color as an image). Expectations increase in the order of blue → green → red (expectations for development in the second half or expectations for big hits increase). It should be noted that the back button effect can also be automatically repeated by pressing the effect button 109 for a long time. As a modified example, if the specification is such that the screen deformation effect that makes the enemy character stand still is executed in the second half instead of the first half of the Super Reach effect, if the screen deformation effect is executed in the second half, the screen deformation effect will be executed. Compared to the case where it is not executed, the luminous color of the decoration lamp 111 around the performance display device 60 in the repeated hitting effect of the effect button 109 in the first half of the super ready-to-win effect (automatic repeated hitting by long pressing of the effect button 109 is possible). And the color of the effect display imitating light on the production display device 60 is not blue or green, but red, which suggests that the development to the second half of the super reach production is deterministic or highly expected. good too.

(Feature 20) When the screen transformation effect is executed, a button image that is not the normal color (for example, white), such as a red button image or a rainbow-colored button that suggests that the expectation of a big win is relatively high Images are easy to display. The button image here may be a button image before entering the ready-to-win state or a button image during the super ready-to-win effect, and the player actually operates the effect button 109 while this button image is being displayed. Triggered by this, an effect other than the button image is displayed. For example, if the button image is displayed before reaching the ready-to-win state and the effect button 109 is operated, a dialogue preview effect (effect of different expectations for big hits depending on the content of the dialogue and the color of the balloon) is displayed, and during the super ready-to-win effect (second half) When the button image is displayed and the effect button 109 is operated, a cut-in effect (a cut-in screen of the ally character is displayed). A production with different expectations for a big hit) is executed. Here, a button image that is not a normal color is displayed rather than a button image that is not a normal color. In the case of production, a red cut-in production is more likely to be displayed when the production button 109 is operated. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the screen transformation effect is executed before the button image is displayed, the normal color button image is more likely to be displayed than the normal color button image compared to the case where the screen transformation effect is not executed. Button images that are not are more likely to be displayed. The effect of instructing (prompting) the player to operate by displaying the button image is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is provided a button appearance prompting effect, which is a effect for prompting whether or not an operation instruction effect (button effect) is to be started. In this button appearance effect, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, and then a button image imitating the effect button 109 appears (that is, the operation instruction effect is started. It will be a production that makes you expect When the silhouette image of the production button 109 gradually changes to the button image in this button appearance fanning effect, the fanning success effect is obtained. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the effect button 109 fades out from the screen in this button appearance fanning effect, the fanning will fail. When displaying the button image, it is not always necessary to execute such a button appearance effect, and the button image may be displayed immediately without going through the button appearance effect. Here, with respect to this button appearance stimulating effect, a plurality of types of display modes may be provided. It may be configured such that the possibility of changing to a button image increases. In addition, as another modification, when the button appearance stimulating effect is executed, it may be changed to a button image without fail. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher, or it may be provided with multiple types of button images (including a blue button image and a red button image, etc., and the red button image is more likely than the blue button image). (For example, it is easier to execute a red dialog announcement effect than a blue dialog announcement effect). The effect may be configured to be a specific button image (for example, a red button image). If the button image is always changed to the button image when the button appearance effect is executed, in addition to the above, the button appearance effect will be longer (for example, 4 seconds) than the short time (for example, 2 seconds). ) may be configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher, and the button appearance lasts longer (for example, 4 seconds) than the short-time button appearance (for example, 2 seconds). A specific button image (for example, a red button image) may be used as the stimulating effect. In addition, in the case where a plurality of types of display modes are provided for the button appearance effect effect, the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after the reach) is better than the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the reach). It may be configured to make it easier to execute the highly anticipated button appearance stimulus effect, or the button appearance stimulus effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach), and the latter half of the variable display is performed. Only part (specific timing after reach) may be configured to be able to execute the button appearance effect.
During execution of the operation instruction effect, an operation valid period (input valid time) during which the operation of the effect button 109 is valid is set. The operation effective period is a period during which the operation is effectively accepted when the effect button 109 is operated. "Effectively accepting the operation of the effect button 109" means that when the effect button 109 is operated, the operation of the effect button 109 is effectively received by the sub board 300, and a predetermined process is executed based on the valid operation. means to be done. It should be noted that the predetermined process corresponds to the process of proceeding with the speech announcement effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 . During this operation effective period, the effect button 109 (the LED element built in the effect button 109) is illuminated, and a button image simulating the effect button 109 and the remaining period of the operation effective period are visually displayed on the screen. is displayed to notify that the operation of the effect button 109 is valid or to prompt an operation input. Also, on the screen, an annular effect image emitting sparks (referred to as a “specific image”) is displayed around the button image. This specific image gradually expands as the operation effective period elapses. Then, when the effect button 109 is operated during the effective period of operation, the dialogue advances to the announcement effect. Note that when the effect button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to the final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed in maximum enlargement. Note that this operation instruction effect (button effect) is an effect (button effect pattern A) in which a specific image is displayed while the button image and the indicator image are being displayed (during the operation valid period). A button effect (button effect other than the operation instruction effect) is an effect (button effect pattern B) in which a specific image is not displayed while a button image and an indicator image are being displayed (during an operation valid period).
In the dialog preview effect, when one of a plurality of characters (the friendly character and the enemy character described above) appears and gives a predetermined dialog, a specific image is displayed around the character. It is continuously displayed in the display mode. In this speech announcement effect, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested according to the display mode (display color) of the speech uttered by the character. In this embodiment, three types of "blue", "red", and "giraffe pattern" are set as the display colors of the words. increases by one step. It should be noted that when the speech announcement effect is started (when the effect button 109 is operated), the button image and the indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. Note that, as a modification of the present embodiment, the dialogue announcement effect may be configured as a step-up type effect. This step-up production divides the display process of the notice production into a plurality of stages, and is set so that the number of stages to be displayed is variable and the degree of expectation for the big win increases as the number of stages increases. , is a development type performance in which performance modes (characters and words) are changed step by step according to a predetermined order, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested or notified according to the number of stages of development. For example, the step-up production is composed of two stages of production steps (step-up 1, step-up 2), and the production mode (character and dialogue) displayed in step-up 1, which is the first stage production step. , and the effect mode (characters and lines) displayed in step-up 2, which is the second stage effect step, may be made different.
The production flow is as follows.
(A) Button Appearance When the fan effect is started, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. When the silhouette image gradually changes to the button image and the fanning is successful, the operation instruction effect is started.
(B) When the operation instruction effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 109 is set, and the effect button 109 is displayed by light emission, and the button image simulating the effect button 109 and the remaining period of the operation valid period. is displayed on the screen. In addition, an annular specific image (effect image) emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. Such a display prompts the user to operate the effect button 109 within the valid period of button operation.
(C) As the button operation effective period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and the specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, when the effect button 109 is operated within the operation effective period, the operation instruction effect is switched to the speech announcement effect. At this time, the button image and the indicator image are hidden. On the other hand, the effect image is forcibly changed to the final display mode and continues to be displayed as it is.
(D) When the dialogue forewarning effect is started, the character and the dialogue "It's a big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the display color of the dialogue. A specific image is continuously displayed in the final display mode around the characters and lines. By displaying the specific image across both the operation instruction effect and the dialog preview effect in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the dialog preview effect will occur when the effect button 109 is operated (this time It is suggested that the button production of is a dialog preview production).
Further, as a modification of the above-described embodiment, whether or not to execute the button appearance stimulus effect is determined by lottery, and the case where the button appearance stimulus effect is executed is higher than the case where the button appearance stimulus effect is not executed. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable display is relatively high. In addition, the longer the execution time of the button appearance fan effect (the display time of the silhouette image), the higher the expectation of the big hit in the variable display, or the degree of certainty indicating whether or not the button operation is the trigger of the big hit. It may be configured to generate a high performance. At that time, when executing the dialogue announcement effect (button appearance inciting effect) at the timing of the win-lose branch (the specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display mentioned above), the production time of the button appearance inciting effect ( The above-mentioned silhouette image display time) is preferably set to a longer time than the operation effective period of the effect button 109 . Contrary to this configuration, the effect time of the button appearance effect (the silhouette image display time) may be set shorter than the effective period of operation of the effect button 109 . In addition, as another modified example, a plurality of display modes (for example, blue button image, red button image, rainbow button image, large button image, small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. good. In that case, whether or not the button appearance fan effect can be executed and the effect time when it is executed may be changed according to the display mode of the button image scheduled to be executed thereafter.
In addition, as a further modification, it is possible to execute the dialogue announcement effect even during the execution of one or more times of fluctuation display (forecast fluctuation display that is fluctuation before the target) before the operation retention ball to be read ahead is digested, and (A button image can be displayed), and during the execution of the look-ahead variation display, the button appearance swaying effect is performed more than during the execution of the variation display (the variation display) when this look-ahead target operation retention ball is digested. may be less likely to be executed, and the execution of the look-ahead fluctuation display is better than the execution of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display) when the operation retention ball for this look-ahead target is digested , the possibility of high-expectation button-appearance effects (such as button appearance-appearance effects with red effects and long-time (for example, 4 seconds) button-appearance effects, etc.) being executed may be reduced. . As another modification, in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach), the button appearance effect is not executed (or the low-expectation button appearance effect is not executed without the high-expectation button appearance effect). ), and in the second half of the variable display (specific timing after reach), execute the button appearance stimulation effect (or execute the high-expectation button appearance stimulation effect instead of the low-expectation button appearance stimulation effect) ), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display, the longer (for example, 90 seconds is better than 60 seconds) Alternatively, the button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the variable display, tends to be an image with a high expectation (for example, a red button image instead of a blue button image It is easy to become). In the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the reach), the button effect pattern A is used, and in the latter half of the change display (specific timing after the reach), the button effect pattern B is used. good too. In addition, although the details will be described later, the timing for displaying the button image at the predetermined timing before reach, which is the first half of the variable display, is started from the start of the variable display, and the second half of the variable display is The timing for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a certain reach is started from the start of the specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect), and is the first half of the variable display at the predetermined timing before the reach. It may be configured such that the time taken to display the button image at the specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display, is longer than the time taken to display the button image.

(Feature 21) A screen deformation effect may be executed as a foretelling effect by reading ahead. In that case, the screen deformation effect is not executed from the pattern variation being executed at the new ball timing, which is the look-ahead timing, and from the next variation (the next variation of the new ball) A screen deformation effect is executed. Specifically, in the variation with a new incoming ball, it is a normal pattern variation (the normal decorative pattern 502 fluctuates without changing the screen), and immediately after the start of the next variation (for example, 0.5% from the start of the variation). Seconds later), the normal pattern variation (the normal decorative pattern 502 fluctuates without the screen being deformed), but after that, it is in the middle of the target variation (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the target variation). Seconds later), the pattern variation continues after the screen transformation effect is executed. The pattern variation after the screen transformation effect is executed is, for example, the variation display of the normal decoration pattern 502 with the screen tilted or the screen reduced. As described above, in the target variation that is the target of the look-ahead, the screen deformation effect is continued until the middle, and then switched to the normal symbol variation effect. It should be noted that at least it will switch until it develops into a super reach effect. Even if a power failure such as a power failure occurs due to a change in front of the target, which is in the middle of the screen deformation effect that continues over these multiple symbol variation effects, and the power is restored from the power failure, as a general rule, in front of the target change does not return to the original screen deformation effect. However, the screen deformation effect may be executed again in the target change that is the target of the prefetch.

(Feature 22) When the pre-transformation effect to be displayed in the frame image to be transformed does not start due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the pre-transformation effect is started. , the screen deformation effect is not executed. For example, there is a case where the pre-deformation effect to be displayed in the frame image to be deformed does not start because the timer that measures the timing of the effect by the timing means 307 of the sub-board 300 malfunctions. As a modified example, even if the pre-transformation effect is not started due to a malfunction of the timer or the like, the screen transformation effect may be executed with only the background effect being displayed as the object of transformation.

(Feature 23) The standby demo screen is displayed in the effect layer 524, but is not subject to deformation by the screen deformation effect. In a modified example, a standby demo screen may be displayed on the game situation layer 523 .
(Feature 24) When the screen transformation effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 109 by the player, the execution start timing of the screen transformation effect depends on the operation start timing of the effect button 109 . Although the button image is also displayed on the effect layer 524, it is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect, and the screen transformation effect is executed after the button image is deleted after the effect button 109 is operated. In a modified example, the button image may be displayed on the game situation layer 523 . Further, in a further modified example, when the display timing of the button image is reached during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the button image may also be the target of the screen transformation effect (deformation target), and the effect during the display of the button image may be performed. The effect displayed in response to the operation of the button 109 may also be the target of the screen deformation effect (deformation target). In addition, if the button image starts to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and if the button image display end timing is earlier than the execution end timing of the screen transformation effect, the button image will be displayed from the start to the end of the screen transformation effect. However, if the button image display end timing is later than the execution end timing of the screen transformation effect, the button image will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start to the middle of the display, and then until the end is normal displayed in the form (without deformation). The same applies to the effects displayed triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is being displayed. starts to be displayed, if the display end timing of the effect displayed triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is being displayed is earlier than the execution end timing of the screen transformation effect, the effect button 109 during the button image display The effect displayed by the operation of is displayed as a screen deformation effect from the start to the end of the display, but it is displayed by the operation of the effect button 109 during the button image display rather than the execution end timing of the screen deformation effect. When the display end timing of the effect is later, the effect to be displayed triggered by the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is being displayed is displayed as the screen deformation effect from the start to the middle of the display, and the normal mode is displayed until the end after that. is displayed (without deformation) in .

<Ninth Aspect>
(Feature 25) During the execution of the screen transformation effect, when a hold corresponding to a new ball entry occurs, and the advance information corresponding to the hold is information that can execute a pre-reading notice effect (for example, , in the case of a high-expectation hold that can execute a super ready-to-win effect, or in the case of a big hit hold, etc.), the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted. For example, while the screen deformation effect is being executed, it may be controlled not to execute the pre-reading announcement effect triggered by a new ball entry, or it may be controlled not to execute the pre-reading itself.

<Tenth Aspect>
(Feature 26) When the screen transformation effect is executed, the simple decoration pattern 504 is displayed in a form included in the image showing the game situation of the game situation layer 523 which is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect. Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 504, which was displayed at a position within the effect screen 500, that is, at a position overlapping the in-frame image 514 before the start of the screen transformation effect, is displayed when the in-frame image 514 is reduced in the screen transformation effect. , the simple decorative pattern 504 can be displayed outside the in-frame image 514, for example, at a position overlapping the frame image 510, which is the special first image, or the background image 518, which is the second image (at a predetermined timing during execution of the screen deformation effect (for example, , in the middle)). On the other hand, the normal decoration pattern 502 is not included in the image showing the game situation of the game situation layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but can be included in the frame image to be transformed in the effect layer 524 . Therefore, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be displayed at a position overlapping the in-frame image 514, which is the special first image, for example, but is not displayed at a position overlapping the background image 518, which is the second image, in the screen transformation effect. It is preferable that such a display relationship is always satisfied while the screen transformation effect is being executed. It may be a related specification (it may be displayed at a position overlapping with the background image 518 if it is not at a predetermined timing). In addition, as another modification, the normal decoration pattern 502 may also be displayed in such a manner as to be included in the game situation image of the game situation layer 523 .

(Feature 27) When the screen transformation effect is executed, the simple pending image 507 is displayed in a form included in the image showing the game situation of the game situation layer 523 which is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect. On the other hand, the normal pending image 506 is not included in the image showing the game situation of the game situation layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but can be included in the frame image to be transformed in the effect layer 524 . As a modification, the normal pending image 506 may also be displayed so as to be included in the game situation image of the game situation layer 523 .

(Feature 28) As described above, in the normal decorative pattern 502, in addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom), at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after establishment of reach, during temporary stop, etc. , When configured to perform a display accompanied by a predetermined action (movement at the start of fluctuation, action at temporary stop, action at reach establishment, shaking action), as a further predetermined action, for example, a pattern such as "777" When arranging three symbols to establish a combination of big winning symbols, it may be possible to execute a big winning operation such as enlarging and displaying the symbols. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the screen deformation effect is not executed when the big win action is executed, but the screen deformation effect can be executed when other predetermined actions are executed. While the screen transformation effect is being executed, the jackpot action is not executed, but it is preferable that other predetermined actions can be executed.

(Feature 29) When a new suspension occurs during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the specification may be such that the normal suspended image 506 is also included in the objects to be transformed by the screen transformation effect, or the normal suspended image 506 is transformed by the screen transformation effect. The specification may be such that it is not included in the target. It is preferable that this is a specification during the fluctuation period until the change develops into the super ready-to-win effect. Since the normal pending image 506 is not displayed during the display of the super ready-to-win effect, when the screen deformation effect is executed in the super ready-to-win effect, it is not included in the object of deformation by the screen deformation effect. Note that the duration of the process of transforming the frame image in the screen transformation effect (that is, the execution period of the screen transformation effect) is longer than the animation display time when the suspension occurs, regardless of what effect the transformation target is. is set as

<Eleventh Aspect>
(Feature 30) On the effect display device 60, when a hold is stored during a normal effect, a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds is displayed. Of the normal reserved images 506, the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the lottery value for which the symbol variation display is started is switched to a changing image 508 indicating that the symbols are being changed. Here, while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal pending image 506 is hidden, while the changing image 508 continues to be displayed. One of the screen deformation effects, the in-frame still effect, is a effect that freezes the effect that was displayed until then like a pause display and transforms the frame image that is the still image. Since it is preferable to not include moving images in terms of presentation, the normal reserved image 506 is not displayed. On the other hand, since the changing image 508 does not increase or decrease during the pattern change, the display is continued as it is even during execution of the screen transformation effect. In a modification, the changing image 508 may not be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed.

While the screen transformation effect is being executed, the simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed. As a result, even if a new suspension occurs during execution of the screen transformation effect, the normal suspension image 506 is not additionally displayed, but the number of suspensions indicated by the simple suspension image 507 does not hinder the screen transformation effect. Increased.

(Feature 31) When executing the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the normal pending image 506 is added to the frame image, which is a still image in which the effect that has been displayed until then is stopped like a pause display. may be included. If the animation display at the time of pending occurrence is being executed, the animation display is also included in the frame image in a static state. The display of the changing image 508 may also be included in the frame image, and its animation display is also included in the frame image in a still state. Note that the simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed. As a result, even if a new suspension occurs during execution of the screen transformation effect, the normal suspension image 506 is not additionally displayed, but the number of suspensions indicated by the simple suspension image 507 does not hinder the screen transformation effect. Increased.

(Feature 32) When the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is executed, the normal decoration pattern 502 is added to the frame image, which is a still image in which the effect that has been displayed until then is stopped like a pause display. You can hide it without including it. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues the variable display. In addition, one round of fluctuation of the simple decorative pattern 504 (as described above, for example, when the types of the simple decorative pattern 504 are "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → " 456"→"567"→"671"→"712"→"123"→... The stop time of the effect in the screen transformation effect is longer than the time of the lap. In this way, if it can be recognized that the simple decorative pattern 504 rotates at least once during the screen deformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game state is paused or really stopped (the game is not progressing). can.

(Feature 33) In addition, unlike feature 32, when executing the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen deformation effects, a still image is obtained by stopping the effect that had been displayed until then, like a pause display. The normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in the frame image, but in that case, the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed in a fixed manner. That is, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not displayed in a variable display or an animation display. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues the variable display. In addition, one round of fluctuation of the simple decorative pattern 504 (as described above, for example, when the types of the simple decorative pattern 504 are "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → " 456"→"567"→"671"→"712"→"123"→... The stop time of the effect in the screen deformation effect is longer than the time of the lap. In this way, if it can be recognized that the simple decorative pattern 504 rotates at least once during the screen deformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game state is paused or really stopped (the game is not progressing). can.

(Feature 34) In the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, an image obtained by reversing the color of the still image in which the effect that has been displayed until then is stopped like a temporary stop display is used as the in-frame image 514. It may be included in the object 516, and its stillness and color reversal may be processed at the same time, or its transformation may be processed at the same time. However, during the execution of the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the frame image, which is a still image in which the effect is stilled like a temporary stop display, is executed. However, the deformation process does not start executing while the effect is at rest.
(Feature 35) The volume setting image 532 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted even during execution of the screen transformation effect.
(Feature 36) When the screen transformation effect is executed under the condition that the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the screen transformation effect occurs, the display of the volume setting image 532 is continued as it is, and the player operates in parallel. It is also possible to adjust the volume via

(Feature 37) When the error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the screen transformation effect is executed, the error warning image 536 continues to be displayed. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation in parallel. can be displayed. However, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the deformation target in the screen deformation effect. More specifically, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and the player's operation is further performed while the screen transformation effect is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed. When the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed, the volume setting image 532 (for example, the display of "the volume level is 1") during execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, display of "the volume level is 1") is displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed. Any of the changed volume setting images 532 (for example, the display of "the volume level is 2") is displayed in a display mode that is not deformed on the screen. In addition, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation immediately before the screen transformation effect is executed, and the screen transformation effect is executed immediately after that (during the display of the volume setting image 532). When the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during execution of the transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 before the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, "volume level is 1”) and the volume setting image 532 after execution of the screen transformation effect and after display change (for example, display of “volume level is 2”) are displayed in a non-transformed display mode. be done.

(Feature 38) During the animation display of the normal hold image 506 at the time of hold occurrence, a static effect within the frame, which is one of the screen deformation effects (effect such as a temporary stop display of the effect that was displayed until then), was executed. , the animation display of the normal pending image 506 may be discontinued if the display of the normal pending image 506 is maintained (i.e., the normal pending image 506 continues to be displayed, but is displayed without animation). . The animation display of the normal pending image 506 here is the animation display at the time of normal pending occurrence, and the display of changing the color or pattern of the normal pending image 506 as a pre-reading preview effect is excluded.

(Feature 39) In the screen transformation effect, the frame image of the image that was displayed until then (if it is a frame still effect, it is a single frame image that is stopped like a pause display, and if it is a frame moving image effect, When a plurality of frame images that are sequentially switched) is the object of color reversal (deformation object), the volume setting image 532 can be displayed even during the color reversal. Volume adjustment is possible. In the following "color inversion", both the frame image that is frozen like a pause display in the frame still effect and the multiple frame images that are sequentially switched in the frame moving image effect are subject to color inversion processing. do.
(Feature 40) In a situation where the volume setting image 532 is displayed before execution of color reversal, the display of the volume setting image 532 is continued as it is even if color reversal is executed after that, and the player operates in parallel. It is also possible to adjust the volume via
(Feature 41) In a situation where an error occurs before execution of color reversal and the error warning image 536 is displayed, the display of the error warning image 536 is continued even if color reversal is executed thereafter. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, it is possible to adjust the volume through the player's operation in parallel. can be displayed. However, the volume setting image 532 is not subject to color inversion. More specifically, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation while the color reversal is being performed, and the player's operation is further performed while the color reversing is being performed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed, thereby adjusting the volume. In addition, when the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed, the volume setting image 532 (for example, the display of “volume level is 1”) during color reversal and before the display change and the volume during color reversal and after the display change Any of the setting images 532 (for example, the display of "Volume level is 2") is displayed in a non-color-inverted display mode. In addition, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation immediately before the execution of color reversal, and immediately after that (during the display of the volume setting image 532), the color reversal is executed. When the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during execution, the volume setting image 532 before the execution of color reversal and before the display change (for example, "The volume level is 1" ) and the volume setting image 532 after execution of color reversal and after display change (for example, display of “Volume level is 2”) are displayed in a non-color-reversed display mode.
(Feature 42) When color reversal is performed during the animation display of the normal pending image 506 at the time of suspension occurrence, if the display of the normal pending image 506 is maintained, the animation display of the normal pending image 506 may be stopped. (ie, the display of the normal pending image 506 continues, but is displayed without animation). The animation display of the normal pending image 506 here is the animation display at the time of normal pending occurrence, and the display of changing the color or pattern of the normal pending image 506 as a pre-reading preview effect is excluded.

<Twelfth Aspect>
FIG. 35 schematically shows a plurality of buffer areas obtained by dividing a frame buffer.
(Feature 43) The effect display control means 305 includes a frame buffer 338 that temporarily stores the frame images forming the moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 60 . The frame buffer 338 has a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, a third buffer area 544, a fourth buffer area 546, and a fifth buffer area 548 as a plurality of buffer areas each having a capacity to store a frame image. It is divided to contain 5 buffer areas.
(Feature 44) In the effect pattern for executing the screen transformation effect, for example, three buffer areas of a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, and a third buffer area 544 are used.

FIG. 36 schematically shows the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of the frame buffer area.
(Feature 45) The frame buffer 338 of this embodiment includes a first buffer area 540 having a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and a first buffer area 540. is a different area, and has a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a second display size that is the same as the screen area size of the effect display device 60 or smaller than the screen area size of the effect display device 60; including at least As schematically shown in FIG. 36, the first buffer area 540 has a capacity capable of storing the image of the target object 516 (that is, the "frame image of the first display size" described above). The second buffer area 542 has a capacity to store the in-frame image 514 (that is, the above-mentioned “second display size frame image”), but does not have a capacity to store the entire target object 516 . When the image of the target object 516 is displayed at 100% size as it is, the display size exceeds the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and mainly the frame image 510 portion is out of the screen area. is displayed on the effect display device 60 so that almost only the portion of the framed image 514 can be visually recognized by the player. That is, when the target object 516 is controlled to be displayed at a size of 100%, most of the frame image 510 is not displayed on the effect display device 60, or even if it is partially displayed, it is hidden by the center decoration 64 and is hidden from the player. becomes almost invisible. The first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer at least when displaying an effect that can be the target of the screen transformation effect, and the second buffer area 542 is used as a frame buffer when displaying an effect that is not the target of the screen transformation effect. do. The plurality of types of production patterns include a first special production pattern that defines a production that can be the target of the screen transformation production and a second special production pattern that defines a production that is not the target of the screen transformation production. be

As shown in FIG. 35, the third buffer area 544, the fourth buffer area 546, and the fifth buffer area 548 also have the same capacity as the second buffer area 542 and have a capacity capable of storing the in-frame image 514. However, the capacity is such that the entire target object 516 cannot be stored. Thus, the buffer area that can store the target object 516 including the frame image 510 is only the first buffer area 540, and the other buffer areas cannot store up to the target object 516, but can store the frame image 514. holding back. As a result, even if the frame buffer 338 does not necessarily have ample data capacity, five buffer areas can be secured by minimizing the capacity of each buffer area. In addition, this makes it possible to efficiently diversify the presentation while avoiding competition for using the buffer area in the drawing process and suppressing the processing load.

In the first special effect pattern, the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer, and the frame image of the first display size stored in the first buffer area 540 at a predetermined timing is displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60. A new frame image is sequentially generated by synthesizing an image deformed so as to be displayed in a single image, an image showing the game situation, and a background image, and is stored in the first buffer area 540, thereby transmitting the moving image to the effect display device 60. A first special effect to be displayed is a predetermined effect pattern. The second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542 as a frame buffer, and displays an image obtained by deforming the frame image of the second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing and the game situation. The first special effect is an effect in which a moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images obtained by synthesizing the displayed image and the background image and storing them in the second buffer area 542. This is an effect pattern in which a different second special effect is determined.
(Feature 46) For each of the plurality of types of special effect patterns, it is determined which of the plurality of buffer areas is to be used as the frame buffer.

<Thirteenth Aspect>
(Feature 47) For example, the first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540, the second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542, and the third special effect pattern uses the third buffer area 544. , using the fourth buffer area 546, and so on. In this way, it is possible to define a plurality of types of special effect patterns using different buffer areas according to the size of the frame image to be transformed by the screen transformation effect, thereby improving the efficiency of the drawing process and the utilization efficiency of the frame buffer 338. Diversity can be given to production while maintaining.
(Feature 48) In the fourth special effect pattern, as in the first special effect pattern, it is determined to use the first buffer area 540. In the fifth special effect pattern, as in the second special effect pattern, the There may be a plurality of types of special effect patterns in which the buffer areas to be used overlap, such as the use of two buffer areas 542 being determined.
(Feature 49) The first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern are not executed concurrently (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timing overlaps. cannot). Also, the fourth special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern are not executed concurrently (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timing overlaps). not obtain). The third special effect pattern is not executed concurrently with the first special effect pattern, the second special effect pattern, the fourth special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern. are not executed within the same variation, or execution timings cannot overlap even if they are executed within the same variation).

(Feature 50) A plurality of special effect patterns that are scheduled to be displayed at the same time (designed to be executable within the same variation, and execution timing may overlap within the same variation) are different. Using a buffer area is defined. However, for multiple special effect patterns that are not scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timing cannot overlap), one special effect pattern If the display of the effect by the other special effect pattern is decided during the display of the effect by, the effect by the other special effect pattern decided later than the effect by the special effect pattern that was displayed earlier display with priority. For example, when the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern using the same first buffer area 540 are executed in parallel, the effect of the previously executed special effect pattern is executed. The execution is stopped, and the performance of the later commanded special performance pattern is preferentially started. Similarly, when the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern using the same second buffer area 542 are executed in parallel, the effect of the special effect pattern executed earlier is stopped, and the performance of the special performance pattern commanded later is preferentially started.

Here, "stop executing the effect of the special effect pattern that was executed earlier" cancels the execution of the screen transformation effect that has been executed so far, and reproduces the moving image before starting the execution of the screen transformation effect. It may be a process of returning to As a result, even if the number of special effect patterns to be transformed by the screen transformation effect is increased, it is possible to avoid problems in processing in the event that buffer areas to be used conflict with each other. Further, even when the screen deformation effect overlaps, by switching between the cancellation of the screen deformation effect and the preferential effect, normal image processing can be maintained and the image processing load can be reduced. In addition, as a modification, it may be designed such that multiple types of special effect patterns using the same buffer area are executed in parallel (that is, they may be executed in parallel in advance). may be designed), in the case of such a configuration, for example, when the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern using the same first buffer area 540 are executed in parallel stops the performance of the previously executed special performance pattern, and preferentially starts the performance of the later commanded special performance pattern. Similarly, when the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern using the same second buffer area 542 are executed concurrently, the effect of the previously executed special effect pattern is executed. The execution is stopped, and the performance of the later commanded special performance pattern is preferentially started.

FIG. 37 schematically shows the process of transforming the frame image stored in the buffer area. First, the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 of the frame buffer 338 is read out to the drawing memory 334 at a predetermined timing when the execution of the screen transformation effect is started (S900). This frame image is a target object 516 including an in-frame image 514 and a frame image 510, and is one frame of the moving image that has been displayed up to that point. This frame image is read out to the drawing memory 334 and deformed. , a new frame image generated by the transformation process and the synthesis process is displayed. Therefore, the enemy character included in the contents of this frame image, which had been displayed as moving until then in the static effect within the frame, now stands still at this frame image, so it looks like a captured image of a moving image. become. In the case of the in-frame animation effect, by sequentially switching the frame images read out to the drawing memory 334, the enemy characters included in the contents of those frame images are displayed as they continue to move.

When the target object 516 is stored in the first buffer area 540 and displayed on the effect display device 60, the frame image 510 is positioned outside the screen area of the effect display device 60 and is not substantially visible to the player. The condition, or the condition where there are only a few places that can be visually recognized. By reducing the target object 516 (S902) so that the frame image 510 fits within the screen area of the effect display device 60, the entire target object 516 is made visible. In this figure, for convenience, the target object 516 in S10 is 100%, and the target object 516 is reduced to about 80% in S12. However, in actual moving image drawing processing, instead of instantaneously switching from 100% to 80%, microscopically, each time a new frame image is generated, for example, drawing that is reduced by 1% is repeated. Gradual reduction processing is performed. A foreground image 517 and a background image 518 are superimposed on the target object 516 thus reduced (S904). In this figure, as an example of the foreground image 517, an example in which a lightning bolt-shaped object is superimposed as the foreground of the target object 516 is drawn. The content is updated each time and overlapped as the foreground. The images superimposed in S14 are combined to form the next frame image 519 (S906), which is written in the first buffer area 540 to form the next frame image forming the moving image.

The target object 516 in S14 is gradually deformed when subsequent frame images are drawn. For example, the target object 516 in S14 is color-reversed, another foreground image 517 is superimposed on that image (S908), and an image and background showing the game situation such as a simple decorative pattern 504 and a simple hold image 507 with updated contents are displayed. The images 518 are superimposed, and these superimposed images are synthesized to form a new frame image 519 (S910), which is written in the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image that constitutes the moving image. . After that, the target object 516 is sequentially deformed for each subsequent frame image, the foreground image 517 and the background image 518 are superimposed, and the images showing the game situation such as the updated simple decoration pattern 504 and the simple hold image 507 are superimposed (S912), Thereby, a new frame image is synthesized to form a moving image.

<14th Aspect>
(Feature 51) The effects of the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern are formed so as to surround the main image portion having a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the effect display device 60 and the periphery of the main image portion. The frame image 510 and the frame image 510 formed constitute one effect image, and initially at least part of the frame image 510 positioned outside the screen area of the effect display device 60 is displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60. A moving image is displayed on the performance display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images by synthesizing the image showing the game situation with the image in which the display ratio and shape of the performance image are changed as much as possible. In this way, when the screen deformation effect is executed, the frame image 510, which is normally difficult to see, is enlarged, reduced, or oscillated while being displayed, thereby making the effect more lively. can. When the specifications are such that the normal reserved image 506 is displayed in the frame image 510, the image including the normal reserved image 506 may be deformed by screen deformation effect.

The effect by the second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern is that one image for effect is displayed in the main image portion having a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the effect display device 60. A dynamic image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images by synthesizing the image of the effect image whose display ratio and shape are changed and the image showing the game situation.
(Feature 52) The frame image 510 is not displayed in the effects of the second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern. The display of the frame image 510 is not controlled even in a specific situation such as a standby demonstration screen or a big hit.

<Fifteenth Aspect>
FIG. 38 shows a screen example of the third special effect pattern. The third special effect pattern is an effect accompanied by a screen deformation effect in which the deformation timing is determined by operating the effect button 109 . In the third special effect pattern, the button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing to prompt the player to input the operation of the effect button 109 . Triggered by the player's operation of the production button 109, deformation of the frame image is executed by the screen deformation production. The button image 550 is displayed a plurality of times, and each time the effect button 109 is operated according to the button image 550, the frame image is transformed by the screen transformation effect.

(Feature 53) In the third special effect pattern, when the effect button 109 is operated and input, a new frame is created by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming the frame image at the operation input timing and an image showing the game situation. By sequentially generating images and storing them in the first buffer area 540, the effect display device 60 is caused to display moving images. Further, when the operation input of the production button 109 is performed, a new frame image is generated by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 at the operation input timing and an image showing the game situation. By sequentially generating and storing in the second buffer area 542, the effect display device 60 is caused to display the moving image.

FIG. 39 schematically shows the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern. In the third special effect pattern, frame images are alternately stored in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 each time the player operates the effect button 109 . That is, the frame images of the moving image currently being displayed are sequentially stored in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing (S920). When the button image 550 is operated by the player, the frame image is read out from the third buffer area 544 (S922), the image is transformed by the screen transformation effect (S924), and the next frame image is the fourth buffer. Store in area 546 (S926). Frame images of moving images are sequentially stored in the fourth buffer area 546, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing.

When the button image 550 is operated by the player, the frame image is read out from the fourth buffer area 546 (S928), the image is transformed by the screen transformation effect (S930), and the next frame image is the third buffer. Store in area 544 (S932). Frame images of moving images are sequentially stored in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing. When the button image 550 is operated by the player, the frame image is read out from the third buffer area 544 (S934), the image is transformed by the screen transformation effect (S936), and the next frame image is the fourth buffer. Store in area 546 (S938). Frame images of moving images are sequentially stored in the fourth buffer area 546 .

In this way, the storage of the frame image moved little by little while alternately using the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 is repeated. As a result, when the screen deformation effect is executed, the player can confirm the progress and display of the effect that the player must visually recognize while keeping the feeling of dynamism intact, for example, the effect button 109 and the image showing the game status. By doing so, it is possible to achieve both the dynamism of the performance and the visibility of the progress of the performance. In addition, when executing an effect with a high processing load, such as repeating the screen transformation effect, by dividing the buffer area into a plurality of areas and processing them alternately, the processing load can be distributed and problems can be avoided.

(Feature 54) In the effect by the third special effect pattern, the button image 550 is not included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect.
(Feature 55) A sixth special effect pattern may be further included. The effect by the sixth special effect pattern is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect, but includes an effect mode as if the screen transformation effect had been executed. However, since it is not a screen transformation effect, both the first display element and the second display element are operated in a dramatic manner, but the first display element and the second display element are completely synchronized like the screen transformation effect. It is not a dramatic action, but a dramatic action in which the first display element and the second display element are not synchronized (for example, the first display element is the background display, and the second display element is the normal decorative pattern 502 or the display peculiar to the production). etc.).

The present invention has been described above based on the examples. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that this embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to combinations of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention. be.
In addition, during execution of the special game in this embodiment, a count-up effect (for example, If the number of prize balls currently acquired is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, a production that counts up by 1 such as 2000→2001→2002→...2015 can be executed, and the count up can be performed. When the number of prize balls on the displayed display reaches a specific number, it is possible to execute a highlighting that emphasizes that the specific number has been reached (for example, the number of prize balls on the display that is being counted up reaches 2500, the display of "2500" is displayed in a larger size than the number of winning balls on the count-up display, separately from the display in the count-up display. The specifications described below may be adopted for these presentations and displays. It should be noted that when the big winning hole 20 is opened in one unit game, it is closed when nine game balls enter (the prize ball for one ball entered is "15"). Thus, the number of game balls, which is the condition for ending the unit game (the condition for closing the big winning hole 20), is referred to as the prescribed count number.
(1) A count-up effect corresponding to the entry of a game ball within a prescribed count number (in particular, a count-up production corresponding to the 9th count, which is the prescribed count number) is being performed, and there are still 15 balls. When the count-up for the count of 15 balls has not been completed, if an over-winning (entered ball that exceeds the specified count number) occurs, the count-up of the count-up effect that has not yet completed the count-up for 15 balls will be performed. It is desirable that the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is started after completion (after the count of 15 balls is performed). Here, if the over winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or end demo is started), the over winning is detected. The count-up effect itself corresponding to winning a prize overlaps with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has passed), but the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has passed) ) during the execution of the count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning, even if the ball enters the big winning opening 20, the count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning is performed at the timing of entering the ball. When the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet, the count-up for the count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed has been completed (the count for 15 balls has been completed It is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the ball entering the big winning hole 20 in the next round is started.
(2) The count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from “N” to “N+1”) is set to “0.03 seconds”, that is, in “0.03 second” increments. is counted up. The execution time of the count-up effect is the time value required for the count-up of one prize ball, and the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) given when one game ball enters the big winning hole 20. It is derived by multiplying the value, and the execution time of the count-up effect is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even during execution of the special game, the count-up effect is not executed during execution of the start demonstration and during execution of the end demonstration. Also, the execution time of the count-up effect is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as "interval period") set after each unit game is finished. The interval time is a standby time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demo, and is a unit game which is a period during which closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is started and closed is maintained. This is the waiting time or the end demo waiting time, which is set to "2 seconds" in common for all round games. In addition, the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball enters the big winning hole 20 just before the end of a certain unit game. Even if the count-up effect is performed based on the above, the count-up effect is completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up effect will extend beyond the interval period until the next unit game or the end demo (there is a possibility that the interval period will be exceeded in the case of over-winning). , a break between each unit game, or a break between the final unit game and the end demo.
(3) The count-up presentation time is set shorter than the end demonstration execution time. As described above, the count-up effect time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (during jackpot effect). The end demo execution time is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has passed until the special game is finished. In other words, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final unit game, the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 20 is effectively detected (that is, it is detected as a winning ball payout target, and it is determined as an illegal entry). is set as the remaining time (delay time) of the unit game during which there is a possibility that the unit game will be detected (not detected), but the execution time of the end demonstration is valid for game balls to enter the big winning opening 20 within that time. It is set as a preparation time for the game (production mode) after the end of the special game separated from the unit game, which has no possibility of being detected in the second stage. By configuring the count-up effect time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the end demonstration execution time (20 seconds), the game ball enters the big prize winning opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game. Even if the count-up performance is performed based on the ball being thrown, or more specifically, even if an over-winning occurs in the final unit game, the big winning port 20 is closed after the final unit game. If the specification is such that the count-up effect is performed even later (even during the end demonstration period), the count-up effect will be completed within the end demonstration period. Therefore, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the end demonstration period until the variable display after the end of the special game, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation is clearly defined. can do.
(4) When a specified count number of game balls enter the big winning hole 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up production time for the specified count number in this one unit game (one unit The count-up effect for the number of prize balls obtainable in the game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time)×10 balls (specified count number)=4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (during jackpot effect), as described above. In this embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up production time for the specified count number is shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration, so that the final time unit Even if a plurality of count-up performances are continuously performed based on the fact that a plurality of game balls enter the big winning hole 20 continuously just before the end of the game, after the final unit game is completed. If a count-up performance is performed even after closing a certain big prize winning opening 20 (even during the big win end demonstration period), the count-up performance is completed within the big win end demonstration period. Therefore, the count-up effect is not performed over the period of the jackpot end demonstration period and until the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation is clearly defined. can be

Note that the techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following aspects.

[First aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the determination result of the win/fail lottery;
variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns for which the pattern variation display process is determined;
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole and pattern variations corresponding to previous entries are displayed, a lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as pending with a predetermined number as the upper limit. a hold control means;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
When there is a new ball entry, prior information on the lottery value corresponding to the ball entry is transmitted to the effect determination means,
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
Based on the prior information, a specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special game related to the hold corresponding to the prior information can be executed with the symbol variation prior to the symbol variation related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effects, and according to the type of the specific effects executed in the symbol variation before the pattern variation related to the suspension that triggered the execution of the specific effects, the execution trigger of the specific effects A pinball game machine characterized in that the degree of expectation of whether or not the special performance is executed is different depending on the symbol variation related to the hold that has been made.

[Second aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a symbol display device that variably displays a special symbol for indicating the determination result of the success or failure lottery;
Variation pattern determination means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns for which the variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
a predetermined movable accessory provided in the vicinity of the effect display device and acting in a manner interlocking with the effect displayed on the effect display device;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
It has a decorative pattern that is a pattern that shows the determination result of the winning lottery in a dramatic manner, and the decorative pattern is a normal decorative pattern that is displayed as a main pattern on the production display device at least when the special pattern is stopped, a simple decorative pattern displayed in a display form simplified from the normal decorative pattern,
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
When the special effect is executed, the actions of the predetermined movable role are executed in parallel more often than when the special effect is not executed,
In the special effect, the normal decorative pattern can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, but the simple decorative pattern can be included in the second image belonging to the second image group. A ball game machine to play.

[Third aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the determination result of the lottery;
variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns for which the pattern variation display process is determined;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
The pinball game machine is characterized in that even if the types of the first images to be transformed in the special performance are different, the second images not to be transformed in the special performance are common images.

[Fourth aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the determination result of the lottery;
variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns for which the pattern variation display process is determined;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
when a predetermined error occurs, it is possible to display a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred;
When the execution of the special effect is started under the condition that the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error before the execution of the special effect is started, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined mode. A pinball game machine characterized in that the display is continued while maintaining the display mode before the start of execution of the special effect.

[Fifth aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the determination result of the lottery;
variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns for which the pattern variation display process is determined;
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole and pattern variations corresponding to previous entries are displayed, a lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as pending with a predetermined number as the upper limit. a hold control means;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
Triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new incoming ball, a hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed,
When displaying the pending image, display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
Even if the display of the pending image starts with the predetermined animation display before the execution of the special effect starts, and the special effect starts to be executed during the execution of the predetermined animation display, the predetermined A pinball game machine characterized in that the animation display of is continuously executed without being interrupted.

[Sixth aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the determination result of the lottery;
variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns for which the pattern variation display process is determined;
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole and pattern variations corresponding to previous entries are displayed, a lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as pending with a predetermined number as the upper limit. a hold control means;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
When there is a new ball entry, prior information on the lottery value corresponding to the ball entry is transmitted to the effect determination means,
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
Based on the prior information, a specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special game related to the hold corresponding to the prior information can be executed with the symbol variation prior to the symbol variation related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effects, and according to the type of the specific effects executed in the symbol variation before the pattern variation related to the suspension that triggered the execution of the specific effects, the execution trigger of the specific effects The degree of expectation of whether or not the special effect will be executed is different due to the pattern variation related to the holding that has become,
It is possible to form a ready-to-win state during the symbol variation regardless of whether the symbol variation is executed with the special effect or the symbol variation is not executed with the special effect,
In the case of the symbol variation forming the ready-to-win state, the degree of expectation of whether or not the special effect is executed in the symbol variation is different according to the type of the symbol forming the ready-to-win state. ball game machine.

[Seventh aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a symbol display device that variably displays a special symbol for indicating the determination result of the success or failure lottery;
Variation pattern determination means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns for which the variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
a predetermined movable accessory provided in the vicinity of the effect display device and acting in a manner interlocking with the effect displayed on the effect display device;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
It has a decorative pattern that is a pattern that shows the determination result of the winning lottery in a dramatic manner, and the decorative pattern is a normal decorative pattern that is displayed as a main pattern on the production display device at least when the special pattern is stopped, a simple decorative pattern displayed in a display form simplified from the normal decorative pattern,
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
When the special effect is executed, the actions of the predetermined movable role are executed in parallel more often than when the special effect is not executed,
In the special effect, the normal decorative pattern can be included in a first image belonging to the first image group, but the simple decorative pattern can be included in a second image belonging to the second image group,
Even during execution of the special effect, it is possible to perform volume adjustment based on the player's operation, and when performing the volume adjustment, it is possible to display a volume setting image,
When the execution of the special effect is started under the condition that the volume adjustment image is displayed before the execution of the special effect is started, the volume adjustment image is not transformed into the predetermined form before the execution of the special effect is started. A pinball game machine characterized in that the display is continued while maintaining the display mode of .

[Eighth aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the determination result of the lottery;
variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns for which the pattern variation display process is determined;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
Even if the type of the first image to be transformed in the special effect is different, the second image that is not to be transformed in the special effect is a common image,
when a predetermined error occurs, it is possible to display a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred;
A pinball game machine characterized in that, when the predetermined error occurs during execution of the special effect, the warning image is displayed without being deformed into the predetermined mode.

[Ninth aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the determination result of the lottery;
variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns for which the pattern variation display process is determined;
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole and pattern variations corresponding to previous entries are displayed, a lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as pending with a predetermined number as the upper limit. a hold control means;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
When there is a new ball entry, prior information on the lottery value corresponding to the ball entry is transmitted to the effect determination means,
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
Based on the prior information, a specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special game related to the hold corresponding to the prior information can be executed with the symbol variation prior to the symbol variation related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
when a predetermined error occurs, it is possible to display a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred;
When the execution of the special effect is started under the condition that the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error before the execution of the special effect is started, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined mode. The display is continued while maintaining the display mode before the start of execution of the special effect,
A pinball game machine characterized in that, when a suspension corresponding to a new incoming ball occurs during execution of the special performance, execution of the specific performance corresponding to the suspension is restricted.

[Tenth Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a symbol display device that variably displays a special symbol for indicating the determination result of the success or failure lottery;
Variation pattern determination means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns for which the variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
It has a decorative pattern that is a pattern that shows the determination result of the winning lottery in a dramatic manner, and the decorative pattern is a normal decorative pattern that is displayed as a main pattern on the production display device at least when the special pattern is stopped, a simple decorative pattern displayed in a display form simplified from the normal decorative pattern,
At least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are provided as effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device,
capable of executing a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and the second image not deformed in the predetermined manner;
Triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new incoming ball, a hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed,
When displaying the pending image, display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
Even if the display of the pending image starts with the predetermined animation display before the execution of the special effect starts, and the special effect starts to be executed during the execution of the predetermined animation display, the predetermined The animation display of is continued without being stopped,
At a predetermined timing in the special effect, the simple decorative pattern can be displayed overlapping the first special image and the second image in the special effect, while the normal decorative pattern is displayed together with the first special image in the special effect. can be displayed in an overlapping manner, but is not displayed in an overlapping manner with the second image.

[11th aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Win/fail lottery means for executing a win/fail lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, when the ball enters the start winning hole. ,
a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern for indicating the determination result of the lottery;
variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns for which the pattern variation display process is determined;
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole and pattern variations corresponding to previous entries are displayed, a lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as pending with a predetermined number as the upper limit. a hold control means;
a performance display device for displaying performance content;
effect determination means for determining effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
It is possible to execute a special effect to temporarily stop and display the predetermined effect content displayed on the effect display device at a predetermined timing,
Triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new entry, a hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed, and among the hold images, the hold image corresponding to the lottery value at which the symbol variation display is started is , can be displayed as a varying image corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The pinball game machine is characterized in that the suspended image is hidden while the special effect is being executed, and the display of the changing image is continued.

[Twelfth aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the start winning opening, success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game; ,
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of effect patterns as effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
effect display control means for displaying the effect content based on the determined effect pattern on the effect display device;
with
The effect display control means has a frame buffer for temporarily storing frame images constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device,
The frame buffer is
a first buffer area capable of storing a frame image of a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the effect display device;
a second buffer area which is different from the first buffer area and can store a frame image of a second display size which is equal to or smaller than the screen area size of the effect display device;
including at least
In the plurality of types of production patterns,
The first buffer area is used as a frame buffer, and the frame image of the first display size stored in the first buffer area at a predetermined timing is transformed so as to be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device. A first special effect is determined for displaying a moving image on the effect display device by sequentially generating new frame images by synthesizing the image and the image showing the game situation and storing them in the first buffer area. A first special effect pattern,
The second buffer area is used as a frame buffer, and an image obtained by deforming the frame image of the second display size stored in the second buffer area at a predetermined timing and an image showing the game situation are synthesized. A second special effect, different from the first special effect, is defined as a effect of displaying a moving image on the effect display device by sequentially generating new frame images and storing them in the second buffer area. A second special production pattern,
A pinball game machine characterized by comprising:

[13th aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the start winning opening, success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game; ,
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of effect patterns as effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
effect display control means for displaying the effect content based on the determined effect pattern on the effect display device;
with
The effect display control means has a frame buffer for temporarily storing frame images constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device, and the frame buffer has a plurality of buffer areas each capable of storing a frame image. including
Which of the plurality of buffer areas is to be used as a frame buffer is determined for each of the plurality of types of effect patterns, and an image obtained by deforming the frame image stored in the buffer area at a predetermined timing and a game situation are displayed. a plurality of special effect patterns in which a special effect for displaying a moving image on the effect display device is determined by sequentially generating new frame images synthesized with an image showing and storing in the buffer area,
The effect display control means includes:
It is stipulated that different buffer areas should be used for multiple special effect patterns that are designed so that the execution timing may overlap within the same variation.
For multiple special effect patterns that are designed so that the execution timing does not overlap within the same variation, the display of the effect by the other special effect pattern is started even though the effect by the other special effect pattern is being displayed. The pinball game machine is characterized in that the performance by the other special performance pattern determined later is preferentially displayed over the performance by the one special performance pattern previously displayed.

[14th aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the start winning opening, success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game; ,
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of effect patterns as effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
effect display control means for displaying the effect content based on the determined effect pattern on the effect display device;
with
A main image portion having a display size that can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device and an outer frame image portion formed so as to surround the outer periphery of the main image portion constitute one image for effect,
In the effect image in the initial situation, part or all of the outer frame image portion is not displayed within the screen area of the effect display device,
In the production image in a predetermined situation different from the initial situation, part or all of the outer frame image portion that was not displayed within the screen area of the production display device in the initial situation is A new frame image is sequentially generated by synthesizing an image obtained by changing at least one of the display ratio and shape of the image for effect and an image showing the game situation so as to be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device. A pinball game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a moving image on the effect display device by generating a special effect.

[15th aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting prize winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the start winning opening, success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game; ,
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of effect patterns as effect content to be displayed on the effect display device;
effect display control means for displaying the effect content based on the determined effect pattern on the effect display device;
operation input means for receiving an operation input by a player;
with
The effect display control means has a frame buffer for temporarily storing frame images constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device, and the frame buffer has a plurality of buffer areas each capable of storing a frame image. including
When an operation input is performed by the operation input means, a new frame image obtained by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming the frame image at the operation input timing and an image showing the game situation is added to the plurality of types of effect patterns. By sequentially generating and storing in a first buffer area, moving images are displayed on the effect display device, and when an operation input is performed by the operation input means, the first buffer at the operation input timing. A new frame image is sequentially generated by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming the frame image stored in the area and an image showing the game situation, and is stored in the second buffer area to transmit the moving image to the performance display device. This pinball game machine is characterized by including a special performance pattern in which a special performance to be displayed is determined.

(Base technology 2)
A basic configuration of a slot machine will be described as a prerequisite technology.
40 is a perspective view showing the basic structure of the outer surface of the slot machine 1010. FIG. The slot machine 1010 includes a housing base 1102 which is mainly a box-shaped body, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various types of slots provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. a device; The housing door portion 1104 is a door attached to the opening of the housing base portion 1102 so as to be freely opened and closed. Form. The housing door 1104 is locked during the business hours of the amusement arcade to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010 . Only when the cabinet door 1104 is unlocked by an employee of the amusement arcade, access to the interior becomes possible.

A transparent window 1132 is provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the housing door portion 1104 , and the reel rotating inside can be visually recognized through the transparent window 1132 . An effect display device 1130 for displaying effect content is provided on the front upper portion of the housing door portion 1104 . A first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a checkout button 1113, a cross key 1118, an effect button 1120, and a medal slot 1110 are provided in an operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the housing door portion 1104. be done. The first bet button 1112a is a button for betting one medal (hereinafter also referred to as "bet"), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button, which is the maximum number of bets of three. A button for hanging a medal. The settlement button 1113 is a button for instructing the player to pay out the medals inserted from the medal slot 1110 and stored as stored medals or bet medals. The cross key 1118 and the production button 1120 are operation input means for receiving the player's operation input as production. Below the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a start lever 1114 is provided for the player to instruct the start of rotation of the reels. On the right side of the start lever 1114, a left stop button 1116a, a middle stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c are provided for respectively instructing stoppage of rotation of the three reels. A medal payout opening 1108 and a medal receiving tray 1106 are provided in front of the medal payout opening 1108 under the housing door portion 1104 , and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right sides of the payout opening 1108 . A plurality of production lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of locations such as the outer circumference of the housing door portion 1104 .

A status display lamp, a number display lamp, a stored number display lamp, and a payout number display lamp are provided on the upper portion (not shown) of the effect display device 1130 . The status display lamp lights when, for example, a bonus game or AT (assist time) starts, and turns off when finished. The number display lamp is a 7-segment indicator that displays the number of bonus games, the number of AT executions, and the like. The stored number display lamp is a 7-segment indicator that displays the number of stored (credited) game medals. The number-of-payouts display lamp is a seven-segment display that displays the number of game medals to be paid out when a minor winning combination is established. The number-of-payouts display lamp displays alphabetic characters indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010 . For example, there are a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal backflow error, an auxiliary storage compartment full error, a spinning drum stop error, a set value error, and the like. A hopper empty error is an error when game medals in the hopper tank 1162 become empty. A game medal payout error is an error when game medals are paid out at a timing different from the original. The game medal retention error is an error when game medals are jammed inside the medal slot 1110 . The game medal backflow error is an error when the game medals advance in a direction different from the original route, such as when the game medals enter from a position different from the medal slot 1110 . The auxiliary storage full error is an error when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 are full. Spindle stop error is an error when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. A set value error is an error that occurs when a set value is outside a predetermined numerical range.

FIG. 41 is a rear view of housing door portion 1104 exposed when housing door portion 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided substantially in the center. A sub-controller 1300 called a so-called sub-board is installed on the upper part to control the effects in the game. Below the transparent window 1132, a medal selector 1150, a medal guiding path 1152 on the right side thereof, and a medal return path 1154 on the lower side are provided. A medal selector 1150 distributes a medal inserted into a medal insertion slot, which will be described later, to a medal guidance path 1152 if the medal can be accepted, and to a medal return path 1154 if the medal cannot be accepted. The medals distributed to the medal guiding path 1152 are stored in a hopper tank, which will be described later, through the medal guiding path 1152 .

FIG. 42 is a front view showing the internal structure of housing base 1102 exposed when housing door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160 a , a middle reel 1160 b , and a right reel 1160 c are rotatably provided at substantially the center of the housing base 1102 . The left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members having a plurality of patterns printed on their outer peripheral surfaces. visible to the player.

A main control device 1200, which is a so-called main board, is installed on the upper part of the housing base 1102 to control the progress of the game. A setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right side of main controller 1200 . The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing six stages of game specifications, a keyhole for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor, and a setting memory for storing set values. Of the six levels of set values associated with different game specifications, the larger the value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications are for the player. When an amusement store employee inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the button can be operated to change the setting.

A hopper tank 1162 is provided at the bottom of the housing base 1102 , and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter also referred to as “hopper”) for paying out medals from a payout opening 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162 . A power board 1166 for supplying power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided to the left of the hopper tank 1162 .

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement on reels. Symbol rows as shown in the table are printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c. Twenty symbols corresponding to symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at regular intervals on each reel. When a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line among these symbols becomes a predetermined same symbol or a predetermined combination that establishes a predetermined combination, winning of the combination is determined. On the other hand, the lines in which symbols are arranged include combination lines which are not set as valid lines and are not treated as wins of a winning combination even if predetermined same symbols or predetermined combinations stop.

In the slot machine 1010 described above, the player inserts 1 to 3 medals from the medal slot 1110 to bet on medals. When medals are stored as credits, the player presses the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the settlement button 1113 to bet one or three medals. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c start to rotate, and the symbol rows on the reels move vertically at high speed. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c in an arbitrary order, the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c stops in the order corresponding to the pressing order. One of the symbols is displayed at the stop position. If the combination of symbols stopped on a predetermined activated line corresponds to one of a plurality of types of combinations, it is determined as a ``win,'' and the number of medals corresponding to the type of the combination is paid out, or a game state is reached. migration is performed.

FIG. 44 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. As shown in FIG. The slot machine 1010 has a main controller 1200 and a sub controller 1300 . Main controller 1200 is electrically connected to reels 1160a-c, bet buttons 1112a-b, checkout button 1113, start lever 1114, stop buttons 1116a-c, setting change switch 1168, and sub-controller 1300 is a production lamp. 1124 , effect display device 1130 , speaker 1122 , cross key 1118 and effect button 1120 are electrically connected. The main control unit 1200 and the sub control unit 1300 each include elements such as ROM and RAM for storing data and programs, and CPUs used for arithmetic processing in terms of hardware. I will explain the functional blocks from this perspective.

Note that each functional block included in the main controller 1200 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the sub controller 1300 instead of the main controller 1200 . Similarly, each functional block included in the sub-controller 1300 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the main controller 1200 instead of the sub-controller 1300 . However, since data transmission/reception between the main controller 1200 and the sub-controller 1300 is unidirectional from the main controller 1200 to the sub-controller 1300, the entire operation is realized by such unidirectional data transmission/reception. Each configuration is arranged in the main controller 1200 and the sub-controller 1300 so as to be performed. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main controller 1200 to the sub-controller 1300 is maintained in this way, it is possible to transmit data from the configuration included in the sub-controller 1300 to the configuration included in the main controller 1200. and cannot request data transmission. Therefore, information generated by main controller 1200 cannot be referred to by sub controller 1300 unless main controller 1200 unilaterally transmits it to sub controller 1300 .

The main control device 1200 includes a combination lottery means 1202, a random number determination means 1204, a win flag control means 1206, a reel control means 1208, a stop position determination table 1210, an operation order detection means 1212, a winning determination means 1214, a payout means 1216, and a special game. A control means 1218 and a setting change means 1220 are provided.

Triggered by the operation of the start lever 1114 by the player, the combination lottery means 1202 executes a combination lottery for determining a winning combination from a plurality of types of combinations, and transmits the result of the combination lottery to the sub-controller 1300. do. The types of winning combinations include minor winning combinations, special winning combinations, and replay winning combinations. There are a plurality of types of small wins, and the number of medals corresponding to the types is paid out. Special roles include regular bonuses (also referred to as "RB") and big bonuses (also referred to as "BB"). A replay combination is also called a "replay", and is a combination in which the same number of medals are inserted without inserting new medals, and the game can be played again. The random number determining means 1204 acquires the value of the random number used for the combination lottery as the lottery value. It should be noted that the "random numbers" referred to in the present application may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. The combination lottery means 1202 determines a winning combination by determining whether or not the lottery value obtained by the random number determination means 1204 falls within any of the lottery value ranges assigned to each combination.

Winning flag control means 1206 turns on a flag corresponding to a winning combination among a plurality of flags corresponding to each combination. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a small combination, the winning combination is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a special combination, the winning is carried over to the winning, so the flag is kept turned on until the winning, and the flag is turned off when winning. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a replaying combination, the winning combination is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends.

When the start lever 1114 is operated, the reel control means 1208 controls to start rotating the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c, and sends information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114. Send to control device 1300 . The reel control means 1208 selects one of a plurality of stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the winning combination lottery. The reel control means 1208 stops the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b and the right reel 1160c in response to the depression of the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b and the right stop button 1116c. In addition to performing control, information indicating that the stop button has been pressed is transmitted to the sub-controller 1300 . The reel control means 1208 controls the rotation and stop of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b and the right reel 1160c by controlling the driving of the stepping motors respectively provided.

Based on the stop position determination table 1210, the reel control means 1208 selects the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c according to the timing and order of pressing the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c. to determine the stop position of the The operation order detection means 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control means 1208 detects reference positions of the rotational positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by corresponding photosensors.

The stop position determination table 1210 includes the result of the lottery, the positions of the reels 1160a-c when the stop buttons 1116a-c are pressed, the order of pressing the stop buttons 1116a-c, and the plurality of reels 1160a-c. A correspondence relation is determined as to which of the symbols is to be stopped on the pay line. That is, individual stop position determination tables 1210 are prepared according to the type of small combination, the type of special combination, and the type of replay combination. It is defined in each stop position determination table 1210 . When any winning combination is won, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning combination, when the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 The stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is aligned on the activated line. Even if any combination is won, if the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c do not satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop position according to the winning combination. Based on the table 1210, the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not line up on the active line. If none of the wins are won, the reel control means 1208 controls the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c so that the symbol combination corresponding to the win does not line up on the effective line, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the win. to decide.

In this specification, the term "table" simply refers to data in which the correspondence relationship between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating an option is strictly defined in a table structure. Instead, it broadly includes the case of implementation by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter as such a correspondence relationship. These are also referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate as a concept substantially synonymous with "table". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

Winning determination means 1214 determines that a prize has been won when the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations is aligned on the activated line, and determines the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning combination. The payout means 1216 adds the number of payout medals determined by the prize determination means 1214 to the number of stored medals. However, when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, the excess medals are paid out by the payout device 1164.例文帳に追加Also, when the winning combination is a replay combination, the same number of medals as the number of inserted medals in the previous game are placed again. Winning determination means 1214 transmits information on winning and information on the number of payout medals to sub-controller 1300 .

A special game control means 1218 performs control to shift from a normal game to a special game when a special role is won, and to shift from a special game to a normal game when a condition for ending the special game is satisfied. As the special game, there are an RB game that shifts when the RB wins and a BB game that shifts when the BB wins. The RB game ends when predetermined symbols or predetermined combinations stop eight times on the activated line, or when 12 game results are obtained. The BB game ends when the total number of medals to be paid out exceeds 465 due to the prescribed symbols or prescribed combinations stopping on the activated line.

The setting change means 1220 determines the game specification corresponding to the set value set by the setting change switch 1168 among the six stages of game specifications, and changes the winning probability of each combination in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means 1202 . In the game specification of six stages, the winning probability is higher as the numerical value among setting 1 to setting 6 is larger. Each time the setting change switch 1168 is operated, the set value is incremented by one in the order of "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → ... → "setting 6" → "setting 1". Cycle the increments by going back from setting 6 to setting 1. Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the setting value selected at that time is determined, and the setting change is confirmed.

The sub control device 1300 includes pattern storage means 1302 , effect determination means 1304 and effect control means 1306 . Pattern storage means 1302 stores a plurality of types of effect patterns. The effect pattern includes the effect contents to be displayed on the effect display device 1130 according to the progress of the game, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound pattern to be output from the speaker 1122, and the like. The effect determination means 1304 receives information such as information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, information indicating the pressing of the stop button 1116, information indicating the result of the winning lottery, information on winning, information on the number of payout medals, and other information from the main controller 1200. receive. Effect determination means 1304 is triggered by the operation of start lever 1114 or stop buttons 1116a-c or the stoppage of reels 1160a-c. One of a plurality of stored performance patterns is selected. The effect control means 1306 controls the display of the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamp 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determination means 1304. The effect control means 1306 changes the display contents to the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound output from the speaker 1122, etc. according to the input contents of the effect button 1120 and the cross key 1118. When the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b and the start lever 1114 are newly operated while controlling the performance by the performance pattern, the performance control means 1306 cancels the performance being displayed, and the performance determination means 1304 starts a new game. A corresponding production pattern is selected, and the production control means 1306 starts production according to the selected production pattern.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine 1010. As shown in FIG. First, it is assumed that none of the reels 1160a to 1160c have yet rotated (N of S1010) and no medals have been betted (N of S1012). In this state, if medals are accumulated as credits (Y of S1014), if one of the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b is pressed (Y of S1016), a bet of the number of medals corresponding to the pressed bet button is placed. Set (S1018). If there is no credit, the routine of this flow is exited and the rest of the processing is skipped until medals are inserted (N in S1014). Even if the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are not pressed in S1016, the routine of this flow is skipped until the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are pressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been made in S1012, then S1014 to S1018 are skipped (Y in S1012).

If the start lever 1114 is operated while the bet is set (Y of S1020), the winning lottery means 1202 executes the winning lottery (S1022), and the winning flag control means 1206 wins according to the result of the winning lottery. A flag corresponding to the role is turned on (S1024), and the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the result of the lottery of the role is selected (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not passed since the end of the previous game, it waits (N of S1026), and if it has passed (Y of S1026), the reel control means 1208 starts rotating the reels 1160a to 1160c ( S1028), exiting the routine of this flow. If the start lever 1114 is not operated at S1020, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processes are skipped (N at S1020).

In S1010, when at least one of the reels 1160a to 1160c is spinning (Y in S1010), if any of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c is pressed (Y in S1030), the state of the flag indicating the winning combination; The stop position of the reel is determined based on the stop button pressing timing, the pressing order, and the stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If the stop button is not pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N of S1030). When all the reels 1160a to 1160c are stopped (Y of S1036), it is determined whether the winning combination wins based on their stop positions (S1038). is paid out (S1040). If all reels are not stopped, S1038 and S1040 are skipped (N of S1036).

As the reel stop management processing, a wait time is set, a control command including information indicating that the reel is waiting for the start of rotation is generated and written in the command buffer, and an initial value of various data used for accelerating the reel is set to a predetermined value. stored in the storage area of It is determined whether or not all the reels are rotating at a constant speed, and if it is determined that they are not rotating at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all the reels is abnormal. Again, the initial values of various data used for accelerating the reels are stored in a predetermined storage area, and confirmation of all the reels is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reels are rotating at a constant speed, or if it is determined that the rotation is not abnormal, the confirmation of all the reels is terminated.

In addition, when the payout cannot be stored in payout of medals, hopper payout is executed. In this hopper payout process, first, the hopper is driven and waits until the payout is detected (if the payout is not detected until a predetermined time elapses, a hopper empty error occurs). When the payout is detected, the number of payouts is added, whether or not the payout is completed is determined, and if the payout is not completed, the payout process is repeated, and if the payout is completed, the driving of the hopper is terminated.

FIG. 46 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of main controller 1200 and sub controller 1300. As shown in FIG. Main controller 1200 includes electronic components such as main CPU 1250 , main RAM 1252 , and main ROM 1254 . The main ROM 1254 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling game operations in general. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 1254 into the main RAM 1252 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 1250 . Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A signal indicating insertion of medals, a signal indicating pressing of bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a signal indicating pressing of checkout button 1113, a signal indicating operation of start lever 1114, a signal indicating pressing of stop buttons 1116a to 1116c, and reels 1160a to 1160b. A signal indicating the position of c is acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 1250 drives and controls external devices such as stepping motors for the reels 1160a to 1160c by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 1250 to the sub-controller 1300 together with the result of the winning combination lottery, winning information, and information indicating the operation of each button and lever.

The sub-controller 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 1350, sub-RAM 1352, sub-ROM 1354, effect display control unit 1360, and the like. The sub ROM 1354 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data defining the effect process and display pattern data defining the effect display process. It is a hardware configuration that functions as A sub-control program including effect pattern data and display pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 1354 into the sub-RAM 1352, and effect control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub CPU 1350. FIG. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown), and is connected by two-way communication capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from each other. For example, when a command is transmitted from the sub CPU 1350 to the effect display control unit 1360, the command is transmitted multiple times. By replying, a communication error due to noise or the like is avoided. If a plurality of commands are received in a different order than normal, the effect display control unit 1360 ignores the ACK without replying, and replies only to appropriate commands. A signal from an external device such as the effect button 1120 is acquired by the sub CPU 1350 via various interfaces (not shown), and a corresponding command is transmitted to the effect display control unit 1360 according to the reception of the signal or the number of times of reception. The sub CPU 1350 drives an external device such as the speaker 1122 by various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and controls the effect by sound output. Sub CPU 1350 also transmits display pattern data to effect display control section 1360 . The sub CPU 1350 and the effect display control unit 1360 are a hardware configuration functioning as effect determination means 1304 and effect control means 1306 in FIG. In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-controller 1300 includes the effect display control unit 1360 will be described. may be formed as separate substrates that are connected to each other as substrates.

FIG. 47 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of effect display control section 1360. As shown in FIG. The effect display control section 1360 includes a control CPU 1362 , a control RAM 1364 , a data ROM 1366 and a display control circuit 1370 . The data ROM 1366 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display, and object definition data of three-dimensional images in a data-compressed state. It is a hardware configuration that functions as means 1302 . The effect image data is an image that is used for effect display as a effect object that indicates the winning determination result, and is, for example, a material image such as a sprite image used for various effects and a moving image used for various effects. The motion data is data that defines the action when adding a dramatic action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. Object definition data is data that defines the shape of a three-dimensional object.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 1350, material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data designated by the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and the material data is read. The effect display used is executed by the control CPU 1362 . As a result, the control CPU 1362 transmits commands and material data relating to the effect display to the display control circuit 1370, and the display control circuit 1370 performs display control. When a signal indicating the operation of the new bet buttons 1112a and 1112b or the start lever 1114 is received during the effect display, the sub CPU 1350 determines a new effect pattern and transmits a command indicating the new effect display to the control CPU 1362. . The sub CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 are a hardware configuration functioning as the effect determination means 1304 and the effect control means 1306 referred to in FIG.

The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374 , a drawing memory 1376 , a drawing circuit 1378 , a frame buffer 1380 and a display circuit 1382 which are connected via a bus 1372 . Bus 1372 in this figure is a generic representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for the sake of convenience.

Material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 are stored in the drawing memory 1376 , and compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 1374 . The drawing memory 1376 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the decoder 1374 decodes effect image data and motion data, and used as a work area when the drawing circuit 1378 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 1362 to generate display images. Store in 1380. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM as a buffer memory that temporarily stores frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 1130 . It should be noted that the frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be configured by a single VRAM and formed by dividing the area.

The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the effect display device 1130 in the form of video signals in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 1380 has a memory area for two frames, for example. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The slot machine 1010 is powered by a power board 1166 that functions as a power supply. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply device, and signals from these switches are sent to the main CPU 1250 . The power switch is a switch that receives power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device to the slot machine 1010 . The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit or the like mounted on the main controller 1200 when an error occurs in the slot machine 1010 or the like. Power from the power supply is supplied to main controller 1200 and sub controller 1300 . On the power supply path from the power supply to the main controller 1200 and the sub controller 1300, there is provided power monitoring means for monitoring the supply voltage and detecting a power failure in which the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage. When the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, the power monitoring means determines that the power supply has been cut off, and outputs a power cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub CPU 1350 . Note that the reference voltage value for detecting the power interruption of the main controller 1200 is set to a value higher than the reference voltage value for detecting the power interruption of the sub controller 1300, and the voltage is detected before the sub controller 1300. Main controller 1200 executes a programmed process (power-off process) to be executed at power-off.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing main program control processing of main controller 1200 in slot machine 1010 . In the game control process executed by the main controller 1200, first, a game start process is executed (S1100), a game medal management process is executed (S1102), and as a start condition, the number of bets matches a prescribed number, and If the operation of the start lever is accepted (Y of S1104), the lever acceptance processing is executed (S1106), and if at least one of the start conditions is not satisfied (N of S1104), the process returns to S1102. Following S1106, combination determination processing is executed (S1108), and whether or not freezing (effect) is executed as freeze lottery processing, and the effect mode during freezing is determined (S1110). When the pseudo game freeze is selected in the freeze lottery, the pseudo game is executed (S1112). A reel stop management process such as waiting for a wait time is executed (S1114), and a stop display pattern determination process is executed to determine whether or not a game combination is established (S1116). Next, a game medal payout process is executed (S1118), a game end process is executed (S1120), and the process returns to S1100 to repeat the flow of this figure.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in main controller 1200 . In this timer interrupt processing, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player, detection (confirmation) of the signal level, transmission of each control command, etc. It is performed every fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). First, interrupt initial processing (saving registers, inhibiting interrupts, etc.) is executed (S1200), and it is determined whether or not a power interruption has been detected. A disconnection process is executed (S1204). In the power-off processing, saving of registers, saving of stack pointer, saving of interrupt state, and the like are performed. In addition, the holding of the information on the combination determination result and the information on the RT game state stored in the predetermined storage area, the calculation and storage of the checksum, and the like are processed. If no power interruption is detected (N of S1202), timer measurement is executed (S1206). Timer measurement measures the elapsed time of any timer set in the game control process. Next, control of the display lamp (update of the display value of the display lamp based on the control data output to the output port, etc.) is executed (S1208), and reading of the input port is executed (S1020). In reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal inputted to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, the reel driving control (S1212) for controlling the acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc. of the rotation of the reels is repeated until all the reels are finished (S1214). Next, port output processing for exciting output of reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. is executed (S1216), and control command transmission processing is executed (S1218). Outer edge signal data stored in a predetermined storage area is read out and an outer edge signal is output (S1220), interrupt termination processing (restore of register, interrupt permission, etc.) is executed (S1222), and interrupt return is performed. do.

Another control process executed by main controller 1200 is a main control power-on process. The main control power-on process is a process performed when power supply to the main control device 1200 is started (at the time of power-on), a temporary stack pointer is set, a checksum is calculated, a check, etc. are performed, and a power return process is executed. processed as possible. The stack pointer is restored and an interrupt is activated, and the game is played based on the information on the winning combination determination result, the information on the RT game state, etc., which were stored in a predetermined storage area when the power was turned off.

(Second embodiment)
This embodiment proposes suitable control and effects in a pachinko game machine provided with fall determination means. Elements that are the same as or correspond to elements that constitute the pachinko game machine 100 of the underlying technology 1 and the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the contents already explained in the base technology are omitted as appropriate, and mainly the contents different from the base technology 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the determination of falling from the variable probability state (also referred to as high probability state) to the normal probability state (also referred to as low probability state) is executed. After the special game ends, when the state is shifted to the high probability state, fall determination is executed in the fluctuation start process executed at the start of the pattern fluctuation. When the fall judgment is won, the high probability state is terminated after the fall judgment, and the state is shifted to the low probability state. On the other hand, if the fall judgment is not won, the high probability state continues even after the fall judgment.

In this embodiment, the first lottery means 211 of FIG. 4 is further provided with the first fall determination means, and the second lottery means 212 is further provided with the second fall determination means. The first fall determination means executes fall determination based on the lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 . The second fall determination means executes fall determination based on the lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 . The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires the first fall lottery value for fall determination by the first fall determination means from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 . The first falling lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquiring means 216 is acquired separately from the first winning lottery value, the first symbol lottery value and the first pattern lottery value. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires the second fall lottery value for fall determination by the second fall determination means from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting hole 12 . The second falling lottery value obtained by the second lottery value obtaining means 217 is obtained separately from the second winning lottery value, the second symbol lottery value and the second pattern lottery value. As a modified example, the first falling lottery value may be obtained in the fluctuation start process of the first special symbol 51 instead of being obtained with the ball entering the first starting port 11 as a trigger. Similarly, the second falling lottery value may be obtained in the variation start process of the second special symbol 52 instead of being obtained when the ball enters the second starting port 12 .

The first drop lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second drop lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are reserved for special figures until a new symbol variation corresponding to the lottery value is started. It is reserved in means 241 . The prior determination means 235 can determine in advance the first drop lottery value and the second drop lottery value reserved by the special figure reservation means 241 before the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the lottery value. The preliminary determination means 235 performs preliminary determination of the transition of the game state based on the preliminary determination result of the first drop lottery value and the second drop lottery value, and the game state when the lottery value to be subjected to the preliminary determination is finally determined. It is possible to determine in advance whether is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state. Pre-determination means 235 can pre-determine the lottery value reserved in the special figure reservation means 241 according to the transition of the game state determined in advance.

In this embodiment, the specific game control means 270 of FIG. 4 is provided with probability state control means and entering ball state control means. The probability state control means shifts from a low probability state in which the probability of the result of success/failure determination to be a jackpot is normal to a high probability state in which the probability of the result of success/failure determination to be a jackpot is higher than the predetermined probability. The probability state control means shifts to the high probability state after the end of the special game when the condition enabling the transition to the high probability state is satisfied. The probability state control means shifts to the low probability state after the end of the special game or the start of the symbol variation when the condition enabling the transition to the low probability state is satisfied. The ball-entering state control means changes the ball-entering easiness to the second starting hole 12 from a normal ball-entering state (also referred to as a low ball-entering state) in which the ball-entering easiness to the second starting hole 12 is relatively low. to a high easy-to-enter state (also referred to as a high-enter state). The ball-entering state control means shifts to the easy-ball-entering state after the end of the special game or upon the end of the pattern variation as a trigger when the conditions for allowing the transition to the easy-ball-entering state are satisfied. When the condition for terminating the easy-to-enter state (or the condition for shifting to the normal-entering state) is satisfied, the ball-entering state control means controls the normal state after the end of the special game or at the start or end of the symbol variation. Move to ball entry state.

The probability state control means enables a transition to a high probability state after the end of a special game executed with a predetermined type of jackpot symbol stopped and displayed. For example, as the types of symbols indicating a big hit, a probability variation jackpot symbol (first jackpot symbol) and a non-variability jackpot symbol (second jackpot symbol) are prepared, and a special that is executed after the first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed After the end of the game, the state is shifted to the high probability state, and after the end of the special game executed after the stop display of the second big win symbol, the state is shifted to the low probability state. In addition, only jackpot patterns that can be shifted to the high probability state are prepared, and the probability change state is shifted depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area in the big winning opening that is opened during the special game after the jackpot. It may be determined whether or not That is, it may be a configuration called "ball definite" or "V definite" in which the transition to the probability variable state is confirmed by entering a specific area (V winning) during the special game. As the big winning openings that can be opened during the special game, a first big winning opening having no specific area inside the big winning opening and a second big winning opening having a specific area inside the big winning opening are provided. A first unit game in which the first big winning opening is opened and a second unit game in which the second big winning opening is opened may be executed during the special game of the round. In this case, it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the opening mode and the opening time of the second big prize opening are different depending on the type of the big winning pattern, and it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the easiness of entering the specific area is different. In this way, the probability of transition to the probability variation state may differ according to the type of the big hit symbol. For example, when a special game is executed as a result of a big win with a big win pattern A, a second unit game in which the opening time of the second big prize opening is relatively long is executed to facilitate entry of a ball into a specific area. You may do so. On the other hand, when a special game is executed as a big win with the big win pattern B, a second unit game is executed in which the opening time of the second big prize opening is relatively short, and it is difficult to enter the specific area. You can make it In addition, by varying the opening timing of the big winning hole and the operation timing of a distribution mechanism for allocating game balls to either a specific area or a non-specific area in the big winning hole according to the type of the big winning pattern, A special game (jackpot pattern A) in which it is easy or possible to enter a specific area or a special game (jackpot pattern B) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a specific area may be executed. In addition, only a large winning opening with a specific area is provided, and in unit games other than the specific number of times that is the first unit game (for example, rounds other than the 4th round), the game ball is placed in either the specific area or the non-specific area Without activating the distribution mechanism for distributing the second unit game, a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to either a specific area or a non-specific area in a specific number of unit games (for example, the 4th round) A special game (jackpot pattern A, distribution that allows a ball to enter a specific area) is made to operate, and the operation mode is changed according to the type of the jackpot pattern, thereby making it easy or possible to enter a specific area. A time value of 10 seconds) and a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a specific area (jackpot symbol B, a distribution time value of 0.05 seconds that allows a ball to enter a specific area) are executed. You may do so. In this case, in either the special game (jackpot pattern A) in which it is easy or possible to enter the specific area or the special game (jackpot pattern B) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area, the big winning opening The opening time of is the same (for example, 30 seconds, and may be uniformly 30 seconds for unit games of a specific number of times and unit games other than the specific number of times). In this case, the actuation timing of the sorting mechanism (timing to start the actuation of sorting to a specific area) may be the timing when the number of balls entered into the big winning hole reaches a specific number (for example, two). For example, when a specific number of balls (for example, 2 balls) are entered in a specific number of unit games (for example, the 4th round), the sorting mechanism is operated to switch from a non-specified area allocation mode to a specific area allocation mode. By varying the operation time (the period during which the mode of distributing to the specific area is maintained) according to the type of the jackpot pattern, a special game (jackpot pattern A, 10 seconds to maintain the mode of being allocated to the specific area) and a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern B, 0.05 seconds to maintain the mode of being allocated to the specific area) ) may be executed.

In the configuration of the above-mentioned "V certainty", the execution mode of the second unit game when the first special symbol 51 becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, and the second special symbol 52 becomes a big hit and the special game is executed. By making the mode of execution of the second unit game different when it is executed, the probability of transition to the probability variable state may be made different. For example, when the first special symbol 51 is a big hit and a special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning opening in the second unit game is relatively shortened to relatively increase the number of balls entering the specific area. On the other hand, when the second special symbol 52 is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning hole in the second unit game is relatively lengthened to make the specific area. Entry into the ball may be made relatively easy. As a specific example, when the first special symbol 51 is a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of entering a ball into the specific area in the second big winning hole is set to about 50%, while the second When the special symbol 52 becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of entering the second big winning hole may be about 80%. Further, the opening time of the second big prize opening in the second unit game when the second special symbol 52 is a big hit and the special game is executed is lengthened (for example, 5 seconds or more, 10 seconds or more, or 20 seconds or more). By doing so, the second unit game may be constructed such that if the game ball is shot toward the second big winning hole during the special game, it almost certainly enters the second big winning hole. Thereby, when the second special symbol 52 is a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of entering the specific area in the second big winning hole may be substantially 100%. That is, the transition probability to the probability change state when the second special symbol 52 becomes a big hit may be substantially 100%. In this case, the probability of transition to the probability variation state when the first special symbol 51 becomes a big hit may be less than 100%, and the probability of transition to the probability variation state when the first special symbol 51 becomes a big hit is It may be about 50% to 80%. That is, in the configuration of "V definite", the first special symbol 51 may be less than 100% probability variation, and the second special symbol 52 may be 100% probability variation.

The probability state control means shifts to the low probability state immediately after the fall judgment when the fall judgment is won. In the variation start process when the special symbol symbol variation is started, each process is executed in the order of fall determination process, win/loss determination process, symbol determination process, and variation pattern determination process, and after each process is performed, the special symbol variation Display starts. Further, when the fall judgment is won, the process is executed in the order of fall judgment, transition from the high probability state to the low probability state due to the fall, and success/failure judgment. Therefore, when the design variation that wins the fall judgment is started, the game state (probability state) before the start of the design variation is a high probability state, but the game state ( probability state) is a low-probability state. Therefore, in the success/failure determination relating to the symbol variation that has won the falling determination, the success/failure determination is executed in a low probability state, for example, the success/failure determination is executed with reference to the success/failure determination table for low probability. On the other hand, in the success/failure determination relating to the symbol variation that does not win the falling determination, the success/failure determination is executed in a high probability state, for example, with reference to a success/failure determination table for high probability.

In this embodiment, when the state is shifted to the high probability state after the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the high probability state and easy ball entry state. The easy-to-enter state is continued until the number of symbol variations reaches at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times and 220 times in addition) after the end of the special game, and when the number of symbol variations reaches the predetermined number of times. Whether or not the easy-to-ball-enter state can be continued is determined depending on whether the high-probability state continues or the state falls to the low-probability state. Specifically, if the number of symbol variations is a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time) when the symbol variation is in a high-probability state, the easy-to-ball-enter state is continued. After that, when the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after 121 times) in the fluctuation start process related to the pattern fluctuation, when the falling judgment is won and the state is shifted to the low probability state, the state is changed to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state. The game state during the symbol variation that has been shifted and won the fall determination is a low probability state and a normal ball entering state. On the other hand, if the number of pattern fluctuations is a predetermined number (for example, 120th) in a low-probability state at the time of the pattern fluctuation, the transition from the easy-to-enter state to the normal-enter state is triggered by the end of the pattern fluctuation. In other words, the game is in the easy-to-enter state until the end of a predetermined number of symbol changes (for example, the 120th time). As a modified example, if the number of pattern fluctuations is a predetermined number (for example, 120th) in a low probability state at the time of the pattern fluctuation, the transition from the easy-to-enter state to the normal entry state may be triggered by the start of the pattern fluctuation. . In other words, it is easy to enter the ball until the end of the pattern variation immediately before the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 119th time). It may be in a spherical state. In addition, the "symbol variation frequency" means the total number of the variation frequency of the first special symbol 51 and the variation frequency of the second special symbol 52. - 特許庁In most cases, only the second game in which the second special symbol 52 is varied is played in the easy-entering state, so the number of symbol variations that can be the end of the easy-entering state is the cumulative variation of the second special symbol 52. can match the number of times.

FIG. 50 shows the transition of the game state after shifting to the high-probability state and easy-to-enter state. In this figure, the high probability state is defined as "high probability", the low probability state is defined as "low probability", the easy ball entry state is defined as "high ball entry", and the normal ball entry state is defined as "low ball entry". FIG. 50(a) shows a case where the falling determination is won in the first symbol variation after the end of the special game. In this case, the number of symbol variations after the end of the special game becomes a low probability and high ball entry state until the symbol variations are completed a predetermined number of times (for example, the 120th time). After that, when the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time), the pattern fluctuation becomes low probability and low ball entry state. Since the high-ball-entering state is a gaming state in which the player should hit to the right, the effect display device 60 displays a hitting-to-right image indicating that the player should hit to the right in the high-entering state. On the other hand, since the low ball entry state is a game state in which the player should hit left, the image of hitting right is not displayed in the low ball entry state. In the case of FIG. 50(a), a right-handed image is displayed from the start of the easy-to-enter state until the symbol variation stops when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time). ), the right-handed image is hidden when the symbol is stopped.

FIG. 50(b) does not win the fall judgment in the first pattern fluctuation after the end of the special game, and the number of pattern fluctuations is within a predetermined number of times excluding the first time (for example, the 2nd to 120th) Fall judgment in the pattern fluctuation Shows the case of winning. In this case, the first pattern variation after the end of the special game has a high probability and a high ball entry state. After that, if the fall judgment is won within a predetermined number of times (for example, the 2nd to 120th times) excluding the first time, the pattern that the number of design fluctuations will be a predetermined number of times (for example, the 120th time) from the design change that won the fall judgment. It will be in a low probability and high ball entry state until the end of the fluctuation. After that, when the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time), the pattern fluctuation becomes low probability and low ball entry state. In the case of FIG. 50(b), a right-handed image is displayed from the start of the easy-to-enter state until the symbol variation stops when the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 120 times). ), the right-handed image is hidden when the symbol is stopped.

FIG. 50(c) shows a case where the falling judgment is not won in the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations is within a predetermined number (for example, 1st to 120th). In this case, the high-probability and high-ball entry state is continued until the falling judgment is won. After that, when the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time), when the fall judgment is won, the pattern fluctuation that wins the fall judgment becomes a low probability and low ball entry state. In addition, in FIG. 50(c), the number of pattern fluctuations exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, after the 121st time) without winning the fall judgment until the pattern fluctuations exceed the predetermined number of times (for example, after the 121st time). When winning the success/failure determination by the symbol variation and winning a big hit, the symbol variation winning the success/failure determination becomes a low probability and low ball entry state.例文帳に追加In the case of FIG. 50(c), the right-handed image is displayed from the start of the easy-to-enter state to just before the start of the symbol variation that wins the fall judgment or the win-or-fail judgment, and the start of the symbol variation that wins the fall judgment or the win-or-fail judgment is triggered. , the right-handed image is hidden.

In this embodiment, in addition to the easy-to-enter state (also referred to as A time-saving) that can be shifted to when the special game is executed, the easy-to-enter state that can be shifted to when the result of the success/failure determination is other than a big hit ( Also called B time saving or C time saving) is prepared. A time-saving is an easy-to-enter state that is shifted after a special game is completed when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit and a special game is executed. The A time saving may be transferable when a specific jackpot that can be transferred to the easy-entering state is achieved. The game state of A time saving may be a low probability state and easy ball entry state, or a high probability state and easy ball entry state. When the high-probability state and the easy-entering state are established, the fall determination is executed, and when the fall determination is won, the state is shifted to the low-probability state.

B time-saving is an easy-to-enter state that is shifted to when the cumulative number of symbol variations reaches a specified ceiling number without the occurrence of a big hit in the low-probability state. The ceiling number of times is 2.5 times or more and 3 times or less (eg, 798 times to 957 times) of the denominator (eg, 319) of the probability of a big hit occurring in a low probability state. Only one type (for example, 900 times) is set for the number of ceiling times of B time saving. When the cumulative number of pattern variations in the low probability state reaches a specified ceiling number (for example, 900 times), after the symbol variation corresponding to the ceiling number is completed, the state is shifted to the easy-to-enter state. In other words, it becomes easy to enter the state from the symbol variation next to the symbol variation that reaches the ceiling number of times. In addition, after the pattern variation that reaches the ceiling number of times ends (after stopping), the ball enters the easy-to-enter state, so, for example, after the pattern variation that reaches the ceiling number ends (after stopping), the first lottery value is reserved. Alternatively, even if the second lottery value is not retained and the symbol variation next to the symbol variation that reaches the ceiling number does not start, the game after the symbol variation that reaches the ceiling number is finished (after stopping). It is in an easy-to-enter state during standby (while symbols are stopped). The cumulative number of pattern variations in the low probability state is initialized by the occurrence of a big hit or RAM clear processing, but is not initialized with the shift to B time saving as a trigger. If B time saving ends without a big hit occurring during B time saving, if a big hit does not occur after that, the ceiling number for B time saving will not be initialized, so if there is no big hit after that, it will shift to B time saving again. will not be

C time saving is an easy-to-enter state that is shifted to when the result of the winning/failure determination is other than a big hit in a low-probability state and the winning/failing lottery value or the symbol lottery value falls within a specific range. For example, a specific pattern (also referred to as a C time saving pattern) indicating that it is possible to shift to C time saving is prepared, and when the C time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in a low probability state, it is shifted to C time saving. If it is not in the low-probability state, that is, if it is in the high-probability state, even if the symbol for C time saving is stop-displayed, it is not shifted to C time saving. The symbol for time saving C is a symbol indicating that it is not a big hit. The C time-saving symbol in a game machine without a small hit is a symbol indicating a loss, and the C time-saving symbol in a game machine with a small hit is a pattern indicating a loss or a small win. It is a pattern showing that there is something. When the low-probability state continues without the occurrence of a big hit, the process may be shifted to C time-saving a plurality of times while the low-probability state continues. For example, when the C time saving ends without a big hit occurring during the C time saving, even if the big win does not occur after that, the C time saving pattern may be shifted to the C time saving again with the stop display of the C time saving pattern as a trigger. C time saving may be transferable only when the symbol for C time saving is stop-displayed in a low probability and low ball entry state. In this case, when the C time saving symbol is stop-displayed in the low probability and high ball entry state, it is not necessary to shift to the C time saving. That is, when the symbol for C time saving is stopped during execution of A time saving, B time saving or C time saving, it is not shifted to C time saving. In this case, only the first special symbol 51 is provided with the C symbol for time reduction, and the second special symbol 52 is not required to be prepared with the C symbol for time reduction. In the specification that does not shift to C time saving when the C time saving pattern is stopped and displayed during the execution of A time saving, B time saving or C time saving, the C time saving pattern is prepared only for the second special pattern 52, and the first special pattern 51 may not be provided with C time saving patterns. C time saving may be shiftable when the symbol for C time saving is stop-displayed in a low probability and high ball entry state. For example, when the C time saving pattern is stopped during execution of A time saving, B time saving, or C time saving, A time saving, B time saving, or C time saving may be ended and C time saving may be performed. In this case, both the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 may be provided with a C time-saving symbol, or only the second special symbol 52 is provided with a C time-saving symbol, and the first special symbol 51 is The pattern for C time saving does not have to be prepared.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation start processing. The processing shown in FIG. 51 is executed immediately before the variable display of special symbols is started. That is, after the process of the flow of FIG. 51, the variable display of the special symbols is started. At the beginning of the fluctuation start process, the current game state is stored (S1300). The game states to be stored include the probability state (low probability state or high probability state), the ball entry state (low ball entry state or high ball entry state), the variation pattern selection state, and the total number of symbol fluctuations (high ball entry state). and the total number of changes in the low-probability state). If the current game state is a high probability state (Y of S1302), fall determination is executed (S1304). If the falling judgment is won (Y of S1306), the state shifts to a low probability state (S1308). If the state is shifted to the low probability state and the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is 0 (Y in S1310), the state is shifted to the low ball entry state (S1312), and the success/failure determination is executed in the low probability state. (S1314). If the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is not 0 in S1310 (N in S1310), the process of S1312 is skipped, and the success/failure determination is performed in the low probability state (S1314). If the fall judgment is not won in S1306 (N of S1306), the high probability state is continued, and win/fail judgment is executed in the high probability state (S1316). If the result of the success/failure determination in S1316 is a big hit (Y of S1318) and the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is 0 (Y of S1320), the state shifts to a low probability and low ball entry state (S1322). If the result of the success/failure determination at S1318 is other than a big hit (N at S1318), or if the remaining number of times in the state of high ball entry is not 0 at S1320 (N at S1320), the processing of S1322 is skipped, and the probability is high. And the high ball entry state is maintained. In S1302, if the current game state is a low probability state (N of S1302), the processing of S1304 to S1312 is skipped, and win/fail determination is executed in a low probability state (S1314).

The "remaining high-ball count" in S1310 and S1320 refers to the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of fluctuations after shifting to the high-ball state reaches a predetermined number. The "remaining number of high ball entry states" in FIG. 51 is the cumulative number of changes in the easy ball entry state that is shifted after the special game is finished when the transition is made to the easy ball entry state after the special game is finished (that is, the short time A). may be the remaining number of times until reaches a predetermined number of times (120 times, 220 times, etc.). When the state is shifted to the high-ball-entering state, a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times) is set as the remaining number of times in the high-ball-entering state. The number of remaining high ball counts is subtracted when the design is stopped. Therefore, when the pattern variation is stopped for the first time in the high ball entry state, the remaining number of times is the predetermined number of times minus 1 (for example, 119 times). In the variation start processing relating to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations in the high winning state is a predetermined number (for example, the 120th time), the remaining number of high winning states becomes 1. Therefore, since the remaining number of high winning balls is not 0 in the variation start process related to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations in the high winning state is a predetermined number (for example, 120th), the process of S1310 becomes N, and the variation start process It is not shifted to the low ball entry state. On the other hand, if the number of pattern fluctuations after transitioning to a high probability and high ball state is within a predetermined number of times (for example, 1st to 120th), if the fall judgment is not won, the predetermined number of times will be exceeded (for example, after the 121st time ) The remaining number of high winning balls becomes 0 in the variation start process related to symbol variation. When the fall judgment is won with the number of remaining high ball counts of 0 (Y in S1306), the state is shifted to the low probability state (S1308), and when the processing in S1310 becomes Y, the state is shifted to the low ball state. (S1312). In other words, when the number of pattern fluctuations after shifting to a high probability and high ball entry state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time) when winning the fall judgment related to the pattern fluctuation, low probability and low ball entry in the fluctuation start process state. In addition, when the number of pattern fluctuations after shifting to a high probability and high ball entry state is within a predetermined number of times (eg, 1st to 120th) in the fluctuation start process related to the pattern fluctuation, and the fall judgment is not won and a big hit is achieved. (Y in S1318), since the number of remaining high-ball hits is 1 or more, the process of S1320 becomes N, thereby maintaining a high-probability and high-ball-hit state. On the other hand, when the number of pattern fluctuations after shifting to a high probability and high ball entry state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time) in the fluctuation start process related to the pattern fluctuation, the fall judgment is not won and a big hit is achieved (S1318 Y), since the number of remaining high ball hits is 0, the process of S1320 becomes Y, and the state is shifted to a low probability and low ball hit state in the fluctuation start process.

Subsequently, the symbol type of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the success/fail determination and the symbol lottery value (S1324). Next, the variation pattern selection state is determined (S1326), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern selection state and the pattern lottery value (S1328). In the variation pattern selection state determination process of S1326, for example, the variation pattern selection state may be determined based on the game state before the start of variation stored in S1300 and the game state at the time of S1326.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol symbol stop processing. The process shown in FIG. 52 is executed when the stop display of the special symbol is started, and is executed within the stop display period from when the special symbol is stopped until the next symbol variation is started. A special symbol indicating a non-big win (lost or small win) is stopped and displayed (Y of S1330), and if the number of remaining high-ball winning states is greater than 0 (Y of S1332), the remaining number of high-ball winning states. is subtracted by 1 (S1334). The process of S1334 is a process of counting the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of fluctuations after shifting to the high ball entry state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times), and can be said to be a time saving number of times subtraction process. In FIG. 52, the "remaining number of high ball entry states" means that the total number of changes in the easy ball entry state when transitioning to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game (that is, short time A) is a predetermined number of times (120 times, etc.). 220 times), and when the transition to the easy-to-enter state after the stop of the pattern other than the big hit (that is, short time B or short time C), the cumulative number of fluctuations in the easy-to-enter state is predetermined. It may be the remaining number of times until reaching the number of times (100 times or 200 times). When the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state becomes 0 as a result of the subtraction processing in S1334 (Y in S1336), the state is shifted to the low ball entry state (S1338). If the remaining number of high-ball-entering states is not 0 (N of S1336), the processing of S1338 is skipped, and the high-ball-entering state continues. In S1332, if the number of remaining high ball entry states is not greater than 0 (N in S1332), the processing of S1334 to S1338 is skipped.

Next, when the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process is a low probability and a low ball entry state (Y of S1340), and the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed (S1342 Y), the C time saving The number of remaining high-ball hits (for example, 100) is set (S1344), and the state shifts to a high-ball hit state (S1346). When the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process is not a low probability and low ball entry state (N of S1340), or when a symbol other than the C time saving pattern is stopped and displayed (N of S1342), the processing of S1344 to S1346 to skip. The processing of S1340 to S1346 is processing for determining the shift to C time saving, and can be said to be C time saving rush processing.

Next, if the current game state at the time of symbol stoppage is a low probability state (Y in S1348), 1 is subtracted from the ceiling reaching remaining number (S1350). Remaining number of reaching the ceiling refers to the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of fluctuations in the low probability state reaches the number of ceilings that is the condition for transition to B time saving. The remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is initialized by occurrence of a big win or RAM clear processing, and the number of times to reach the ceiling (for example, 900 times) is set as the initial value of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling. The process of S1350 is a process of counting the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling number of times, which is a transition condition to B time saving, and can be said to be a B time saving number subtraction process. When the remaining number of times the ball reaches the ceiling becomes 0 by the subtraction process of S1350 (Y in S1352), the remaining number of high ball hits for B time saving (for example, 200 times) is set (S1354), and the high ball state is entered ( S1356). If the current game state is not the low probability state at S1348 (N at S1348), the processing from S1350 to S1356 is skipped. In S1352, if the ceiling reaching remaining count is not 0 (N in S1352), the processing of S1354 to S1356 is skipped. In the process of S1354 and S1356, when entering into B time saving, the ceiling reaching remaining number of times is not initialized, and the ceiling reaching remaining number of times remains 0. Since the game state during B time saving is a low probability state, in the symbol stop processing during B time saving, S1348 becomes Y, and the remaining ceiling reaching number is subtracted by 1 at S1350. It becomes a small negative value and is subtracted. After that, even if the B time saving is completed, the ceiling reaching remaining number is not initialized, so the negative value is subtracted, and the ceiling reaching remaining number does not become 0. As a result, if a big hit occurs after shifting to B time saving and the ceiling reaching remaining number is not initialized, it is not shifted to B time saving again.

When the special symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed at S1330 (N at S1330), the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is initialized, and the number of times to reach the ceiling (for example, 900 times) is set as an initial value (S1358). The state is shifted to the probability and low ball entry state (S1360). After that, a special game is started.

As a modification, instead of executing the process of transitioning to the high-ball-entering state in S1346 and S1356, a flag indicating that it is possible to transition to the high-ball-entering state may be turned on. In this case, at the end of the flow of FIG. 52, if a flag indicating that the state can be shifted to the high-ball-entering state is turned on, a process of shifting to the high-ball-entering state may be executed. It should be noted that if the flag is off, the process of shifting to the high ball entry state is skipped.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a game flow according to the embodiment, showing transitions between a plurality of prepared presentation modes. In this embodiment, normal mode, A time saving mode, B time saving mode, C time saving mode, latent mode, extended mode, and special mode are prepared as production modes selected according to the game state. When the first special symbol 51 becomes a big hit in the left-handed first game, for example, there is a 90% probability of a 4R big hit, and a 10% probability of a 10R big hit. When the second special symbol 52 becomes a big hit in the right-handed second game, for example, there is a 100% probability of a 10R big hit. The transition of the production mode triggered by the jackpot in FIG. 53 is triggered by the jackpot of the first special symbol 51 in the first game that is left-handed in the normal mode, and is triggered by the right-handed in the modes other than the normal mode. Triggered by the big hit of the second special symbol 52 in the second game. The special mode is transitioned only when the second lottery value is reserved immediately before the transition in the production mode before the transition, and when the second lottery value is not reserved, the normal mode is selected instead of the special mode. Transition. In this embodiment, only jackpot symbols that can shift to a high probability state are prepared, and the probability varies depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area in the jackpot that is opened during the special game after the jackpot. It is configured to determine whether or not to transition to a state. In this embodiment, the 4R jackpot is a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a specific area (jackpot pattern B, the period of maintaining the state of being distributed to the specific area is 0.05 seconds), and the 10R jackpot is specified. This is a special game (a jackpot pattern A, a period of 10 seconds during which the state of being distributed to a specific area is maintained) in which it is easy or possible to enter the area. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the premise that the game ball does not enter the specific area in the 4R big win, but the game ball enters the specific area in the 10R big win, the transition of the production mode triggered by the big win is shown. The following description is also based on these assumptions.

The normal mode is an effect mode corresponding to the first game in which the game state is a low probability and a low ball entry state (low-low state) and is left-handed, and is an initial mode set at the start of the game. The right shot image is hidden in normal mode. When the 4R jackpot is achieved in the normal mode, the game is shifted to the A time saving mode after the special game is finished. When the 10R jackpot is achieved in the normal mode, the mode is shifted to the latent mode after the special game is finished. In the normal mode, when the total number of pattern variations in the low-probability state reaches a specified ceiling number (for example, 900 times), the game is shifted to the B time-saving mode. When the symbol for C time saving is stopped and displayed in the normal mode, the mode is shifted to the C time saving mode.

The A time-saving mode is a production mode corresponding to a second game in which the game state is a low probability and a high ball entry state (low-high state) and hits to the right. In A time saving mode, a right shot image is displayed. In the A time saving mode, the number of continuations of the high ball entry state (that is, the final period) is set to 200 times. When a big hit is achieved in the A time saving mode, the game is shifted to the latent mode after the special game is finished. When reaching the predetermined final period (200 times) of the high ball entry state in the A time saving mode, the special mode is shifted to after the end of the pattern variation which is the predetermined final period (200th time).

In the case of shifting to the A time saving mode, the execution of the special game that triggered the shift to the A time saving mode initializes the total number of pattern variations in the low probability state (for example, the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling). Since the final number of times of the A time saving mode (200 times) is less than the ceiling number of times (900 times) that is the condition for transition to the B time saving mode, the conditions for transition to the B time saving mode are satisfied during the execution of the A time saving mode. never. Therefore, there is no direct transition from the A time saving mode to the B time saving mode. As a modification, if the final number of times in the A time-saving mode is greater than the number of ceilings, which is the condition for transition to the B time-saving mode, the cumulative number of pattern variations in the A time-saving mode reaches the specified number of ceilings. You may transfer to B time saving mode.

When the symbol for C time saving is stopped and displayed in the A time saving mode, it may be impossible to shift to the C time saving mode. For example, it may be possible to shift to the C time saving mode only in the low probability and low ball entry state, and it may not be possible to shift to the C time saving mode in the low probability and high ball entry state. The A time saving mode is more advantageous for the player than the C time saving mode, and the number of times the A time saving mode continues (200 times) is greater than the number of times the C time saving mode continues (100 times). Therefore, if the time-saving mode is started after the time-saving mode A is started, the number of remaining high ball-entering states may be extremely reduced, which may be disadvantageous to the player. In order to prevent such a situation, the transition from the A time saving mode to the C time saving mode is prohibited. In addition, in a modification, when the symbol for C time saving is stopped and displayed in the A time saving mode, it may be possible to shift to the C time saving mode. For example, when the C time saving pattern stops in a low probability and high ball entry state, it may be shifted to the C time saving mode.

The B time-saving mode is an effect mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a low-probability, high-ball entry state (low-high state) and hits to the right. In the B time saving mode, a right shot image is displayed. In the B time saving mode, the number of continuations of the high ball entry state (final period) is set to 200 times, and the number of continuations of the high ball entry state is the same as in the A time saving mode. B time saving mode can perform the same production as A time saving mode, for example. When a big win is achieved in the B time-saving mode, the mode is shifted to the latent mode after the special game is finished. When reaching the predetermined final period (200 times) of the high ball entry state in the B time saving mode, the transition to the special mode is made after the completion of the pattern variation that is the predetermined final period (200 times). In the case of specifications that can shift to the C time saving mode only in the low probability and low ball entry state, when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the B time saving mode, it is not transferred to the C time saving mode. In a modification, when the symbol for C time saving is stop-displayed in the B time saving mode, it may be transferred to the C time saving mode. In addition, the number of continuations of the high ball state in the short time B mode may be set to be greater than the number of times the high ball state is continued in the short time mode A, for example, even if it is set to 500 times or 1000 times. good.

The C time-saving mode is an effect mode corresponding to a second game in which the game state is a low probability and a high ball entry state (low-high state), and is a right-handed game. In the C time saving mode, a right shot image is displayed. In the C time saving mode, the number of continuations of the high entry state (final period) is set to 100 times, and the number of continuations of the high entry state is less than in the A time saving mode and the B time saving mode. Therefore, it can be said that the C time saving mode is disadvantageous for the player compared to the A time saving mode and the B time saving mode. C time saving mode can perform production different from A time saving mode and B time saving mode, for example. When a big win is achieved in the C time saving mode, the mode is shifted to the latent mode after the special game is finished. When reaching the predetermined final period (100 times) of the high ball entry state in the C time saving mode, the transition to the special mode is made after the completion of the pattern variation that is the predetermined final period (100 times).

When the total number of pattern variations in the low-probability state reaches a specified ceiling number (for example, 900 times) during the C time saving mode, the C time saving mode is shifted to the B time saving mode. Since the B time-saving mode has a higher number of continuations of the high ball state than the C time-saving mode and is more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving mode, the transition from the C time-saving mode to the B time-saving mode may not be prohibited. . In the case of specifications that can shift to C time saving mode only in a low probability and low ball state to prohibit the transition from A time saving mode or B time saving mode to C time saving mode, the C time saving pattern is displayed stopped in C time saving mode If it is, it will not re-shift to C time saving mode. In a modification, it may be a specification to re-shift to the C time saving mode when the C time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the C time saving mode. For example, when the C time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed at the 50th time pattern change in the C time-saving mode, the C time-saving mode is once terminated with the stop display, a new C time-saving mode is started, and a high ball state may be reset to 100 times.

The latent mode is a production mode corresponding to a second game in which the game state is a high probability and high ball entry state (high high state) or a low probability and high ball entry state (low high state), and is a right-handed game. . A right shot image is displayed in latent mode. The game state at the start of the hiding mode is a high probability and high ball entry state (high high state), but if the fall judgment is won during the hiding mode, a low probability and a high ball entry state (low high state). is transferred to In addition, if the specification is "Tamaki", which confirms the transition to a high probability state by winning a V prize during a special game, if a V prize is won during a special game, it will be in a high probability state at the start of the hiding mode, and during the special game If you do not win the V prize at the beginning, you may be in a low probability state at the start of the hiding mode. In the latent mode, the high ball entry state continues until at least a predetermined number of times (120 times or 220 times). The predetermined number of times that the high ball count state can be continued in the latent mode is determined according to, for example, the type of the jackpot pattern that triggered the shift to the latent mode, for example, the jackpot pattern that is the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern 52. Among a, b, c, d, and e, the predetermined number of times is set to 120 times for the big winning symbols a to c, and the predetermined number of times is set to 220 times for the big winning symbols d to e. When a big hit is achieved in the hiding mode, the mode is shifted to the hiding mode after the special game is finished. If the number of symbol variations in the latent mode is within a predetermined number of times (120 or 220 times) and the fall judgment is won, after the symbol variation of the predetermined number of times (120th or 220th) is completed, the transition to the special mode is made. be done. If the number of pattern variations in the latent mode is within a predetermined number of times (120 or 220 times) and the fall judgment is not won, the extension mode is performed after the pattern variation of the predetermined number of times (120th or 220th) is completed. is transferred to

The extension mode is an effect mode corresponding to a second game in which the game state is a high probability and a high ball entry state (high-high state), and is a right-handed game. The extension mode is continued until the fall judgment is won in the extension mode, and when the fall judgment is won, the transition to the special mode is made after the pattern variation for which the fall judgment is won is finished. When a big hit is achieved in the extension mode, the mode is shifted to the latent mode after the end of the special game. If the fall judgment is won in the extension mode, the state is shifted to a low probability and low ball entry state (low low state) immediately after the fall judgment. Therefore, the game state in the pattern variation that wins the fall judgment in the extension mode is a low probability and a low ball entry state (low-low state), and when the symbol variation that wins the fall judgment stops, the number of remaining ceiling reaching times is subtracted by 1. be. In the extension mode, the right-handed image is displayed until just before the start of the pattern variation that wins the fall judgment or the success/failure judgment, and the right-handed image is hidden at the start of the symbol variation that wins the fall judgment or the success/failure judgment. In addition, it does not shift to B time saving mode triggered by the ceiling reaching remaining number of times is subtracted in the final variation of the extension mode. This is because the game state from the end of the special game until just before the final variation in the extension mode is a state of high probability and high ball entry, and the ceiling remaining number of times remains the initial value (for example, 900 times). If 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling when the final variation in the extension mode is stopped, the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling after the subtraction process becomes a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the initial value (for example, 899 times).

The special mode is an effect mode corresponding to the first game in which the game state is low probability and low ball entry state (low-low state) and is left-handed. The right shot image is hidden in the special mode. The special mode is shifted when the second lottery value is reserved at the end of the easy-entering state, and the second special pattern 52 is variably displayed by consuming the second lottery value. In the special mode, a special effect that can be executed only in the special mode can be executed. For example, a special effect that is not executed in the normal mode, the time saving mode, the latent mode and the extension mode is executed. In the special mode, for example, an effect is executed that encourages whether or not the player can return to the high ball entry state due to the occurrence of a big hit. When a big hit is achieved in the special mode, the mode is shifted to the latent mode after the special game is finished. When the reservation of the second lottery value is completely consumed in the special mode, the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

Since the second special pattern 52 is variably displayed in the special mode, when the C time saving pattern is prepared only in the first special pattern 51, the C time saving pattern is not stop-displayed in the special mode. In this case, there is no direct transition from the special mode to the C time saving mode. In addition, when the C time saving pattern is prepared in the second special pattern 52 (when the C time saving pattern is prepared only in the second special pattern 52, or when the C time saving pattern is prepared in the first special pattern 51 and the second When both special patterns 52 are provided), the C time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the special mode, and after the C time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, the special mode may be directly transferred to the C time saving mode.

In the game flow of the present embodiment, when the time saving mode, the latent mode or the extension mode selected in the high ball entry state ends, the system shifts to a common special mode until the remaining hold of the second lottery value is exhausted. . In the high ball entry state, it is easy for game balls to enter the second starting port 12, so the state where the second lottery value is held at the maximum (for example, 4) is often maintained. In most cases, the second lottery value is reserved when the time-saving mode, latent mode, or extended mode ends. Therefore, after the time saving mode, the latent mode or the extension mode ends, in most cases the mode is shifted to the special mode, and after the second lottery value remaining hold is consumed, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. If the second lottery value is not reserved at the end of the time saving mode, the latent mode or the extension mode, the mode is directly shifted to the normal mode instead of the special mode.

As an irregular situation that can occur in the game flow according to the present embodiment, it is conceivable that the first special symbol 51, not the second special symbol 52, becomes a big hit during a game that should be hit to the right. In this embodiment, only jackpot symbols capable of transitioning to a high-probability state are prepared, and the probability varies depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area in the jackpot opened during the special game after the jackpot. If it is configured to determine whether or not to move to the state, the 4R jackpot is a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern B, the period of maintaining the mode of being distributed to the specific area 0.05 seconds), and the 10R jackpot is a special game (jackpot pattern A, the period of maintaining the mode of being distributed to the specific region is 10 seconds) that makes it easy or possible to enter the specific area, so the 4R jackpot After the end of the special game, it will be in a low probability state. Therefore, when the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot in the right-handed game (that is, A short time mode, B short time mode, C short time mode, latent mode and extension mode), the game transferred after the end of the special game The state becomes a low probability state. When the game state to be shifted after the special game is in a low probability state, it is possible to shift to the A time saving mode in principle, but despite the big hit during the right hitting, the shift to the A time saving mode again. If this is done, a great disadvantage is given to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot during a right-handed game, instead of shifting to the A time-saving mode, shift to the latent mode in which the low probability and high ball entry state 220 times are set. be done. The latent mode that is shifted after the 4R big hit special game is over can be said to be an irregular latent mode in which the game state at the start is a low probability and high ball entry state. The number of continuations of low probability and high ball entry state set in irregular latent mode (220 times) is higher than the number of continuations of low probability and high ball entry state set in A short time mode (200 times) many. By increasing the number of continuations (220 times) in the case of shifting to the irregular latent mode than the number of continuations (200 times) in the A short-time mode, an unfortunate event of a 4R jackpot occurred during a right-handed game. Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage given to the player from becoming excessively large. The number of continuations of the low-probability and high-ball-entering state set in the irregular latent mode may be any number (eg, 500 times) greater than the number of continuations of the A time-saving mode (200 times).

Some aspects characteristic of this embodiment will be described below.

(Aspect 2-1: Fluctuation effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit and the degree of expectation for a short time rush)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the process of variable presentation. Within one symbol variation period from the start of variation of the special symbols to the stop display, the symbol variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbols can be executed. In the symbol variation production, it is possible to execute a specific production that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. There are a plurality of types of specific effects, including at least a first specific effect, a second specific effect and a third specific effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is in the order of first specific effect<second specific effect<third specific effect. In other words, the second specific performance suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the first specific performance, and the third specific performance has a higher expectation of the big win than the first specific performance and the second specific performance. suggest that

An example of the first specific effect is a long reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than a normal reach effect, but a lower expectation of a big win than the SP reach effect. Specific examples of long-reach production include episode production in which episodes related to appearing characters are displayed in order in a narrative format, and mission production in which the process until a character achieves a specific mission is displayed. After the execution of the first specific effect, there may be a case of a big hit or a case of a non-big hit (lost or small win). When the result is anything other than a big hit after the execution of the first specific performance, it is not shifted to the C time saving mode. In other words, the C time saving symbol is not stop-displayed when the first specific effect ends. When the big hit is not achieved after the execution of the first specific performance, the shift to the C time saving mode is denied.

An example of the second specific effect is the SP reach effect. A specific example of the SP reach effect is a battle effect in which a process of the main character battling an enemy character is displayed. After the execution of the second specific effect, there are cases where a big hit is achieved, and where C time saving symbols are stopped and displayed. After the execution of the second specific effect, symbols other than the big hit symbols different from the C time saving symbols are not stop-displayed. Therefore, the second specific effect suggests a big hit or transition to the C time saving mode. When the second specific effect is executed, the state is shifted to the first easy-ball-entering state triggered by the big win, or the second easy-ball-entering state is changed to the second easy-ball-entering state triggered by the stopping of the C time-saving symbol. Therefore, when the second specific effect is executed, the transition to the ball-entering easy state (that is, time-saving entry) is determined.

An example of the third specific effect is a full-rotation effect, which is an effect in which a plurality of decorative symbol rows are synchronously and variably displayed in a state in which the plurality of decorative symbol rows are the same symbol. For example, the symbol combinations of the three decorative symbol rows are variably displayed as 111→222→333→444→555→ . . . The third specific performance is a performance in which a big hit is decided, and after the execution of the third specific performance, the big win is always achieved, and nothing other than a big win is possible.

When a big hit is achieved after execution of the specific effect, the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped or stopped in a big win mode upon completion of the specific effect. For example, after execution of the first specific effect, the second specific effect or the third specific effect, the plurality of decorative symbol rows become the same symbol (for example, 777) and are temporarily stopped or stopped, and the special symbol is a symbol indicating a big hit. is stopped by . When a plurality of decorative symbol rows have the same symbol, 777 determines a 10R big hit, and other than 777 (222, 666, etc.) determines a 4R big hit. In addition, when a plurality of decorative pattern rows are other than 777 (222, 666, etc.), it is not determined whether the 4R big win or the 10R big win, and there are cases where the 4R big win and the 10R big win occur. good too. The probability of winning the 10R jackpot is higher when the second specific performance is executed and the jackpot is won than when the first specific performance is executed and the jackpot is won. A plurality of decorative pattern rows are more likely to be other than 777 than 777 when the first specific performance is executed and the big win is achieved and when the second specific performance is executed and the big win is achieved. Also, the probability of winning the 10R big hit is higher when the third specific effect is executed and the big win is obtained than when the second specific effect is executed and the big win is obtained. When the third specific effect is executed and a big win is achieved, the plurality of decorative symbol rows are more likely to be 777 than other than 777. - 特許庁

A plurality of specific effects may be executed within one symbol variation period. The first specific effect and the second specific effect may be executed within one symbol variation period, and for example, the first specific effect may develop into the second specific effect. On the other hand, it may be impossible to develop from the first specific effect to the third specific effect. It may or may not be possible to develop from the second specific effect to the third specific effect. While the first specific effect cannot be directly developed into the third specific effect, it may be possible to develop the third specific effect from the first specific effect via the second specific effect. However, the second specific effect does not develop into the first specific effect, and the third specific effect does not develop into the first specific effect or the second specific effect. When the first specific production develops into the second specific production or the third specific production, the first specific production does not become a lost mode (a production mode in which the episode production is not developed to the end), and the first specific production is a jackpot mode (episode production). It does not become a production mode in which the production is developed to the end), and the first specific production is a development mode (a production mode in which the characters "Battle development!" and "Full rotation!" are displayed in the middle of the episode production). After becoming, it develops into the second specific production and the third specific production. When the second specific performance develops into the third specific performance, the second specific performance does not become a losing mode (a performance mode of losing in the battle performance), and the second specific performance is a big hit mode (a performance mode of winning the battle performance). Instead, the second specific effect develops into the development mode (the effect mode in which the movable accessory 66 emits rainbow colors in the middle of the battle effect and the screen gradually turns white), and then the third specific effect develops. .

The resurrection effect may be executed with the end of the specific effect as a trigger. The resurrection effect is a effect that becomes a big hit after making it look as if the bet has once been lost. The resurrection performance is executed, for example, after a plurality of decorative pattern rows are temporarily stopped in a losing mode, and after execution of the resurrection performance, a plurality of decorative pattern rows are stop-displayed in a jackpot mode. In the resurrection effect, for example, in a state in which a plurality of decorative pattern rows are temporarily stopped in a disengaged state, a "button effect" commanding to press the effect button 109, or a "lever effect" commanding to pull the effect lever 112. ” may be executed. In the resurrection effect, a notification effect for notifying the determination of a big hit may be executed. An example of the notification effect is a role product actuation effect in which the movable accessory 66 is activated, and for example, the role product actuation effect is executed in a rainbow lighting color.

The resurrection effect can be executed when the second specific effect ends, but may not be executed when the first specific effect or the third specific effect ends. The resurrection effect that can be executed at the end of the second specific effect is not the continuation of the battle effect, but the background display of the battle effect returns to the background display when the normal reach effect is executed, and then the movable accessory. Reference numeral 66 denotes a role product actuation effect that operates in a rainbow lighting color, and after the performance of the role product actuation effect, a plurality of decorative pattern rows become the same pattern. When the resurrection effect is executed with the end of the second specific effect as a trigger, a big hit may be determined. That is, when the resurrection effect is executed with the end of the second specific effect as a trigger, the C time saving symbol does not have to be stop-displayed. That is, when the resurrection effect is executed triggered by the end of the second specific effect, the shift to the C time saving mode may be denied. When the resurrection effect is executed after execution of the second specific effect, a failure effect indicating that the player has lost the battle may be executed before the resurrection effect is executed. When the failure performance (the above-mentioned loss mode) is executed after the execution of the second specific performance, there are cases where the resurrection performance is executed and the jackpot is achieved, and there are cases where the resurrection performance is not executed and the time is shifted to C. may When the failure performance is not executed after the execution of the second specified performance, the success performance (above-mentioned big win mode) indicating that the battle is won is executed after the execution of the second specified performance, and a big win may be achieved.

In the symbol variation period in which the second specific effect is executed, one or more advance notice effects may be executed at least one of before and during the execution of the second specific effect. The advance notice effect may be a temporary stop display in which the decorative symbols are displayed as if they were stopped in the pseudo-continuous variable effect, or a temporary stop display of the pseudo-consecutive dedicated symbols suggesting the content of the effect after the temporary stop in the temporary stop display. . The advance notice performance may be a pre-reach notice executed at a timing before reaching the reach state or a post-reach notice executed after reaching the reach state in the reach fluctuation performance accompanied by the reach state of the decorative pattern. The advance notice effects include a cut-in effect in which words and character images suggesting expectations are displayed for a relatively short period of time (about a few seconds), and a rush effect that suggests entering or developing a state of higher expectations. may be In the advance notice effect, different types of characters may be displayed according to the degree of expectation, and the display colors of characters, window frames, etc. may differ according to the degree of expectation. The advance notice effect may be a role product actuation effect in which the movable accessory 66 is activated. The advance notice effect may be a button repeated effect in which the display content and display color of the screen are changed step by step by repeatedly hitting the effect button 109 . The advance notice effect may not be executed even once, may be executed only once, or may be executed a plurality of times during the symbol variation period during which the second specific effect is executed. A step-up notice performance (or a chance-up performance) that gradually raises expectations may be executed by making it possible to execute the notice performance a plurality of times within the pattern fluctuation period in which the second specific performance is executed. . The advance notice effect that can be executed within the symbol variation period in which the second specific effect is executed may suggest the degree of expectation of whether the game will be a big hit or will shift to the C time saving mode. In other words, the probability of stopping the jackpot symbol (or the probability of stopping the C time saving symbol) may differ according to the execution mode of the advance notice effect during the symbol variation period during which the second specific effect is executed. For example, when the first character is displayed as a pre-reach notice during the pattern fluctuation period in which the second specific effect is executed, the probability that the jackpot pattern will stop is 40%, and the probability that the C time saving pattern will stop is 60%. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed as the pre-reach notice, the probability that the big hit pattern will stop is 70%, the probability that the C time saving pattern will stop is 30%, and the third character is displayed as the pre-reach notice. In that case, the probability that the jackpot pattern will stop may be 100%. In addition, even if any character is displayed as a pre-reach notice, the stop of the C time saving pattern is not confirmed.

According to this aspect, depending on which of the plurality of types of specific effects is executed, it not only suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit, but also the degree of expectation for transition to an easy-to-enter state (that is, the degree of expectation for short-time entry) ) can be suggested. When the second specific effect is executed, it can be suggested that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, and that the transition to the easy-to-ball-enter state is confirmed. In other words, when the second specific effect is executed, it can be suggested that the transition to the easy-ball-entering state triggered by a big win or the transition to the easy-ball-entering state triggered by the stoppage of the C time-saving symbol can be suggested. Therefore, even if the big hit is not achieved after the execution of the second specific effect, it can be expected to shift to the easy-to-enter state (C time-saving mode), so that the effect can be expected to develop more than before. be able to.

According to this aspect, since both the degree of expectation for a big hit and the degree of expectation for a short time rush can be suggested by the specific performance, when the performance for suggesting the expectation degree for a big hit and the performance for suggesting the expectation degree for a short time rush are prepared separately. In comparison, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production. In addition, the number of types of performances can be reduced and an excessive increase in development man-hours can be suppressed as compared with the case of separately preparing the performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit and the performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a short time rush.

As a modified example of this mode, when the second specific effect ends, the symbols other than the big hit (for example, losing) different from the C time saving symbols may be stopped. In this modification, when the second specific effect is executed, it is possible to expect a transition to the easy-to-enter state (C time-saving mode) even if the big hit is not achieved. It can be a performance that you can have.

As a modified example of this aspect, it may be possible to enter the B time reduction mode with the end of the second specific effect as a trigger. For example, when the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling in the variation start process is 1 and the pattern variation is other than a big hit, the second specific effect may be executed. In this case, after the execution of the second specific effect, special symbols other than the big win are stopped and displayed, and the ceiling reaching remaining number of times is subtracted to 0, so that the B time saving mode may be entered. In this case, after execution of the second specific effect, a branch effect is executed to prompt whether to enter the B time saving mode or C time saving mode, and after the execution of the branch effect, a notification effect to notify the transition destination is executed. good too.

(Aspect 2-2: Stage change effect)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of switching timing of the presentation mode. FIG. 55(a) shows the switching timing of the presentation mode in the normal mode. In the normal mode, the first special symbol 51 (special figure 1) is variably displayed in the low probability and low ball entry state. The normal mode has a plurality of effects, such as a first normal effect, a second normal effect and a third normal effect. Note that each of these stages may be referred to as a first normal stage, a second normal stage, and a third normal stage, and these may be collectively referred to as a "normal stage." These correspond to stages A to C described above, and a "look-ahead stage" may also be provided. A plurality of production modes can be switched with the start of pattern fluctuation as a trigger, for example, the production modes are in order such as 1st normal production → 2nd normal production → 3rd normal production → 1st normal production → ... switch to For example, when switching from the first normal production to the second normal production with the start of fluctuation of the pattern (switching 1), the first normal production is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special pattern 51, and the predetermined from the start of fluctuation After a period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the first normal effect ends, and the second normal effect starts. Similarly, when switching from the second normal production to the third normal production with the start of the fluctuation of the pattern (switching 2), the second normal production is being executed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special pattern 51, and from the start of the fluctuation After a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the second normal effect ends, and the third normal effect starts. The switching of the production mode is also called a stage change production. This stage change production may be one in which the stage is instantaneously switched without warning (for example, switching from the first normal production to the second normal production), or a production indicating the stage change (for example, "STAGE CHANGE" on the screen). The stage may be switched (for example, the first normal effect is switched to the second normal effect) through the effect in which the characters are displayed in a large size for 0.5 seconds. In each of the plurality of presentation modes, for example, the background display of the screen on which the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed is different from each other.

FIG. 55(b) shows the switching timing of the effect mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the second special symbol 52 (special figure 2) is variably displayed in the low probability and low ball entry state. Since the special mode is a low ball entry state, it is difficult for a new game ball to enter the second starting port 12 . In the special mode, the second lottery value withheld in the high ball entry state (time saving mode, latent mode or extension mode) before shifting to the special mode is consumed. The special mode continues until the reservation of the second lottery value is completely consumed, and after the reservation of the second lottery value is consumed, it ends before the variable display of the special figure 1 becomes possible. When the special figure 1 is variably displayed in a low probability and low ball entry state, the normal mode is entered.

In time saving mode, latent mode or extension mode, it becomes a production mode corresponding to each mode. The time saving mode corresponds to the chance mode described above, and the latent mode and extension mode correspond to the rush mode described above. In the final variation of the time saving mode, the latent mode or the extension mode, an end suggestion production that suggests the end of each mode is executed. The end-suggesting effect may include an effect that encourages whether or not the high-ball winning state will continue. When the time saving mode, the latent mode or the extension mode ends, an end effect for notifying the end of each mode is executed, and the mode is shifted to the special mode. The ending effect is executed before the stop display of the symbols in the final variation of each mode. After execution of the end performance, the performance mode is switched from the performance corresponding to the time saving mode, the hiding mode or the extension mode to the special performance executable only in the special mode. The start timing of the special effect is, for example, before the stop display of the symbols in the final variation of the time saving mode, the latent mode or the extension mode (switch 3). The start timing of the special effect may be after the stop display of the symbols in the final variation of the time saving mode, the latent mode or the extension mode, or during the stop display of the symbols in the final variation. That is, it may be before the start of the symbol variation in the first symbol variation in the special mode. Incidentally, the special effect may be started with the start of the symbol variation in the initial symbol variation in the special mode.

If the special mode does not result in a big hit, the special mode is a low ball entry and low probability state, and the final variation is the variation display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that is started without holding the second lottery value. end as The special performance ends in the middle of the final variation of the special mode, and the normal performance (for example, the first normal performance) is started before the stop display of the symbols in the final variation of the special mode. That is, the switching timing from the special effect to the normal effect is before the stop display of the symbols in the final variation of the special mode (switch 4). As a result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the final variation of the special mode, the special effect is not executed, and the normal effect is executed. In addition, when the final variation of the special mode results in a big hit, the special performance need not be switched to the normal performance before the symbols are stopped and displayed in the final variation of the special mode. For example, the special effect may be executed at the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped or stopped in the jackpot mode (for example, 777) in the final variation of the special mode.

According to this aspect, since the special effect is not executed after the stop display of the symbol in the final variation of the special mode, when the game is stopped when the high ball entry state (time saving mode, latent mode or extension mode) ends Even so, it is possible to prevent the display of the special effect from being continued after the game ends. If the display of the special effect continues, and it turns out that it is in the state immediately after the end of the special mode, it can be estimated that the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling, which is the condition for entering B time saving, is relatively large. . If you switch to A time-saving mode triggered by a big hit, the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode (special effect) that moves after the end of A time-saving mode is the number of ceiling times (e.g., 900 times) to the end of A time-saving mode. It is approximately equal to the value (eg, 700 times) obtained by subtracting the number of times (eg, 200 times). When transitioning to latent mode with a big hit as a trigger, the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode depends on the timing of winning the fall judgment, but the maximum number of times (for example, 900 times) is almost equal to the ceiling, or the minimum However, it is almost equal to the value (eg, 680 times) obtained by subtracting the number of times of continuation of the hiding mode (eg, 220 times) from the ceiling number of times (eg, 900 times). If you switch to the special mode (special effect) after the end of the B time-saving mode, it is impossible to re-shift to the B time-saving mode, so the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode (special effect) is virtually infinite. become large. Only when transitioning to the special mode (special effect) after the end of the C time saving mode, there is a possibility that the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling at the end of the special mode (special effect) is relatively small. Suppose that the special effect continues over at least 10 symbol changes, and the number of times notification effect to notify the player of the number of symbol changes from the end of the special game (for example, "120 rotations after the big hit!" or "387 rotations after the big hit. !”) is executed, or the number of fluctuations from the end of the special game is displayed on the data display, which is an external device connected to the game machine (data display connected to the game machine by the hall management side). In such a case, considering the number of fluctuations from the end of the special game that the player can grasp and the situation where the display of the current special effect continues, it is determined that the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling is large (that is, it is far from reaching the ceiling). Players may understand. For example, in a situation where a special effect is displayed on the 600th rotation after the end of the special game, it can be seen that the special effect has shifted to the 591st to 600th rotation. In this embodiment, when transitioning to the special effect after the 222nd spin from the end of the special game, the high probability state is maintained up to the 220th spin, and there is a variation that wins the fall determination after the 221st spin. It can be understood that there is a high possibility that it was in a high-probability state until just before the transition to the special effect, because it is a change immediately before the transition to the special effect. As a result, even if the number of times notification effect is displayed as "600 rotations after the big hit!" After the mode ends, there is a possibility that it will shift to a special mode (special effect), and there is a possibility that the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is not 891 to 900 rotations). Then, when another player tries to start a game, by understanding the possibility that the number of times of remaining reaching the ceiling is very large (it is very far to reach the ceiling) before entering the time saving B, the desire to play is increased. It may decline. According to this aspect, by preventing the display of the special effect from continuing after the game is finished, when another player tries to start the game, the game is not started until the time B is shortened. can be prevented from being able to estimate the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling.

(Aspect 2-3: Operation instruction presentation)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the first effect triggered by the operation instruction effect. The operation instruction effect displays an operation means image 610 (also referred to as a button image) imitating an input operation means for receiving an input operation from the player, such as the effect button 109 and the effect lever 112, and instructs the player to perform an input operation to the input operation means. It is a production that instructs to. FIG. 56(a) is an example of an operation instruction effect screen. In the operation instruction effect, an operation means image 610 imitating the effect button 109 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the words "Press!!" prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 are displayed. Below the operation means image 610, a timer image 612 indicating an operation valid period during which the input operation is valid is displayed. remaining time is shown. The illustrated example is an operation instruction effect executed during symbol variation, and a simple symbol 600 composed of three symbol rows is variably displayed at the bottom right of the screen.

FIG. 56(b) is an execution example of the first effect that can be executed after the execution of the operation instruction effect. It is running. 56(b) is triggered by the operation of the production button 109 in the operation instruction production of FIG. Executed when it ends. When executing the first effect, the operation means image 610 is hidden. As the first effect, an effect other than the accessory actuation effect may be executed, and any advance notice effect may be executed after the operation instruction effect is executed. A plurality of types of first effects may be prepared, and any one of the plurality of types of first effects may be executable when the operation means image 610 is hidden. It should be noted that, when the effective operation period expires without the effect button 109 being operated in the operation instruction effect, the first effect may not be executed after the operation means image 610 is hidden.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the second effect triggered by the operation instruction effect. FIG. 57(a) shows a screen example of an operation instruction rendering, which is the same as the above-described FIG. 56(a). FIGS. 57(b) and (c) show an execution example of the second effect that can be executed after the operation instruction effect is executed. The second effect is executed while the operating means image 620 is displayed, unlike the first effect. The second production has a production process in which the production button 109 does not work well and is in a broken state. It should be noted that the effect button 109 is not actually out of order during the second effect, but the effect is expressed as if the effect button 109 is out of order. The operation means image 620 for the second effect has a display mode different from that of the normal operation means image 610 for the operation instruction effect. The operation means image 620 for the second effect is, for example, a display mode in which the effect button 109 has been melted and deformed by high heat, a display mode in which the effect button 109 has been cracked due to an impact, and a normal display mode. has a display mode in which noise is added to the operation means image 610 of , and the display is disturbed. The display mode of the operation means image 620 in the second effect is dedicated to the second effect, and is not used during execution of the operation instruction effect. The display position of the operation means image 620 for the second effect is the same as the display position of the normal operation means image 610 .

Since the second effect suggests a failure of the effect button 109, it is not triggered by the operation of the effect button 109, but is executed when the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears and the effective period of operation ends. be done. Therefore, even if the effect button 109 is operated before the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears, no advance notice effect is executed. After the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears, the operation means image 620 continues to be displayed, but the timer image 612 is not displayed. During execution of the second effect, a message suggesting a failure of the effect button 109, such as "Huh? Broken?", may be displayed. During the execution of the second effect, a message may be displayed that suggests that something will occur due to the failure of the effect button 109, such as "maybe...".

FIG. 57(d) shows an example of the screen after the second effect is finished, and shows an example of the ready-to-win effect in which the left and right pattern rows of the decorative pattern 602 become the same pattern and become a ready-to-win mode. In the illustrated example, it is suggested that the execution of the second effect results in reach. The ready-to-win effect executed after the end of the second effect may be an SP ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big win. Note that an arbitrary advance notice effect may be executed instead of the reach occurring after the second effect ends. The second effect may be a pre-suggestion effect that pre-suggests the occurrence of some kind of advance notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit. Since the expectation of a big hit is higher in the second effect than in the first effect, it may not reach the reach after the end of the first effect (or the possibility of reaching the reach is low), but after the end of the second effect, it will definitely It may be reachable (or more likely to be reachable). After the end of the first performance, the possibility of execution of the advance notice performance with high expectation of big win may be reduced, and after the end of the second performance, the possibility of execution of advance notice performance with high expectation of big win may be increased. .

A plurality of types of second effects may be prepared, and the display mode of the operation means image 620 and the execution time from the start to end of the second effects may differ depending on the type of the second effects. Further, depending on the difference in display mode and execution time of the operation means image 620 in the second effect, the degree of expectation of the advance notice effect to be executed after the second effect is finished may differ, and a big hit will be achieved after the second effect is finished. Expectations may differ. For example, when the change in the display mode of the operation means image 620 is large, or when the execution time of the second effect is long, the degree of expectation for a big win may be increased. Furthermore, the normal operation means image 610 that is not malfunctioning may be displayed again when the second effect ends, and the advance notice effect may be always executed when the effect button 109 is operated. That is, when the normal operation means image 610 is displayed again with the end of the second effect as a trigger, the second effect may not be re-executable. In this case, the longer the execution time of the second effect, the higher the possibility that the operation means image 610 will be displayed in a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit after the second effect is finished. Note that the operation means image 610 is not displayed again after the first effect is finished (or the probability of being displayed again is low), and the operation means image 610 is displayed again after the execution of the second effect is finished (or is displayed again). (the probability that it will be

Before the execution of the operation instruction effect of FIG. 56(a) or FIG. 57(a), a button generation suggestion effect (also called a button appearance encouragement effect) suggesting that the operation instruction effect will occur may be executed. The button generation suggesting effect when the first effect is executed may be the same as the button generation suggesting effect when the second effect is executed. That is, it may not be possible to distinguish whether the first effect or the second effect is executed depending on the execution mode of the button generation suggestive effect. On the other hand, when the normal operating means image 610 is displayed again after the second effect is finished, the button generation suggestive effect in an execution mode different from the button generation suggestive effect that triggers the start of the second effect is executed after the second effect is finished. You may As for the mode of execution of the button suggestion effect executed after the second effect is finished, it may be possible to distinguish between the execution of the first effect and the impossibility of execution of the second effect. 56(a) or 57(a), the button generation suggestion effect is not executed, and after the second effect is completed, the operation means image 610 is displayed again. An occurrence suggestion effect may be executed.

There may be a plurality of types of display modes of the operation means image 610 at the start of the operation instruction rendering when the first rendering is executed. For example, as the initial display mode of the operation means image 610, for example, in addition to the normal color, a display mode with a high expectation of a big win such as red or a giraffe pattern, or a display mode such as rainbow color suggesting that a big win is confirmed is used. may be On the other hand, the initial display mode of the operation means image 610 when the second effect is executed may be less than when the first effect is executed. For example, the initial display mode of the operation means image 610 when the second effect is executed may be only the normal color. In addition, when the operation means image 610 is displayed again after the second effect is finished, the display mode of the operation means image 610 that is displayed again is higher than the display mode of the operation means image 610 that is displayed at the start of the second effect. The possibility of a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit may be high.

According to this aspect, not only the case where the production button 109 operates normally and the first production is executed after the execution of the operation instruction production, but also the second production where the production button 109 does not operate normally and breaks down. A performance may be performed. By enabling execution of such a second effect, it is possible to realize an effect with a sense of incongruity that the effect button 109 is not reacted even if the effect button 109 is operated, and the interest of the effect can be enhanced.

According to this mode, the initial display mode of the operating means image 610 displayed in the operation instruction rendering is the same (for example, normal color) regardless of whether the first rendering or the second rendering is executed. Therefore, even when the production button 109 in normal color is displayed, it is possible to make the production expected for the development destination.

(Aspect 2-4: Suggestion of Remaining Ceiling Reaching Times)
Triggered by satisfaction of a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a special effect that suggests the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling, which is a condition for entering B time saving. The special effect does not directly indicate a specific numerical value of the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling, but suggests which of a plurality of ranges the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling corresponds to. If the number of remaining ceiling reaching times is in a first range (for example, 301 times or more), the first special effect can be executed. 2 special effects can be executed, and the third special effect can be executed in a third range different from the first range and the second range (for example, 101 times or more and 200 times or less). Also, if the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling is in a fourth range (for example, from 1 time to 100 times), the fourth special effect can be executed. It should be noted that it may be suggested that a specific range is applicable by not executing a special effect when it corresponds to any one of a plurality of ranges. For example, when the number of remaining ceiling reaching times falls within the fourth range (for example, 1 to 100 times), the fourth range may be suggested by not executing the special effect.

A special effect may be executable only in a specific game state. A special effect may be executed only in a low probability and low ball entry state, for example, may be executed only in a normal mode. A special effect may be executed in a specific time saving mode, for example, may be executed in a C time saving mode. On the other hand, the special effect does not have to be executed in the A time saving mode or the B time saving mode. A special effect may not be executed in a high probability state, for example, it may not be executed in a latent mode or an extension mode.

The special effect is executed when the special symbols start to change. When the special performance is executed with the start of pattern fluctuation, the special performance is executed so as to end the special performance before the fluctuation of the pattern is stopped. The execution time from the start to the end of the special performance is set to be within the shortest variation time of the variation patterns selectable in the game state in which the special performance can be executed. The execution time from the start to the end of the special effect is, for example, 2 seconds or 3 seconds.

The special effect may be an effect displayed on the effect display device 60. - 特許庁For example, the start of pattern variation may be used as a trigger to make a character dedicated to a special effect appear. In this case, it may be suggested which of the plurality of ranges the number of remaining ceiling reach times corresponds to, depending on the type of character or the difference in display color. For example, when a blue character appears, it falls under the first range, when a green character appears, it falls under the second range, and when a red character appears, it falls under the third range. good too. The special effect may be a sound effect output from the speaker 108, or the decoration lamp 111 may be colored in a specific color (blue if it falls within the first range, green if it falls under the second range, and green if it falls under the third range). If applicable, it may be a lamp effect that flashes in red).

A special effect may be executed over a plurality of consecutive symbol variations. For example, a plurality of special effects corresponding to each of a plurality of consecutive symbol variations may be executed. Specifically, the first special effect is executed when the pattern starts to fluctuate, the second special effect is executed when the next pattern starts to fluctuate, and the next pattern fluctuates. A second special effect may be executed. When a plurality of special performances are executed corresponding to a plurality of consecutive symbol variations, the execution mode of the special performances may be the same for the plurality of times, and the pattern variation for which the first special performance is performed may be the same. The mode of execution of the special effect may be determined based on the number of remaining ceiling reaching times at the start. In addition, when the execution mode of the special effect is determined based on the number of times the ceiling reaches the ceiling at the start of the pattern variation in which the special effect is executed each time, multiple times that are executed corresponding to the consecutive multiple symbol variations , the execution mode of the special effect may be changed on the way. For example, when the first special effect is executed, the number of times the ceiling is reached is 201 times; When the remaining number of arrivals is 199, the second special effect (for example, a green character) may be executed for the first time, and the third special effect (for example, a red character) may be executed for the second and third times. As the special effects, a fifth special effect and a sixth special effect having a role of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit may be prepared. For example, when the fifth special effect (for example, a golden character) is executed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the symbol variation in which the fifth special effect is executed is high, and the sixth special effect (for example, a rainbow-colored character). is executed, it may be suggested that the symbol variation in which the sixth special effect is executed is a big hit.

If multiple special effects are executed in response to multiple consecutive symbol changes, the time interval from the end of the special effect to the start of the next special effect is the pattern in which the special effect is executed. It may differ depending on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation. For example, the variation time of the symbol variation when the first special effect is executed is 10 seconds, the variation time of the symbol variation when the second special effect is executed is 30 seconds, and the execution time of the special effect is 2 seconds. , the time interval from the end of the first special effect to the start of the second special effect is about 8 seconds, and the time interval from the end of the second special effect to the start of the third special effect is about 28 seconds.

The special effect may be executed when the number of symbol variations reaches a specific number (for example, 30 times) after the RAM clearing process, after the power-off recovery process, or after the standby demo screen is displayed. For example, a counter for special effects is initialized and a specific number of times is set in response to RAM clear processing, power failure recovery processing, or display of a standby demo screen, and 1 is subtracted from the counter for special effects in response to the stoppage of pattern fluctuations. may When the special effect counter reaches 0, the special effect may be executed with the start of the next pattern variation. The counter for the special effect may be decremented only in the game state in which the special effect can be executed, and may not be decremented in the game state in which the special effect cannot be executed. The special effect counter may be decrementable even in a game state in which the special effect cannot be executed.

The special effect counter may be initialized when the special effect is executed. For example, when a special effect is executed in the normal mode and after that the number of symbol variations in the normal mode reaches a specific number (for example, 30 times), the special effect may be executed again. The special effect may be executed each time the number of symbol variations reaches a specific number (for example, every 30 times) in a game state in which the special effect can be executed.

The standby demo screen is a screen display indicating that the player is waiting for a game, and is displayed for a predetermined time in a state where the symbols are stopped in the normal game and neither the first lottery value nor the second lottery value is held. (For example, after 120 seconds) is displayed. The standby demo screen may be displayed when game balls are not fired for a certain period of time in the normal mode. The standby demo screen does not have to be displayed in modes other than the normal mode. For example, in a high ball entry state such as the C time-saving mode, the standby demo screen may not be displayed even if the game ball has not been shot for a certain period of time.

According to this aspect, since the special performance is executed when the number of pattern variations in the normal mode reaches at least a specific number, by continuing the game in the normal mode, it is possible to know the standard of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling. can be done. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the advantage of continuing the game. On the other hand, when the game ends in the normal mode, the standby demo screen is displayed, and the display of the standby demo screen is used as a trigger to initialize the counter for the special effect. , the execution of the special effect is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has not continued the game in the normal mode from easily knowing the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached. For example, it is possible to prevent hyena behavior such as searching for an advantageous game machine and starting a game while confirming the number of remaining ceiling reaching times.

(Aspect 2-5: Opening effect in latent mode)
When a transition is made to the hiding mode after the end of the special game, a special effect (also referred to as an opening effect) that can be continued over a special period from the start of the hiding mode until at least a predetermined time elapses is executed. The opening effect is executed over a symbol variation period within a specified number of times (for example, 20 times) from the start of the latent mode. When a big win is achieved within a specified number of times (for example, 20 times) from the start of the latent mode, the opening effect is finished with the big win. At the end of the opening production, a branching production is executed to incite whether the game will be a big hit or the hiding mode will continue to enter the RUSH zone. In the case of a big win, a role product actuation effect for notifying the determination of the big win is executed in the branch performance, and thereafter, a variable performance (for example, a full rotation performance) is executed in a state where the big win is determined. If a big win is not achieved within a specified number of times (for example, 20 times) from the start of the latent mode, the opening effect is completed with a specified number of times (for example, 20th time) of pattern variations. When the jackpot is not achieved within the special period, the branch performance is executed at the end of the opening performance, and entry into the RUSH zone is announced. In the effect of notifying entry into the RUSH zone, the number of continuations of the RUSH zone (100 times or 200 times) may be notified or suggested.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the execution process of the opening effect. FIG. 58 shows a case where the maximum number of symbol variations (ie, specific number of times) in which the opening effect can continue is 20 times. FIG. 58(a) shows the execution process in the case where everything from the initial variation in which the opening effect is performed to the final variation is missed. In the case of deviation fluctuations, the fluctuation times of the first fluctuation and the final fluctuation are relatively long, and the fluctuation times of the intermediate fluctuations (2nd to 19th fluctuations) excluding the first and final fluctuations are relatively short. For example, the variation time of the initial variation that becomes a failure is 10 seconds, the variation time of the intermediate variation that becomes a failure is 2.5 seconds, the variation time of the final variation that becomes a failure is 25 seconds, and the start of the initial variation to the end of the final variation is 80 seconds. In the opening performance, the dedicated moving image used only in the opening performance is continuously reproduced by using the elapsed time of 80 seconds when there is a deviation from the initial variation to the final variation. The content of the dedicated video includes, for example, an outline explanation and premise explanation of effects that can occur in the RUSH zone. Playback of the dedicated video is started when the initial variation starts, and ends before the branch effect occurs in the final variation.

In the opening effect, a notice effect can be executed at a plurality of timings, and a step-up notice (or chance-up effect) can be executed by executing the notice effect a plurality of times. The execution timing and the execution contents of the advance notice effect for a plurality of times are synchronized with the reproduction contents of the dedicated moving image. The execution timing of the announcement effect for a plurality of times is determined by the reproduction time of the dedicated moving image. For example, notice 1 can be executed 30 seconds after the start of playback of the dedicated video, notice 2 can be executed 38 seconds after the start of playback of the dedicated video, and notice 3 can be executed 48 seconds after the start of playback of the dedicated video. , and the notice 4 can be executed 55 seconds after the start of playback of the dedicated moving image. In advance notice 1, a notice effect is executed in which the characters of the title display change from the normal color to the high-expectation color such as green or red in accordance with the title display of the opening effect included in the dedicated moving image. In advance notice 2, the advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation is executed according to the type of character that appears in the cut-in of the dedicated animation. In advance notice 3, the advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation is executed depending on the presence or absence of a cut-in such as "After this, the impact develops!". In advance notice 4, an advance notice effect is executed that suggests the degree of expectation depending on the content of the narration lines included in the dedicated moving image and the type of character in charge of the narration. In the event that all of the changes from the initial variation in which the opening production is executed to the final variation are missed, notice 1 is executed during the 9th pattern change, notice 2 is executed during the 12th pattern change, and during the 16th pattern change. The notice 3 is executed during the 19th symbol change, and the notice 4 is executed during the 19th symbol change. Depending on the types of these advance notices 1 to 4, the degree of expectation is suggested that the notification effect of informing the determination of the big win is executed after the execution of the branch effect, and then the full rotation effect is executed. The greater the number of performance contents with a high degree of expectation in advance notices 1 to 4, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit afterward.

FIG. 58(b) shows the execution process in the case of a big win in the final variation in which the opening effect is executed. The 1st to 19th symbol variations except for the final variation are all lost, and the execution process is the same as in (a). When the final variation results in a big hit, the branch performance is executed after the end of the dedicated moving image reproduction period, the notification performance for notifying the determination of the big win is executed after the execution of the branch performance, and then the full rotation performance is executed. In order to secure the execution time of the full rotation effect, the variation time of the final variation that becomes a big hit is longer than the variation time of the final variation that becomes a loss. The variation time of the final variation that results in a big hit is, for example, 85 seconds, which is 60 seconds longer than the variation time (25 seconds) of the final variation that results in a loss. Using the time of 60 seconds as the difference, the notification performance, the full rotation performance, and the jackpot performance at the time of symbol stop are executed.

FIG. 58(c) shows the execution process in the case of a big win in the intermediate variation in which the opening effect is executed, and shows the case of a big win in the 14th symbol variation. In other words, the 1st to 13th symbol variations before the big hit are all lost, and the 14th symbol variation results in a big hit. The execution process of the opening effect in the case of a big win in the intermediate variation is the same as the execution process in the case of a big win in the final variation of (b). In other words, the branch effect is executed after the end of the exclusive moving image reproduction period, the notification effect for notifying the determination of the big win is executed after the branch effect is executed, and then the full rotation effect is executed.

The symbol stop timing in the case of a big hit in the middle fluctuation is the same as the symbol stop timing in the case of a big hit in the final fluctuation. The variation time of the intermediate variation that becomes the jackpot is equal to the variation time of the final variation that becomes the jackpot plus the variation time of the intermediate variation that becomes the lag. Let P (85 seconds) be the final fluctuation time for a big hit, Q (2.5 seconds) be the fluctuation time for intermediate fluctuations that result in a loss, and N (20 times) be the maximum number of pattern fluctuations in the opening performance, When the number of fluctuations from the first time to the intermediate fluctuations leading to the big hit is K (14 times), the fluctuation time P _K of the intermediate fluctuation leading to the big win is P _K =P+Q(N−K). In the case of K=14 times, the variation time of the 14th symbol variation that becomes a big hit is 85+2.5×6=100 seconds.

The execution timing of the advance notice performance in the case of a big win in the middle fluctuation is the same as in the case of a failure until the final fluctuation or in the case of a big win in the final fluctuation. Starting from the start of playback of the dedicated moving image, the notice 1 is executed after 30 seconds, the notice 2 after 38 seconds, the notice 3 after 48 seconds, and the notice 4 after 55 seconds. As a result, the notice 1 can be executed at the ninth symbol variation that results in a loss, and the notice 2 can be executed at the 12th symbol variation that results in a loss, while the notices 3 and 4 are a big hit. It becomes executable at the 14th symbol variation. Therefore, the mode of execution of notice 3 and notice 4 can be determined by utilizing the fact that the change (14th symbol change) at the time of execution of notice 3 and notice 4 becomes a big win. In other words, the selection probability of the effect lottery of the notice 3 and the notice 4 is set so that the production content with high expectations is more likely to be selected in the notice 3 and the notice 4 than in the case of the lost change (for example, the change until the final change). Can be set. Further, in advance notice 2, if the lottery value corresponding to the 14th pattern change is reserved at the start of the 12th pattern change, the execution mode of the notice performance can be determined by prefetching. In other words, the selection probability of the performance lottery of the notice 2 can be set so that the contents of the performance with high expectations are more likely to be selected in the notice 2 than in the case of the loss variation (for example, the loss variation until the final variation).

FIG. 58(d) shows the execution process in the case of a big win in the intermediate variation in which the opening effect is executed, and shows the case of a big win in the third symbol variation. That is, the first and second symbol variations before the big win are lost, and the third symbol variation results in a big win. The execution process of the opening performance when the third symbol change results in a big hit is the same as the execution process of (b) and (c). The variation time of the third symbol variation that becomes a big hit is 85+2.5×17=127.5 seconds. The execution timing of the advance notice performance when the third symbol variation results in a big hit is the same as when the final variation fails or when the final variation results in a big win. As a result, all the notice effects (notice 1 to notice 4) can be executed by the third pattern variation that becomes a big hit, and the execution mode of the notice 1 to notice 4 is changed using the fact that the change becomes a big hit. can decide. In other words, it is possible to set the selection probability of the production lottery for the announcements 1 to 4 so that the production contents with high expectations are more likely to be selected in the announcements 1 to 4 than in the case of the loss fluctuation (for example, the loss fluctuation until the final fluctuation). .

FIG. 58(e) shows the execution process in the case of a big win in the first time variation in which the opening effect is executed. The execution process in the case of a big win in the first variation is the same as the execution process of (b) to (d). The variation time of the first variation that will be a big hit is the sum of the variation time of the first variation that will be lost (10 seconds) and the variation time of the intermediate variation that will be lost from the 2nd to 19th times (2.5 x 18 = 45 seconds) and the variation time (85 seconds) of the final variation for the big hit (140 seconds). That is, the variation time of the first variation that becomes a big hit is equal to the elapsed time of the special period. The execution timing of the advance notice performance when the first symbol variation results in a big hit is the same as when the last variation results in a failure or when the final variation results in a big win. As a result, all the notice performances (notice 1 to notice 4) can be executed by the first-time variation of the big win, and the execution mode of the notice 1 to the notice 4 can be determined by utilizing the fact that the change becomes the big win. In other words, it is possible to set the selection probability of the production lottery for the announcements 1 to 4 so that the production contents with high expectations are more likely to be selected in the announcements 1 to 4 than in the case of the loss fluctuation (for example, the loss fluctuation until the final fluctuation). .

At the execution timing of the advance notice effect in the opening effect, the control CPU 320 transmits a command to notify the sub CPU 310 of the execution timing of the notice effect. The control CPU 320 transmits a command to the sub CPU 310 at the timing when the reproduction time of the moving image reaches a predetermined time starting from the reproduction start timing of the dedicated moving image. For example, when the dedicated moving image is reproduced for 30 seconds, the control CPU 320 transmits to the sub CPU 310 a command notifying that it is time to execute the notice 1 . Similarly, when the dedicated video is played for 38 seconds, a command notifying that it is time to execute notice 2 is transmitted, and when the dedicated video is played for 48 seconds, a command is sent to notify that it is time to execute notice 3, After 55 seconds of playback, a command notifying that it is time to execute the notice 4 is transmitted. The sub CPU 310 (effect determination means 303) determines the execution mode of the notice effect based on the variation or pending lottery value when the command is received from the control CPU 320, and controls the command to notify the execution mode of the notice effect. Send to the CPU 320 . The control CPU 320 (effect control device 313 ) causes the effect display device 60 to display the advance notice effect specified by the command received from the sub CPU 310 .

A special variation pattern selection state for fixing the variation time is used in the pattern variation from the first time when the opening effect is executed to the specified number of times. As an example, 20 kinds of variation pattern selection states corresponding to the maximum number of symbol variations that the opening effect can continue are prepared, and the variation pattern selection states are switched in order for each symbol variation. In the variation pattern selection state for the first time, the loss variation pattern of 10 seconds is selected in case of losing, and the big hit variation pattern of 140 seconds is selected in case of big win. In the variation pattern selection state for the second time, a loss variation pattern of 2.5 seconds is selected in the case of a loss, and a jackpot variation pattern of 130 seconds is selected in the case of a big win. In the variation pattern selection state for the third time, a loss variation pattern of 2.5 seconds is selected in the case of a loss, and a jackpot variation pattern of 127.5 seconds is selected in the case of a big win. In the variation pattern selection state for the fourth time, a loss variation pattern of 2.5 seconds is selected in the case of a loss, and a jackpot variation pattern of 125 seconds is selected in the case of a big win. To generalize, in the K-th variation pattern selection state excluding the first and last, a 2.5-second loss variation pattern is selected in the case of a loss, and 130-(K-2)×2 in the case of a big hit. A 0.5 second jackpot variation pattern is selected. In the final variation pattern selection state, a losing variation pattern of 25 seconds is selected in the case of a loss, and a big win variation pattern of 85 seconds is selected in the case of a big win. Therefore, the variation time of the big hit variation pattern selected in the symbol variations from the first time to the specific number of times in the special period decreases as the number of symbol variations increases. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern selected in the pattern fluctuation of the specified number of times from the first time in the latent mode is common (2.5 seconds) in the intermediate fluctuations excluding the first time and the last.

During the special period, a display that counts down the number of symbol variations may be displayed along with the reproduction of the dedicated moving image. For example, for the first fluctuation, "19 more times" is displayed, for the second fluctuation, "18 more times" is displayed, for the 19th fluctuation, "1 more time" is displayed, and for the final fluctuation, "1 more times" is displayed. 0 times” is displayed. In addition, in the final change, the countdown display may be hidden after the display of "zero more times". In addition, the countdown display may be hidden with the start of the final variation as a trigger, and in this case, the display of "zero times left" may not be displayed.

During the special period, a simple pattern 600 is displayed to indicate the change and stop of the pattern along with the reproduction of the dedicated moving image. The simple design 600 is also called "simple decorative design", "sub decorative design", "sub design", "mini decorative design" or "mini design". The simple symbol 600 is variably displayed when the special symbol starts to variate, and is stop-displayed in accordance with the stop-display of the special symbol. In the case of a big hit in the 1st to 19th times excluding the final variation, even if the temporary stop display and re-variation display of the simple symbol 600 are performed in accordance with the symbol stop and variation start timing when all up to the final variation are lost. good. For example, in the case of a big hit at the first time, the simple pattern 600 is temporarily stopped at the same timing as the pattern stop timing of the first fluctuation which is a loss, and the simple pattern 600 is changed again at the same timing as the second fluctuation start timing which is a loss. After that, the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the simple symbol 600 are repeated. In the case of a big win at the first time, the simple pattern 600 is temporarily stopped and changed again 19 times, then the branching effect, the notification effect and the full rotation effect are executed, and then the simple pattern 600 is stop-displayed in the big win mode. be. When the K-th intermediate variation results in a big hit, the next variation display is started after the stop display of the simple symbol 600 in the losing variation from the first to K-1 times, and the simple symbol 600 is temporarily stopped in the K-th big winning variation. It will be displayed again after changing. In the K-th big hit variation, temporary stop and re-variation of the simple symbol 600 are executed NK-1 times. As a result, the pseudo-continuous variation display is executed to make it appear as if the simple pattern 600 is stopped and varied at the same timing as when all the variations up to the final variation are lost. By displaying the simple pattern 600 in a pseudo-continuous variation, even when the big win is achieved in the 19th pattern variation from the first time, it can be shown as if the 20th pattern variation causes a big win. can be done. In addition, by temporarily stopping and displaying the simple symbol 600 during the reproduction of the dedicated moving image, it is possible to indicate that the big hit is confirmed. In addition, during the special period, the decorative pattern 602 is not displayed except for the variation of the big hit, and is displayed only during the full-rotation effect in the variation of the big win. In addition, during a period other than the special period (a period other than the period in the normal mode and the period other than the special period in the special mode), the decorative pattern 602 is displayed regardless of whether it is a big hit fluctuation or a losing fluctuation, and the simple pattern 600 is always displayed. However, even if the decorative symbol 602 is temporarily stopped (pseudo-continuous variation), the simple symbol 600 is not temporarily stopped unlike the special period.

According to this aspect, even if the number of times of symbol variation executed during the special period during which the opening effect is executed is any of 1 to N times (for example, 20 times), if a big win is achieved during the special period. , the stop display timings of the big hit symbols are the same. That is, when the special period ends, the symbol that will be the big hit is stopped and displayed. As a result, even if a big hit occurs in any pattern variation from 1 time to N times, a common performance time can be secured, and a special performance including reproduction of a dedicated video is executed within the common performance time. can.

According to this aspect, since the symbol variation can be executed up to N times (for example, 20 times) within the special period, compared to the case where the special period is composed of only one symbol variation with a fixed variation time. , it is possible to increase the probability of a big hit occurring during the special period. As a result, it is possible to create a peculiar state in which a big hit is likely to occur at the end of the special period, and it is possible to raise expectations for the opening performance.

If the variation pattern selection state is switched for each symbol variation, it is necessary to prepare 20 types of variation pattern selection states and 20 types of jackpot variation patterns. This causes the limited storage capacity of the main ROM 292 to become tight. Therefore, instead of switching the variation pattern selection state for each pattern variation, the variation pattern selection state may be switched for each pattern variation of a plurality of times. For example, in the intermediate variation of 2 times to 19 times, the variation pattern selection state may be switched every 3 times of symbol variation. In this case, the first variation pattern selection state for the first time, the second variation pattern selection state for the 2nd to 4th times, the 3rd variation pattern selection state for the 5th to 7th times, and the 8th to 10th times The 4th variation pattern selection state, the 5th variation pattern selection state for the 11th to 13th times, the 6th variation pattern selection state for the 14th to 16th times, and the 7th variation pattern for the 17th to 19th times A selection state and a final eighth variation pattern selection state are prepared. As a result, the number of types of variation pattern selection states can be reduced from 20 to 8. In addition, since it is sufficient to prepare a big hit variation pattern for each variation pattern selection state, the number of types of big hit variation patterns can be reduced from 20 to 8. However, by aggregating the number of types of big hit variation patterns for each multiple pattern variation and sharing the variation time, the pattern that will be a big hit depending on which variation from the first to the specific number of times will result in a big hit. A deviation may occur in the timing of the stop.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the opening effect, and shows an example of a case where the timing of stopping the symbols that result in the big win is slightly shifted according to the number of variations from the first time to the symbol variation that results in the big win. . FIG. 59(a) shows a case where the final variation results in a big hit, which is the same as the execution process of FIG. 58(b). FIGS. 59(b) to (d) show the case where the symbol variation in which the second variation pattern selection state for the second to fourth times is selected results in a big hit. FIG. 59(b) shows a case where the second symbol variation results in a big win, FIG. 59(c) shows a case where the third symbol variation results in a big win, and FIG. It is a case where it becomes a big hit due to the pattern variation. When a big hit is achieved in any one of the second to fourth symbol variations, the common big hit variation pattern is selected based on the common second variation pattern selection state, so that the variation time is the same. In other words, the variation time of the jackpot variation pattern for the second big win, the variation time for the jackpot variation pattern for the third jackpot, and the variation time for the jackpot variation pattern for the fourth jackpot. are all the same.

In the example of FIG. 59, the variation time is determined based on the execution process when the third symbol variation results in a big hit, and the variation time is set to 127.5 seconds when the third symbol variation results in a big hit in FIG. 58(d). Uses variable time. As a result, the timing at which the big-hit symbols stop when the third big win is achieved in FIG. 59(c) is the same as the timing at which the big-hit symbols stop when the big win is achieved in the final variation shown in FIG. 59(a). . On the other hand, the timing at which the big-hit symbols stop when the second big win is achieved in FIG. 59(b) is time t1 after the timing at which the big-hit symbols stop when the big win is achieved in the final variation shown in FIG. 59(a). get faster. The delay time t1 of the symbol stop timing corresponds to the fluctuation time (2.5 seconds) of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a failure. This is because in the case of FIG. 59(b), the number of intermediate fluctuations resulting in a failure is one less than in the case of FIG. 59(c). Conversely, the timing at which the jackpot symbols stop when the fourth jackpot is achieved in FIG. 59(d) is time t2 than the timing at which the jackpot symbols stop when the jackpot is achieved in the final variation shown in FIG. 59(a). only slower. The shift time t2 of the symbol stop timing corresponds to the fluctuation time (2.5 seconds) of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a shift. This is because in the case of FIG. 59(d), the number of intermediate fluctuations resulting in a failure is one more than in the case of FIG. 59(c).

It should be noted that the same applies to the case where the 5th to 19th hits result in a big hit. For example, when the big win is achieved in the 6th, 9th, 12th, 15th and 18th symbol variations that are multiples of 3, the timing of stopping the big winning symbols is the timing at which the big winning symbols are stopped in the final variation. Same as timing. On the other hand, when the 5th, 8th, 11th, 14th, and 17th symbol variations obtained by subtracting 1 from the multiple of 3 result in a big hit, the timing at which the big hit pattern stops is determined by the pattern that becomes a big hit in the final variation. It is earlier than the timing of stopping by time t1. Conversely, when the jackpot is achieved in the 7th, 10th, 13th, 16th, and 19th symbol variations obtained by adding 1 to the multiple of 3, the timing at which the jackpot symbols stop is the pattern that becomes the big hit in the final variation. is delayed by time t2 from the timing at which the is stopped.

In the example of FIG. 59, the stop timing of the winning symbols varies depending on which symbol variation from the first time to the specified number of times results in the winning, but the deviation time can be suppressed to ±2.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to make the stop timings of the big hit symbols substantially the same. As a result, substantially common performance time can be secured for the opening performance, and the tightness of the memory capacity of the main ROM 292 can be prevented by suppressing the variation pattern selection state and the number of types of jackpot variation patterns. .

In the special period, since the dedicated moving image is reproduced, there is no effect selected by the lottery executed when the fluctuation starts, or the number of types of selectable effects by the lottery is relatively small. On the other hand, outside of the special period, instead of playing the dedicated video, the variation effect according to the pattern variation pattern is executed. The number of possible production types is relatively large.

In the special period, even if the big hit is achieved in any of the multiple symbol variations that can be executed from the start to the end of the special period, the execution timing of the big hit production based on the start of the special period is the same, or substantially are essentially identical. When they are substantially the same, the difference in execution timing of the jackpot effect may be the same as the shortest symbol variation time selectable in the special period. Here, the big hit effect may be a notification effect that is executed immediately after the branch effect, or may be a full rotation effect that is executed after the notification effect, or the decorative pattern is a big hit mode (for example, 777). It may be an effect of temporary stop display at .

The number of types of variation pattern selection states selected in the special period may be the same as the maximum number of symbol variations that can be executed in the special period, or may be less than the maximum number of times, or less than half the maximum number of times. may The number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the special period may be less than the maximum number of symbol variations that can be executed in the special period, or may be half or less of the maximum number of times.

In the special period, a special effect (for example, reproduction of a dedicated moving image) can be executed regardless of the timing of the pattern fluctuation start and stop display. During the execution of the special performance, one or more advance notice effects can be executed, and a plurality of times of advance notice effects can be executed. A chance-up effect may be executed by executing the advance notice effect a plurality of times.

During the special period, the special effect may proceed regardless of the presence or absence of pattern variations. In other words, during the special period, the lottery value related to the symbol variation is not reserved, and even if the next symbol variation is not started while the symbol variation is stopped, the special effect continues. Playback may continue. The advance notice effect that can be executed during execution of the special effect may be executed at timing according to the progress of the special effect. In other words, the notice effect may be executed regardless of the cumulative number of pattern fluctuations or whether there is a pattern fluctuation, the lottery value related to the pattern fluctuation is not reserved, and the next pattern fluctuation is started while the pattern fluctuation is stopped. Even if it is not performed, an advance notice effect may occur. When the special effect ends before the end of the final variation in the special period, the image displayed at the end timing of the special effect may be continuously displayed until the end of the final variation.

In the special period, when there is no pattern change, the progress of the special performance may be temporarily stopped. In the special period, if the lottery value related to the pattern fluctuation is not reserved and the next pattern fluctuation is not started while the pattern fluctuation is stopped, the progress of the special effect is paused, for example, the playback of the dedicated video is paused. may A special effect may have a plurality of pauseable timings. If there is no pattern change at any of the multiple pause possible timings, the special effect will continue to progress until any of the pause possible timings, and the special effects will be performed at any of the pause possible timings. You can pause progress. During the temporary stop of the special effect, a warning display to the effect that a game operation should be performed may be made, for example, a right-handed warning display may be made superimposed on the temporary stop screen of the dedicated moving image. The warning display may be started at approximately the same timing as the pause of the dedicated video, or after a predetermined time has passed since the pause of the dedicated video (for example, even after the dedicated video is paused, the pattern variation does not start 5 seconds after ). If the pattern change starts during the pause of the special effect, the right-handed warning display will be hidden, the temporary stop of the special effect will be canceled, and the progress of the special effect may be resumed from any of the pause timings. . The advance notice effect that can be executed during the execution of the special effect may be executed at the timing according to the progress of the special effect, or at the timing according to the cumulative number of symbol variations.

As a modification of this mode, when a big win is achieved in the first variation of the special period, a big win effect different from the special effect may be executed. When a big hit is made in the first fluctuation of the special period and a big hit production different from the special production is executed, the stop timing of the big hit pattern is different from the stop timing of the big hit pattern in the final fluctuation of the special period. may For example, when the number of symbol variations to be executed during the special period is from M times (M is 2 or more and less than N) to N times, the symbols that become a big hit may be stopped and displayed at the end of the special period. On the other hand, when the number of symbol variations executed during the special period is less than M times, the special performance may not be executed, and the big winning symbol may be stopped and displayed before the end of the special period. In addition, if it is not this modification, when the number of symbol variations executed during the special period is from M times (M is 1 or more and less than N) to N times, the symbol that becomes a big hit is stopped at the end of the special period. may be displayed.

(Aspect 2-6: Special color rendering)
As pattern variation performances in which decorative patterns are variably displayed, there are a first performance in which normal color performance is displayed on the performance display device 60 and a second performance in which special color performance different from the normal color is displayed on the performance display device 60. - 特許庁is feasible. The second effect has the same effect process as the first effect, but differs from the first effect only in the display color of the effect. In the second effect, for example, the display color of the entire screen of the effect display device 60 becomes a special color different from the normal color. For example, an effect of normal color display is executed in the first effect, and an effect of monochrome display or negative-positive reverse display is executed in the second effect. The second effect is executed by changing the display color of the display image for the first effect by the display control circuit 326, for example. According to this aspect, by executing the second effect in which the display color of the entire screen is changed to a special color, an impact effect can be executed. In addition, since the image for the second effect can be displayed only by changing the display color of the image for the first effect by image processing, there is no need to prepare a separate image for the second effect, and the development man-hours are excessively increased. can be suppressed.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the normal color variation effect. FIG. 60(a) shows an example of the screen when the fluctuation is stopped. A plurality of simple patterns 630 are stopped at the lower right of the screen at "112" in a displaced state, and a plurality of decorative patterns 632 are displayed in the center of the screen. symbol row is stopped and displayed at "112" in which the pattern row is out of alignment. At the top right of the screen, a right-handed shot image 634 is displayed, which indicates that the game state should be right-handed. is displayed.

The display color of the simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 is determined according to the pattern type (number). For example, symbol "1" is pink, symbol "2" is light blue, symbol "3" is red, symbol "4" is purple, symbol "5" is green, symbol "6" is blue, and symbol "7" is It is golden. The simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 have the same correspondence between the number of the pattern and the display color. By sharing the display color of the simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 according to the pattern type, the simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 can be displayed in correspondence, and the simple pattern 630 and the decorative pattern 632 can be displayed according to the pattern type. It can be shown in a more comprehensible way to the player. As a modification, the simple pattern 630 may be unified in one color instead of using multiple colors in order to improve visibility. For example, all of the patterns "1" to "7" may be white.

FIG. 60(b) shows the state immediately after the start of the next symbol variation. The decorative pattern 632 in the center of the screen starts to be displayed in a variable manner, starting from "112" which is the stop mode immediately before the start of the variable. On the other hand, the simple symbol 630 at the lower right of the screen starts to be displayed in a variable manner, not from the stop mode of "112" immediately before the start of the variation, but from the combination of the symbol series of "123". In other words, the simple symbol 630 starts to be variably displayed starting from a combination of fixed symbol strings regardless of the stop mode immediately before the start of the variability. A right hitting image 634 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen, and a stay zone image 636 is continuously displayed on the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 60(c) is an announcement effect that is started when the fluctuation starts, and enters into a "street battle effect" suggesting that defeating all the enemy characters will result in a big win (or will develop into a super reach). showing the screen. In the center of the screen, instead of the decorative pattern 632, a notice image 638 of "Street battle rushes in!" is displayed. FIG. 60(d) shows a screen example of a street battle production, and a production image 640 showing the production process in which the main character defeats many enemy characters is displayed in the center of the screen. A simple pattern 630 is variably displayed at the lower right of the screen. A right hitting image 634 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen, and a stay zone image 636 is continuously displayed on the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the special color variation effect. The production process of FIG. 61 is similar to the production process of FIG. 60, but the display colors of the production are different from the middle. FIG. 61(a) is an example of a normal color screen before the special color variation effect is started, and is the same as FIG. 60(a). FIG. 61(b) shows an example of the screen at the start of the special color variation effect. In the example of FIG. 61(b), the display color of the entire screen is changed from color to gray scale. For example, the background display of the screen becomes black, the decorative pattern 642 in the center of the screen changes from color display to monochrome display, and the stay zone image 646 of "RUSH-zone" at the bottom left of the screen also changes from color display to monochrome display. That is, the display color of the decorative pattern 642 in the second effect is different from the display color of the decorative pattern 632 in the first effect. On the other hand, the display colors of the simple symbol 630 and the right shot image 634 do not change, and the normal color display is maintained like the normal color variation effect in FIG. 60(b). That is, the display colors of the simple symbol 630 and the right-handed hitting image 634 in the second effect are the same as the display colors of the simple symbol 630 and the right-handed hitting image 634 in the first effect.

FIG. 61(c) shows an example of the screen during execution of the variable effect of the special color, and the variable effect is executed while the display color of the entire screen is grayscale. For example, the background display of the screen remains black, and the stay zone image 646 of "RUSH-zone" at the bottom left of the screen remains monochrome display. In addition, the preview image 648 of "Enter the street battle!" in the center of the screen is also changed from color display to monochrome display. The display colors of the simple symbol 630 and the right-handed image 634 are not changed, and the normal color display is maintained as in the normal color variation effect of FIG. 60(c).

FIG. 61(d) shows an example of the screen during execution of the variable effect of the special color, and the variable effect is executed while the display color of the entire screen is grayscale. The background display of the screen remains black, and the stay zone image 646 of "RUSH-zone" at the bottom left of the screen remains monochrome display. Also, the effect image 640 showing the effect process in which the main character defeats many enemy characters in the center of the screen is also displayed in monochrome. The display colors of the simple symbol 630 and the right-handed image 634 do not change, and the normal color display is maintained like the normal color variation effect in FIG. 60(c).

The special color second effect ends within one symbol variation period during which the second effect is executed. For example, when the second performance is started with the start of the pattern variation, the second performance is finished before the pattern variation from which the second performance is started is finished, and the first performance of the normal color is returned. Therefore, when the symbols start to fluctuate and are stopped, the normal color first effect is executed, and during the pattern fluctuating display, the special color second effect can be executed. By displaying the decorative pattern 632 in the normal color when the decorative pattern 632 is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the pattern type of the decorative pattern 632 can be improved.

At the start of the special color variation effect shown in FIG. 61(b), that is, when switching from the first effect to the second effect, a transition effect may be executed in which the display color of the entire screen is switched multiple times in a short period of time. . In the transition effect, for example, the normal color display state and the special color display state may be switched multiple times so that the entire screen blinks. In addition, the display state of the first special color in which the normal color image is grayscaled and the display state of the second special color in which the luminance value of the grayscale image is inverted (so-called negative-positive inversion) may be switched multiple times. . In addition, in the transition effect, a display state in which the brightness of the entire screen is increased to make it whitish, or a display state in which the brightness of the entire screen is decreased to make it darker may be used, or characters such as "color change!" good too.

During execution of the second effect and during execution of the transition effect, there may be a display object whose display color is switched and a display object whose display color is not switched. For example, the display of the decorative pattern 632, the background display, the display of the stay zone image 636, the pending display showing the pending lottery value, and the display of the advance notice image showing the character appearing in the production process are displayed in different display colors. It may be a display object to be switched. On the other hand, game-related displays such as the display of the simple symbol 630, the display of the right-handed shot image 634, and the error display may be display items that are not subject to the switching of display colors. By excluding the display colors of the important display items related to the game from the switching targets, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the visibility of the important display related to the game.

At the end of the special color variation effect, that is, when switching from the second effect to the first effect, the transition effect of switching the display color of the entire screen a plurality of times in a short time need not be executed. That is, when returning from the second effect to the first effect, the display color of the entire screen may be switched only once.

After executing the transition effect during the execution of the first effect, a false transition effect may be executed to return to the first effect without switching to the second effect. In other words, the transition to the second performance may be suggested by the execution of the transition performance, and the second performance may or may not be switched to the second performance after the transition performance is executed.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the role product actuation effect. FIG. 62(a) shows an execution example of a character actuation effect that is executed such that a movable character object 660 appears in front of the effect display device 60 of normal color variation effect (that is, first effect). In the role product operation effect, a lamp or the like included in the movable role product 660 lights in a specific lighting mode (including lighting color and color change), and accompanying the operation of the movable role product 660, the effect display device 60 An effect display 662 is made. When the movable accessory 660 operates in the first effect in the normal color, an auxiliary effect display 662 is made in the display color corresponding to the lighting mode of the movable accessory 660 . For example, when the movable accessory 660 lights up in red, a red effect display 662 is performed, and when the movable accessory 660 lights up in rainbow colors, a rainbow effect display 662 is performed. The display color of the auxiliary effect display 662 in the first effect may differ according to the lighting color of the movable accessory 660 .

FIG. 62(b) shows an execution example of the accessory actuation effect executed so that the movable accessory 664 appears in front of the display screen of the special color variation effect (that is, the second effect). Also in the second effect, an auxiliary effect display 666 accompanying the action of the movable accessory 664 is provided. The lighting mode of the movable accessory 664 when the accessory actuation effect is executed in the second effect with the special color is the same as that when the accessory actuation effect is executed in the first effect with the normal color. It may be the same as the lighting mode of 660 . On the other hand, the display mode of the auxiliary effect display 666 that accompanies the action of the movable accessory 664 in the second effect is different from the display mode of the auxiliary effect display 662 that accompanies the action of the movable accessory 660 in the first effect. may For example, even if the lighting color of the movable accessory 664 is red or rainbow, the display color of the auxiliary effect display 666 may be grayscale or monochrome. The display color of the auxiliary effect display 666 in the second effect may be common regardless of the lighting color of the movable accessory 664 .

(Aspect 2-7: Suggestive Effect with Selectable Execution Mode)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of an effect process in which an execution mode of suggestive effect can be selected. After the start of symbol variation, it is possible to execute a specific effect (also referred to as an execution mode selection effect) in which options for the player to select an execution mode are displayed. When the first mode or the second mode is selected in the execution mode selection performance, a suggestive performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is executed, and after the suggestive performance is executed, a notification performance for confirming the big win is executed, or The missing symbols are stopped and displayed. In the execution mode selection effect, the player can select whether the execution mode of the suggestive effect is the first mode or the second mode by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 .

In the suggestive performance, for example, a cut-in display over the entire screen is performed during a super ready-to-win performance such as a second specific performance, and by changing (developing) the cut-in display in stages, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested. When the first mode is selected, it is possible to perform a suggestive effect that the cut-in display remains at the first stage (silver), or a suggestive effect that changes the cut-in display from the first stage (silver) to the final stage (rainbow). be. That is, when the first mode is selected, there are only two types of cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect: the first stage and the final stage. On the other hand, when the second mode is selected, the cut-in display remains at the first stage (silver), or from the first stage (silver) to the second stage (purple), the third stage (red), and the fourth stage It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that sequentially changes up to the stage (giraffe pattern) or the final stage (rainbow color). Therefore, when the second mode is selected, there are five types of cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect: the first stage, the second stage, the third stage, the fourth stage, and the final stage. It should be noted that even after selection, the display contents included in the cut-in display (for example, the type of characters appearing and the content of lines) may be changed according to the selected execution mode so that the selected execution mode can be known even after selection. good. For example, in the cut-in display when the first mode is selected, the first character appears or the content of the first line is displayed, and in the cut-in display when the second mode is selected, the second character appears. A character may appear, or the contents of the second dialogue may be displayed.

When the cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect is the final stage (rainbow color), the big hit is confirmed. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in display in the final stage (rainbow color) in the suggestive effect is the confirmed effect in which the big hit is confirmed. On the other hand, if the cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect is other than the final stage, the big win may or may not be achieved, so the big win is not confirmed. Therefore, the production in which the final stage (rainbow color) cut-in display is not displayed in the suggestive production and the change (development) ends in any of the first to fourth stages is a non-determined production in which the big hit is not confirmed. .

When the first mode is selected, either one type of fixed effect or one type of non-fixed effect is executed. When the second mode is selected, either one type of fixed effect or four types of non-fixed effect is executed. Therefore, the number of types of non-fixed effects executable when the second mode is selected is greater than the number of types of non-fixed effects executable when the first mode is selected. When the second mode is selected and the non-fixed effect is executed, the probability of winning a big win after that differs depending on which one of the four types of non-fixed effect is executed. Specifically, as the number of stages of change in the cut-in display in the suggestive effect increases, the probability of winning a big hit afterward increases, and the display mode of the cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect is the first stage < the second stage. The probability of winning a big hit increases in the order of <third stage<fourth stage.

When the jackpot is achieved after the selection of the first mode, for example, the non-fixed effect is executed with a probability of 20%, and the fixed effect is executed with a probability of 80%. On the other hand, when the big win is achieved after the selection of the second mode, for example, the non-fixed effect is executed with a probability of 75%, and the fixed effect is executed with a probability of 25%. If you hit a big hit after selecting the second mode, for example, you have a 5% chance of finishing the first stage, a 10% chance of progressing to the second stage (purple), and a 25% chance of reaching the third stage (purple). Red), 35% chance to 4th stage (giraffe pattern), 25% chance to 5th stage (rainbow color). Therefore, the probability (for example, 80%) of executing the fixed performance after the selection of the first mode and winning a big win is higher than the probability (for example, 25%) of executing the fixed performance and winning a big win after the selection of the second mode. Moreover, the probability (for example, 20%) that the suggestive performance ends in the first stage after the selection of the first mode and the big win is achieved is the probability that the suggestive performance ends in the first stage after the selection of the second mode and the big win is achieved. Higher than probability (eg 5%).

Regardless of which of the first mode and the second mode is selected, the resurrection performance that becomes a big hit after the fixed performance is executed will not be executed. Conversely, regardless of whether the first mode or the second mode is selected, after the execution of the non-fixed performance, the resurrection performance of a big hit may be executed after pretending to be lost.

The period (for example, 15 seconds) during which the first mode or the second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection effect is longer than the execution period (for example, 5 seconds) of the suggestive effect (fixed effect or non-fixed effect) to be executed thereafter. It can be long. During the period in which the first mode or the second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection effect, one or more advance notice effects may be executed. One or more advance notice effects executed during the period in which the execution mode can be selected in the execution mode selection effect may suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the final performance is performed after the selection of the first mode or the second mode. Alternatively, it may suggest the degree of expectation as to which of the non-determined effects will be executed. For example, the larger the number of small characters displayed at the edge of the screen, the higher the expectation that the fixed effect or the highly expected non-fixed effect will be executed after the selection of the first mode or the second mode. good. By lengthening the period during which the first mode or the second mode can be selected, and enabling one or more advance notice effects during the period, the first mode or the second mode can be selected according to the execution contents of the notice effects. It is possible to give the player time to worry about which of the two modes should be used, and to enhance the interest of the execution mode selection effect. As a modification, the period during which the first mode or the second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection effect is made shorter than the execution period of the suggestive effect (fixed effect or non-fixed effect) to be executed after that, and the player It may be a production that presses the player to make an immediate judgment.

The execution time of the suggestive effect may differ according to the number of stages of development, and the greater the number of stages of development, the longer the execution time may be. For example, when each stage from the first stage to the final stage is executed for 1 second, the execution time of the suggestive effect is 1 second when the first stage ends, and it progresses to the second stage and ends. 2 seconds if it progresses to the third stage and ends, 4 seconds if it progresses to the fourth stage and ends, and 5 seconds if it progresses to the final stage and ends seconds. The execution time of each stage may be different. For example, the execution times of the first stage and the final stage are relatively long, and the execution times of the second stage to the fourth stage are relatively short. may For example, the first step may be 2 seconds, each step from the second step to the fourth step may be 0.5 seconds, and the final step may be 3 seconds.

When the final effect is executed after the selection of the first mode or the second mode, even if either the first mode or the second mode is selected, the execution timing of the first stage and the execution timing of the final stage It may be common. For example, when the final effect is executed after the selection of the second mode, the cut-in display of each stage from the second stage to the fourth stage is superimposed on the background display, while the final effect is executed after the selection of the first mode. is executed, the cut-in display may not be superimposed during the interval period from the end of the first stage to the start of the final stage, and the background display may be visible.

As a modified example of this mode, the fixed effect may be executable when the first mode is selected, while the fixed effect may not be executable when the second mode is selected. In other words, if the first mode is selected, development from the first stage to the final stage is possible, whereas if the second mode is selected, development ends in any of the first to fourth stages. , may be undevelopable to the final stage.

(Aspect 2-8: Production of increasing the number of high-ball remaining counts)
When the jackpot does not occur within a specified number of times (20 times) after shifting to the latent mode, that is, when the jackpot does not occur during execution of the opening performance, the player enters the RUSH zone. A RUSH zone can last for at least 100 or 200 symbol variation periods. In the RUSH zone, the remaining number of symbol fluctuations that allow the high-ball winning state to continue is displayed on the screen, and the remaining number of symbol variations displayed on the screen is decremented by 1 when the symbol stops or starts to fluctuate. When the number of times the high-ball-entry state can be continued after the transition to the latent mode is the first number (120 times), the number of times the high-ball-entry state can be continued at the start of the RUSH zone is from the first number (120 times). It is the number of times (100 times) obtained by subtracting the specific number of times (20 times). When the number of times the high-ball-entry state can be continued after the transition to the latent mode is the second number (220 times), the number of times the high-ball-entry state can be continued at the start of the RUSH zone is from the second number (220 times). It is the number of times (200 times) obtained by subtracting the specific number of times (20 times).

At the end of the opening effect or at the start of the RUSH zone, a notification effect is executed to notify the number of times the high ball entry state can be continued in the RUSH zone. When the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued after shifting to the latent mode is the first number (120 times), at the start of the RUSH zone, a notification effect of "Enter RUSH zone 100 times!" When the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued after shifting to the latent mode is the second number (220 times), at the start of the RUSH zone, it is possible to execute the notification effect "Enter RUSH zone 200 times!". Further, when the number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued after shifting to the latent mode is the second number (220 times), at the start of the RUSH zone, it is possible to execute the notification effect of "Rush into the RUSH zone 100 times!" This notification effect can be said to be a false notification effect because the actual remaining number of times is 200, but the remaining number of times is 100, which is less than the actual remaining number of times.

When a false remaining number is reported at the start of the RUSH zone, it is possible to execute a number-increasing effect in which the false remaining number is increased in the middle of the RUSH zone. For example, even though the number of continuations of the high ball entry state at the start of the RUSH zone is 200 times, at the start of the RUSH zone, if a false notification effect of "Entering the RUSH zone 100 times!" In the middle of the zone, it is possible to execute a number-of-times-increase effect in which a display such as "+100 spins!!" is displayed. On the other hand, when the actual remaining number of times is notified at the start of the RUSH zone, the number-of-times-increasing effect for increasing the remaining number of times during the RUSH zone is not executed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the number-of-times increase effect. FIG. 64(a) shows the notification effect at the start of the RUSH zone, and although the actual number of RUSH zone continuations is 200, the false notification effect of "Rush into the RUSH zone 100 times!" This is an example of a screen when A simple symbol 600 is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and a right hitting image 634 is displayed at the top right of the screen. FIG. 64(b) shows an example of the screen when the RUSH zone changes for the first time. A decorative pattern 602 is variably displayed in the center of the screen, and a stay zone image 636 of "RUSH-zone" is displayed in the lower left of the screen. At the top of the screen, a remaining number of times image 652 of "99 remaining times" is displayed, which indicates the number of false remaining times until reaching the number of times of continuation of the RUSH zone. FIG. 64(c) shows a screen example of the number-of-times increase effect. In the example of FIG. 64(c), "+100 rotations!" FIG. 64(d) shows an example of the screen after execution of the number-of-times increase effect, in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image 652 is increased to "remaining 134 times" by the number-of-times increase effect.

When a false remaining number of times is notified at the start of the RUSH zone, a performance determination means 303 executes a performance lottery for determining whether or not to execute the number-of-times increase performance at the start of pattern variation in the RUSH zone. When the number of symbol changes from the start of the RUSH zone is less than a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), even if the player wins the lottery, the number-increasing effect is not executed. In other words, the execution of the number-increase effect is prohibited when the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) from the start of the RUSH zone. On the other hand, when the number of symbol variations from the start of the RUSH zone is a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) or more, the number-increasing effect is executed in the symbol variation that wins the effect lottery. In other words, when the pattern changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more from the start of the RUSH zone, the number-of-times increase effect can be executed. In addition, when the number of false remaining times is notified at the start of the RUSH zone, and the number of false remaining times becomes 1 (that is, the 99th time from the start of the RUSH zone) until the end of the pattern variation, the number of times increase effect is not executed. , When the number of false remaining times becomes 0 (that is, the 100th time from the start of the RUSH zone), the number of times increase effect is forcibly executed at the start of the pattern variation, and the remaining number of times displayed on the screen becomes "100 times remaining". To increase. As a modification, when the number of symbol variations from the start of the RUSH zone is less than a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the effect for determining whether or not to execute the number of times increase effect at the start of the symbol variation in the RUSH zone A lottery may not be executed, and an effect lottery may be executed at the time of symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more from the start of the RUSH zone.

In the opening production before moving to the RUSH zone, instead of displaying the remaining number of times that the high ball state can be continued in the latent mode, the remaining number of pattern fluctuations or pseudo continuous fluctuations until the opening production ends is displayed. may Therefore, at the start of the opening performance, the false remaining number of times is not displayed, and the remaining number of times starting from the maximum number of symbol variations (20 times) that can be executed in the opening performance is subtracted and displayed. It should be noted that, in the opening effect, the remaining number of times is not necessarily subtracted with the symbol variation as a trigger, and the remaining number of times may be subtracted with the pseudo variation of the symbol as a trigger. Further, in the opening effect, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting whether the number of times the RUSH zone can be continued is the first number or the second number. For example, the case where the second notice effect in which the characters "Number of times increased?" It may be possible to execute a character announcement effect in which the possibility of the second number of times is higher.

According to this aspect, when a false remaining number of times is reported at the start of the RUSH zone, execution of the number of times increase effect is prohibited when the pattern changes less than the predetermined number of times from the start of the RUSH zone. Execution can effectively increase the player's sense of expectation. When the number of symbol changes from the start of the RUSH zone is less than a predetermined number, the displayed remaining number of times is large (for example, 50 times or more), so there is little impatience that a big hit may not be achieved by the end of the RUSH zone. . On the other hand, if the number of pattern variations from the start of the RUSH zone is a predetermined number or more, the number of remaining times displayed is small (for example, less than 50 times), so there is a rush that a big hit may not be achieved by the end of the RUSH zone. becomes larger. By making it possible to execute the number-of-times-increase effect at the timing when the player becomes more impatient that the RUSH zone may end, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the big win by increasing the remaining number of times.

When execution of the number-of-times-increase effect is determined by the effect lottery, the number-of-times-increase effect may be executed by the change in which the effect lottery is executed, or the number-of-times-increase effect is executed by the change corresponding to the reserved lottery value. may That is, the number-of-times increase effect may be a look-ahead effect. When the number-of-times increase performance is executed by look-ahead, a prior suggestion performance suggesting the execution of the number-of-times increase performance in advance may be executed during the pattern variation before the pattern variation in which the number-of-times increase performance is executed.

(Aspect 2-9: Variation effect in extended mode)
In the extension mode, a special effect is executed in which a plurality of types of individual effects can be executed in a predetermined order. Each individual effect can be executed over a plurality of symbol variations. As the individual effects, there are, for example, a first individual effect in which an ally character appears and a second individual effect in which an enemy character appears. An effect is executed in which the battle of the enemy characters progresses. In the individual presentation, for example, a moving image is reproduced in which a friend character or an enemy character appears and utters a specific line or performs a specific special move. Note that the individual effect is a effect that starts immediately after the start of the variable display, and does not start just before the end of the variable display.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the individual effect, and shows the process in which the individual effect is executed a plurality of times along with a plurality of symbol changes. In the example of FIG. 65, a first individual effect A (1A) in which an ally character appears, a second individual effect A (2A) in which an enemy character appears, a first individual effect B (1B) in which an ally character appears, and an enemy character. This shows the flow in which the second individual effect B (2B) in which . Each individual effect 1A, 2A, 1B, 2B can be executed over a plurality of symbol variations. It should be noted that the variation time of the symbol variation in which each of the individual effects 1A to 2B is executed is not necessarily uniform, and the variation time may differ according to the selected variation pattern. When the variation time of the symbol variation that triggers the start of the individual performance is long, the individual performance may start and end within one symbol variation as in the individual performance 1B. The execution time of each individual effect may be uniform regardless of the type of individual effect, and may differ according to the type of individual effect.

In the extension mode, a performance determination means 303 executes a performance lottery for whether or not to execute an individual performance, and when the performance lottery is won, the individual performance is executed with the start of pattern variation as a trigger. When the individual performance is executed, the performance lottery is prohibited until the individual performance is finished in order to prevent the individual performance from being interrupted in the middle and another individual performance from being started. For example, when the individual performance is started with the start of the symbol variation, and the individual performance is continuously executed at the start of the next symbol variation, the performance lottery is prohibited during the continuation of the individual performance. Thereafter, when the individual performance ends, the prohibition of the performance lottery is released and the performance lottery is permitted. Therefore, when the individual performance is started, the performance lottery is prohibited, and when the individual performance is finished, the performance lottery is permitted.

At the start of the individual production, the sub CPU 310 (the production determination means 303) transmits a command to instruct the start of the individual production to the control CPU 320 (the production control device 313). When the sub CPU 310 transmits the start command to the control CPU 320, it changes the flag indicating whether or not the effect lottery can be executed to the prohibited state. The start command is transmitted, for example, after the start of the symbol variation in which the individual effect is started. The start command includes information designating the type of individual presentation. Upon receiving the start command from the sub CPU 310, the control CPU 320 controls the operation of the display control circuit 326 so that the reproduction of the moving image corresponding to the type of individual effect designated by the start command is started. The control CPU 320 transmits a command for notifying the end of the individual effect to the sub CPU 310 when the reproduction of the moving image of the individual effect ends. The end command may include information designating the type of individual effect that has ended. When the sub CPU 310 receives the end command from the control CPU 320, the sub CPU 310 changes the flag indicating whether or not the effect lottery can be executed to the permitted state.

The individual effect may be executed over a plurality of symbol variations, so it may be started only in a situation where a plurality of symbol variations can be performed. For example, the individual effect may be started only when the lottery value is reserved and it is confirmed that the symbol variations are continuously executed a plurality of times. The individual effect may be started only when the number of reservations is equal to or greater than a specific number. For example, when the individual effect is executed over three symbol variations, the effect lottery may be executed only when the number of pending lottery values is three or more or four. In other words, when the number of holds immediately after the start of the variable display is 3 (when the variable display starts when one of the four holds is consumed), the execution of the individual effect can be started. Become. On the other hand, when the pending number is less than the specific number, even if the effect lottery is permitted, the effect lottery may be skipped without being executed.

As types of individual production, there may be a low-expectation-level individual production and a high-expectation-level individual production. If the lottery value that is reserved at the start of the pattern variation that starts the individual production includes the lottery value with high expectation such as the lottery value that will be a big hit or the lottery value that will change the reach, the high-expectation individual production will start. may On the other hand, if the lottery value that is reserved at the start of the pattern fluctuation when the individual production starts does not include the lottery value with high expectations such as the lottery value that will be a big hit or the lottery value that will change the reach, low-expectation individual production may be started. In addition, even if the pattern variation that starts the individual production (that is, the variation) is a high-expectation pattern variation such as a big hit pattern variation or a reach variation pattern variation, the high-expectation individual production is started. good too. On the other hand, if the pattern variation (that is, the variation) for which the individual production is started is not a high-expectation pattern variation such as a big hit pattern variation or a reach variation pattern variation, the low-expectation individual production is started. Although it may be, if the lottery value with high expectation such as the lottery value that becomes a big hit or the lottery value that becomes the reach variation is included (that is, it is read ahead) as the lottery value that is reserved during the pattern fluctuation, it is high You may start an expectation individual production.

The number of types of high-expectation-degree individual effects may be smaller than the number of types of low-expectation-degree individual effects. For example, five types of first individual effects and five types of second individual effects are prepared as low-expectation individual effects, and two types of first individual effects and two types of second individual effects are prepared as high-expectation individual effects. 2 individual performances are prepared. If the situation where the high-expectation lottery value is not included at the start of the individual production continues, there are 10 types of low expectations, including the low-expectation 1st individual production (for allies) and the 2nd individual production (for enemies). Each individual effect is executed in a predetermined order (for example, along the progress order of the story or the progress order of the battle), and the first individual effect and the second individual effect are alternately executed. On the other hand, when the lottery value of high expectation is included at the start of the individual performance, the high expectation individual performance may be executed instead of the low expectation individual performance to be executed next according to the predetermined order. That is, the high-expectation-degree individual production may be executed so as to be inserted in the middle of the execution order of the low-expectation-degree individual production. When a situation continues in which a lottery value with a high degree of expectation is included at the start of the individual performance, two or more high-expectation individual performances may be continuously executed. Even when the high-expectation individual performance is executed, the rule of alternately executing the first individual performance (for teammates) and the second individual performance (for enemies) may be observed. After the first individual performance with low expectations, the second individual performance with low expectations or high expectations is executable, and even if the first individual performance with low expectations or high expectations is not executable good. Even if the first individual performance with low or high expectations is executable next to the second individual performance with low expectations, and the second individual performance with low expectations or high expectations is not executable. good. After the first individual performance with high expectations, the second individual performance with low or high expectations can be executed, and even if the first individual performance with low expectations or high expectations is unexecutable good. Even if the first individual performance with low or high expectations is executable next to the second individual performance with high expectations, and the second individual performance with low expectations or high expectations is not executable. good.

The individual effect may not be executable during execution of a specific look-ahead effect (a pending change effect or a background change effect that transitions to a look-ahead stage). Even if the flag indicating whether or not the performance lottery can be executed is in a permitted state, the execution of the specific prefetch performance is prioritized during the execution of the specific prefetch performance, and the performance lottery is skipped without executing the individual performance. may not be executed (or the performance lottery may be executed, but the individual performance may not be executed even if the performance lottery is won).

When the power is restored during the execution of the individual performance, the execution of the individual performance is stopped by the power failure recovery process, and the moving image for the individual performance is hidden, but since the individual performance is not normally completed, the control CPU 320 The end command of the individual effect is not transmitted to the sub CPU 310. - 特許庁If so, the state in which the performance lottery is prohibited after the power is restored will continue, and the individual performance will not be executed in the extension mode after the power is restored. Therefore, when the power is restored, the flag indicating whether or not the effect lottery can be executed may be forcibly changed to the permitted state at the end of the symbol variation at the time of power restoration. In this case, the effect lottery prohibition state continues until the pattern fluctuation at the time of power failure recovery is completed, and the effect lottery becomes the permitted state at the start of the next pattern fluctuation after the power failure recovery, and the execution of individual production is not possible. It becomes possible.

During the execution of the individual performance or after the end of the individual performance, an operation instruction performance for instructing an input operation to the performance button 109 or the like may be executed, and after the end of the operation instruction performance, the role actuation performance may be executed. When power-off recovery processing is executed, the movable accessory 66 may perform a predetermined initialization operation after power-off recovery. When the individual performance is executed during the initialization operation of the movable accessory 66, the operation instruction performance may be executed after that. That is, an operation means image simulating an input operation means may be displayed during the initialization operation of the movable accessory 66 . When the operation means image is displayed during the initialization operation of the movable accessory 66, even if an input operation is performed to the input operation means, the accessory actuation effect may not be executed. Auxiliary effect display 662 that accompanies the action may be performed.

According to this aspect, even if an individual performance that cannot be accommodated in one pattern variation is executed, it is possible to control so that another individual performance triggered by the start of the pattern variation is not executed before the end of the individual performance. Therefore, the consistency of production can be secured. In addition, by switching the effect lottery permission state and prohibition state based on the start command and the end command of the individual effect, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated.

(Aspect 2-10: Temporary stop processing of opening effect)
As described in aspect 2-5 above, a special effect (opening effect) can be executed over a special period from the start of the hiding mode until at least a predetermined time has passed, and a dedicated video is played in the opening effect. A video reproduction effect is executed. The moving image reproduction effect is continuously executed over a plurality of symbol variation periods, and is continuously executed without depending on the variation start timing and the stop display timing in the plurality of symbol variation periods. In this mode, during the execution of the moving image reproduction effect, if the lottery value related to the symbol variation is not reserved and the next symbol variation is not started while the symbol variation is stopped, the progress of the moving image reproduction effect is immediately stopped. , to display a motion picture of the maintained stopped state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reproduction of the dedicated moving image from being continued in a situation where no game is being played.

When the lottery value related to the symbol variation is reserved, the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the next symbol variation is started after the lapse of the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the lottery value related to the symbol variation is reserved, the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the next symbol variation is not started after the lapse of the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol is stopped and displayed. , the stop display of the symbol continues. Therefore, when the pattern corresponding to the next pattern variation is not displayed after a second time (for example, 1 second) longer than the first time has passed after the symbol is stopped and displayed, the progress of the moving image reproduction effect is immediately started. Stop. On the other hand, when the pattern corresponding to the next pattern variation starts to be displayed after the lapse of the first time after the pattern is stopped and displayed, the progress of the moving image reproduction performance is continued.

During execution of the moving image reproduction effect, it is possible to execute a sound effect of outputting sound from the speaker 108 and a lamp effect of lighting the decoration lamp 111 in accordance with the progress of the moving image. While the moving picture reproduction effect is stopped, the image of the state in which the moving picture is paused at the time when the second time has passed since the design is stopped is continuously displayed, and the sound effect and the lamp effect are also temporarily stopped. . On the other hand, even when the moving image reproduction effect is stopped, a right hitting image is displayed in the upper right of the screen, and a right hitting warning is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. Further, even while the moving image reproduction effect is stopped, arbitrary lamp display (error display, game state display, pattern display, etc.) in the symbol display unit 120 is continued without being paused.

The moving image reproduction effect may have a plurality of effect branch points, and the reproduction contents of the dedicated moving image may differ after each effect branch point. The timing of each production branch point in the animation reproduction production is determined according to the reproduction time of the dedicated animation. Therefore, if the pattern is stopped during the execution of the video playback effect and the video playback is paused, the elapsed time from the start of the video playback effect to each production branch point is the video pause time. Become slow. When the effect branch point is reached during execution of the moving image reproduction effect, a feedback command is transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the sub CPU 310 to notify that the effect branch point has been reached. The sub CPU 310 determines the execution mode of the ramp effect and the advance notice effect after each effect branch point based on the effect branch point notification command received from the control CPU 320 . By determining the execution mode of the effect based on the feedback command, even if the elapsed time from the start of the moving image reproduction effect to each effect branch point changes due to the pause of the moving image reproduction, the dedicated moving image can be reproduced for each effect branch point. It is possible to match the content with the execution timing of the lamp effect and the advance notice effect.

According to this aspect, when pausing the progress of the moving image reproduction effect, the reproduction display of the moving image and the execution of the lamp effect and the notice effect linked with the moving image reproduction content are temporarily stopped, thereby synchronizing with the moving image reproduction content. Then, it is possible to execute a lamp effect or a notice effect. On the other hand, when the progress of the moving image reproduction effect is temporarily stopped, by continuing the error display, the right-handed display, etc., it is possible to continue the important display related to the game.

(Aspect 2-11: Determination process based on game state stored at the beginning of fluctuation start process)
In the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51, the win/loss determination is executed after the fall determination is executed in the fluctuation start process. Conditions may vary. For example, when the fall judgment is won in the extension mode, the probability is high and the ball is in a high ball state at the start of the fluctuation start process related to the pattern fluctuation that is won in the fall judgment, but the probability is low when the success judgment is executed after that. And it is in a state of low ball entry. Since the extension mode is a right-handed game state, the second special symbol 52 fluctuates. The first special symbol 51 may change. If the first special symbol 51 fluctuates in the extension mode, the fall judgment is won in the fluctuation start processing of the first special symbol 51, and the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, the hit/fail judgment of the big hit. The game state at the time of execution is a low probability and low ball entry state. Then, despite staying in the extension mode, the first special pattern 51 becomes a big hit in a low probability and a low ball entry state, so it is regarded as a big hit in the normal mode, and from the extension mode to the A time saving mode. It becomes transferable. Although the probability of occurrence of such a situation is extremely low, it is not preferable because the player is greatly disadvantaged when it occurs.

Therefore, in this aspect, when the first special symbol 51 falls into a low probability and low ball entry state during the stay in the extension mode and the first special symbol 51 becomes a big hit, it is possible to shift to the latent mode instead of the A short time mode. A game state after the end of the special game is determined based on the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process. Specifically, when a big hit is achieved, the game state after the end of the special game is determined based on the game state stored in the process of S1300 of FIG. Since fall determination is not executed in the normal mode, when a big hit is achieved in the normal mode, the game state at the start of the variation start process is a low probability and low ball entry state. On the other hand, since the game state at the start of the fluctuation start process before executing the fall determination in the extension mode is a high probability and a high ball entry state, by using the game state at the start of the fluctuation start process as a reference, After that, regardless of whether the fall judgment is won or not, the same shift destination (latent mode) can be made in the case of a big win. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately transition the game state.

According to this aspect, during the right-handed game (that is, A short working hours mode, B short working hours mode, C short working hours mode, latent mode and extension mode), the first special design 51 instead of the second special design 52 is the 4R jackpot 51, the game state after the end of the special game is determined based on the game state (high ball entry state) stored in the processing of S1300 of FIG. It is possible to shift to a latent mode in which 220 low-probability and high-entering states are set, instead of the A time-saving mode that is set. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately transition the game state. As described above, by determining the game state after the end of the special game based on the game state (high ball entry state) stored in the process of S1300 in FIG. 51, the first special symbol 51 Even in the case of a 4R big hit, it is possible to shift to a latent mode in which a low probability and high ball entry state 220 times are set. On the other hand, the situation in which the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot during the left-handed game occurs only in the normal mode and cannot occur in the special mode. In the normal mode, since the game state stored in the process of S1300 in FIG. 51 is the low ball entry state, when the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot in the low ball entry state, the specification is to transition to the A time saving mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately transition the game state.

Further, in this embodiment, when the symbol for C time saving is stopped in the normal mode, it is shifted to the C time saving mode. In principle, when the first special symbol 51 is stop-displayed in the C time saving symbol in a low probability and low ball entering state, the C time saving mode is entered. At this time, when it is possible to shift to the C time saving mode based on the game state when the C time saving symbol is stopped, the first special symbol 51 fluctuates in the extension mode, and in the fluctuation start processing of the first special symbol 51 When the fall determination is won and the first special pattern 51 is stop-displayed in the pattern for shortening working hours, the condition for entering the shortening working hours mode is satisfied. When the final variation of the extension mode does not result in a big hit, the game flow is such that the game is shifted to the normal mode via the special mode, so it is not preferable that the extension mode can enter the C time saving mode. Therefore, in this aspect, as shown in the process of S1340 in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not to shift to the C time saving mode based on the game state at the start of the fluctuation start process stored in S1300. In this case, even if the C time-saving design stops with a low probability and a low ball entry state in the final variation of the extension mode, the game state at the start of the variation start process of the final variation in which the C time-saving design stops is a high probability. And since it is in a state of high ball entry, the condition for transition to the C time saving mode is not satisfied. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately transition the game state.

(Aspect 2-12: Variation pattern selection state transition according to the presence or absence of falling)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the transition process of the variation pattern selection state when transitioning to the latent mode. FIG. 66 shows the transition process of the winning variation pattern selection state selected when the result of the success/failure determination is other than the big hit (loss), and the winning variation pattern selection state selected when the big hit is omitted. However, the transition process is the same as the transition process of the deviation fluctuation pattern selection state, a special period from the first fluctuation to a specific number of times (for example, 20 times), less than the final number of RUSH zones from the first time of the RUSH zone (for example, 99 times or less or 199 times or less), the final number of times of the RUSH zone (eg 100 times or 200 times), the extension mode, the special mode, in order, the hit variation pattern selection state transitions. In addition, the variation pattern selection state for A time saving mode, the variation pattern selection state for B time saving mode, and the variation pattern selection state for C time saving mode are different variation pattern selection states, and only one type is prepared for each. The type of variation pattern selection state is different from any variation pattern selection state for latent mode. In addition, there is no transition of the variation pattern selection state within each time saving mode A to C.

Selection states A, B, C1, and C2 are prepared as the deviation variation pattern selection states for the latent mode. In latent mode, variation pattern selection state A is selected in a special period from the initial variation to a specific number of times (for example, 20 times). Variation pattern selection state A is a selection state for executing an opening effect, and includes, for example, the first to eighth variation pattern selection states described in aspect 2-5. Design variation of a specific number of times (eg, 20 times) is completed from the first time in the latent mode, variation pattern selection state B is selected in the next (eg, 21st) design variation, and the variation pattern selection state transitions from A to B. do. Variation pattern selection state B is a selection state that is selected other than the final variation of the RUSH zone, and is selected by symbol variation less than the final number of times of the RUSH zone from the first time of the RUSH zone (for example, 99 times or less or 199 times or less). be done. The variation pattern selection states A and B are always selected within the final number of times, regardless of whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state (whether or not the falling judgment has been won). Variation pattern selection state C1 or C2 is selected at the symbol variation that becomes the final number of times of the RUSH zone (for example, 100 times or 200 times), and the variation pattern selection state transitions from B to C1 or C2. Therefore, in the final fluctuation of the latent mode, two types of deviation fluctuation pattern selection states C1 or C2 can be selected. The variation pattern selection state C1 is a selection state that is selected when the falling judgment is not won between the first variation and the final variation of the hiding mode, and the high probability state is maintained in the final variation of the hiding mode. selected if The variation pattern selection state C2 is a selection state that is selected when the falling judgment is won in any of the first variation to the final variation of the hiding mode, and is selected when the final variation of the hiding mode results in a low probability state. be done.

When the variation pattern selection state C1 is selected in the final variation of the latent mode, the next pattern variation is shifted to the extension mode. Two kinds of variation pattern selection states D1 and D2 are prepared as the deviation variation pattern selection state for the extension mode. The variation pattern selection state D1 is selected when the high probability state is maintained in the extension mode, that is, when the extension mode continues even in the next symbol variation. The variation pattern selection state D2 is selected when the extension mode falls to a low probability state, that is, when the extension mode is not continued in the next pattern variation and the transition is made to the special mode. When the fall judgment is not won in the first variation of the extension mode, the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected in the first variation of the extension mode. When the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected, the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected until the fall determination is won after that, and the variation pattern selection state D2 is selected by the pattern variation winning the fall determination, and the variation pattern selection state transitions from D1 to D2. In addition, when the fall determination is won in the initial variation in the extension mode, the variation pattern selection state D2 is selected in the initial variation, so the variation pattern selection state D1 is not selected in the extension mode. The symbol variation in which the variation pattern selection state D2 is selected in the extension mode is the final variation in the extension mode, and the next symbol variation is shifted to the special mode.

One type of selection state E is selected as the deviation variation pattern selection state for the special mode. The variation pattern selection state E is selected when the game state at the start of variation is low probability and low ball entry state, and when the second special symbol 52 varies. When the reservation of the second special symbol 52 is completely consumed, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In normal mode, the variation pattern selection state for normal mode is selected.

The variation pattern selection state (C1 or C2) when determining the variation pattern related to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after the transition to the high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120 times or 220 times) is The variation pattern selection state (A or B ) and is also different from the variation pattern selection state (D1 or D2) when a variation pattern relating to symbol variation exceeding a predetermined number of times (120 times or 220 times) is determined. If the number of pattern variations after shifting to a high probability and high ball entry state is less than a predetermined number (for example, 119 times or less or 219 times or less), the variation pattern selection state (A or B) determined after winning the fall judgment is the same as the variation pattern selection criteria (A or B) determined after the falling judgment is not won. If the number of symbol changes after shifting to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (eg 120 times or 220 times) or more, and if the result of the success judgment is a loss, after winning the fall judgment The determined variation pattern selection criterion (D2) is different from the variation pattern selection criterion (D1) determined after the falling judgment is not won.

If the final variation of the latent mode or the final variation of the extension mode (variation that wins the fall judgment in the extension mode) is lost, the effect of notifying the continuation of the high ball state, or whether or not the fall judgment is won A notification effect can be executed. For example, when the losing variation pattern selection state C1, C2 or D2 is selected, it is possible to select a specific variation pattern capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the high ball entry state can be continued or whether or not the fall determination is won. When the losing variation pattern selection state C1, C2 or D2 is selected, it may be possible to select only a specific variation pattern in which the notification effect can be executed. When the losing variation pattern selection state C1 is selected, while the right-handed hitting image 634 is displayed, the reach production is not performed, and after executing the continuous fanning production for inciting whether or not the high ball entering state can be continued, the high ball entering state is performed. A high ball entry state continuation effect in which continuation is confirmed is executed. When the losing variation pattern selection state C2 is selected, while the right-handed hitting image 634 is displayed, the reach performance is not performed, and after executing the continuous fanning performance for inciting whether or not the high-ball entering state can be continued, the high-ball entering state is performed. A high-ball winning state end effect that it is determined that the state will not continue and a result effect of notifying the total number of won winning balls during the continuous game until the high-ball winning state ends are executed. When the losing variation pattern selection state D2 is selected, the right-handed hitting image 634 is erased (hidden) at the start of the variation, and the battle effect is executed to lose. executed. Incidentally, when the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected, the high-ball-entering state ending effect is not executed.

If the final variation of latent mode or any pattern variation in extension mode (variation that wins the fall judgment in extension mode or variation that does not win the fall judgment in extension mode) hits, the winning variation pattern selection state is selected. be done. When the winning variation pattern selection state is selected in the final variation of the latent mode or any symbol variation in the extension mode, any of the plurality of winning variation patterns may be selectable based on the winning variation pattern selection state. As multiple hit variation patterns, a normal hit pattern that does not involve battle production, a reach normal hit pattern that becomes a big hit as it is after the battle production, a resurrection hit pattern that becomes a big hit after pretending to be lost after the battle production, and a high winning ball after the battle production A result resurrection winning pattern or the like that revives and becomes a big win after executing the state end effect and the result effect may be prepared. If a big hit is achieved in any pattern variation in the extension mode (variation that wins the fall determination in the extension mode or variation that does not win the fall determination in the extension mode), the right shot image 634 is erased at the start of the variation. The number of types of hit variation patterns that can be selected when the final variation in the latent mode or any symbol variation in the extension mode results in a big win may be, for example, 2 or more, 3 or more, or 4 or more. . The number of types of variation patterns (for example, 4 types) that can be selected when a big hit is achieved in a pattern variation where the number of pattern variations after shifting to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (eg, 120 times or 220 times) or more. is the number of types of variation patterns (eg, 1 type). When a big hit is achieved in the final variation of the latent mode, while the right-handed hitting image 634 is being displayed, the continuous fanning performance is executed, and then the high-ball-entering state continuous performance and the high-ball-entering state ending performance are executed. A big-hit effect such that 777 is suddenly displayed may be executed. When a big hit is achieved in any pattern variation in the extension mode (variation not winning the fall determination in the extension mode), and when variation pattern selection state D1 is selected, battle production is performed without erasing the right hitting image 634. may be executed, and in the case of a big win, only the ready-to-win normal winning pattern may be executed as it is after the battle production. When the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected, a continuation loss pattern may be executed to notify that the battle effect is executed and the game is lost, but the high ball entry state continues.

Two types of variation pattern selection state D1a for medium speed and time reduction variation pattern selection state D1b for high speed may be prepared as a loss variation pattern selection state selected when falling determination is not won in the extension mode. For example, if the fall judgment is not won in the initial fluctuation of the extension mode, the medium-speed time-saving fluctuation pattern selection state D1a is selected, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied without winning the fall judgment after that, for example, the extension mode When the number of symbol variations from the first time is a predetermined number or more (for example, 100 times or more), the high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b is selected. When the high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b is selected, the pattern variation efficiency is enhanced as compared with the case where the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a is selected. For example, when medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a is selected, medium-speed time-saving variation pattern is selected, and when high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b is selected, medium-speed time-saving rather than medium-speed time-saving A high-speed time-saving variation pattern with a short variation time is selected. If the falling judgment is won without satisfying the predetermined condition after selecting the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a, the special mode variation pattern selection state E is entered without transitioning to the high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b. You can transition. When the predetermined condition is satisfied after selecting the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a, the change from the medium-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1a to the high-speed time-saving variation pattern selection state D1b or the change after the transition (that is, the transition Subsequent variation), if the fall determination is won, the transition to the variation pattern selection state E for the special mode may be made.

When the C time-saving design stops due to a design change where the number of design changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120 times or 220 times) or more, the missing design other than the C time-saving design is The same variation pattern as in the case of stopping can be selected, and the same effect may be executed. Also, even if the C time-saving design stops due to a design change in which the number of design changes after shifting to a high probability and high ball entry state is less than a predetermined number (for example, 120 times or 220 times), other than the C time-saving design The same variation pattern as in the case where the losing symbol stops can be selected, and the same effect may be executed. In addition, when the C time saving pattern is stopped after winning the fall judgment with the pattern variation where the number of symbol variations after shifting to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120 times or 220 times) or more, The game state during the variable display and when the variable is stopped becomes a low probability and a low ball entry state, but the same variation pattern as when the missing symbol other than the C time saving symbol stops is selectable, and the same effect can be executed. There may be.

According to this aspect, even if the game flow branches intricately according to the timing of winning the falling determination after transitioning to the high-probability and high-ball entry state, a limited number of variation pattern selection states can be used. Since the game state can be properly transitioned, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated.

(Aspect 2-13: Symbol stop processing)
In the present embodiment, three types of easy-to-enter state, namely, short time A, short time B, and short time C, are prepared. Time-saving A is an easy-to-enter state that can be transitioned to when a special game is executed, and time-saving B and time-saving C are easy-to-enter states that can be transitioned to when the result of the success/failure determination is other than a big hit. . B time-saving is an easy-to-enter state that is shifted when the cumulative number of pattern fluctuations reaches a specified ceiling number without a big hit occurring in a low-probability state, and C time-saving is a success or failure in a low-probability state. It is an easy-to-enter state that is shifted when the result of the judgment is other than a big hit, and the winning lottery value or the pattern lottery value falls within a specific range. is.

As described above with reference to FIG. 52, the processing at the time of symbol stop related to the easy-to-enter state includes time-saving count subtraction processing, C time-saving rush processing, and B time-saving count subtraction processing. In the example of FIG. 52, at the time of symbol stop, processing is executed in the order of time saving count subtraction processing →C time saving rush processing →B time saving count subtraction processing. By executing the processing in this order, if the C time reduction rush condition and the B time reduction rush condition are satisfied at the same time, by executing the B time reduction rush processing after the C time reduction rush processing, the C time reduction rush processing is B time reduction rush processing. can be overwritten by That is, when the C time saving rush condition and the B time saving rush condition are satisfied at the same time, the B time saving is given priority over the C time saving, and it is shifted to the B time saving. In the present embodiment, since the B time saving that can be continued up to 200 times is more advantageous to the player than the C time saving that can be continued up to 100 times, the situation disadvantageous to the player is that the C time saving is prioritized. can be prevented.

In a variation, the advantage to the player in the C time saving may be greater than the advantage to the player in the B time saving. For example, the number of continuations of C time reduction may be set to 200 times, the number of continuations of B time reduction may be set to 100 times, and the number of continuations of C time reduction may be greater than the number of continuations of B time reduction. In this case, the order of the C time saving rush process and the B time saving number subtraction process at the time of pattern stop may be reversed, and the processes may be executed in the order of time saving number subtraction process B time saving number subtraction process C time saving rush process. That is, after execution of the process related to time saving (B time saving) having a relatively low advantage to the player, the process relating to time saving (C time saving) having a relatively high advantage to the player may be executed. Thereby, it is possible to give priority to the short time C over the short time B, and it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the player by giving priority to the short time B over the short time C.

The remaining high ball count subtracted in the time saving count subtraction process and the ceiling reaching remaining count subtracted in the B time saving count subtraction process are initialized after the RAM clearing process. After the RAM clearing process, the state is forcibly set to a low-probability, low-ball-entering state, the remaining high-ball-entering count becomes 0, and the remaining ceiling-reaching count becomes a predetermined initial value (for example, 900 times). On the other hand, the remaining high ball count subtracted in the time saving count subtraction process and the ceiling reaching remaining count subtracted in the B time saving count subtraction process are not initialized after the power off recovery process, and the number of times before the power off. to maintain The lamp display of the symbol display unit 120 in a state where the game is not started after the RAM clearing process is a special mode. For example, the display mode of the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 after the RAM clearing process is a special mode different from that when the symbols are stopped and when the symbols are changed. And all the lamps included in the second special symbol display portion 42 are turned on. This special mode is the same as the display mode immediately after power-off recovery processing is performed in the low-probability, low-ball-entering state. That is, only by confirming that all the lamps included in the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are turned on, it is possible to determine whether it is after the RAM clearing process or after the power-off recovery process. Can not. It should be noted that the display mode immediately after power-off recovery processing is performed is common regardless of the display mode of the pattern display unit 120 before power-off.

(Aspect 2-14: Test signal and outer end signal regarding easy ball entry state)
The states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port 12 include a normal ball entry state, a first easy ball entry state, and a second ball entry ready state. When a big hit is achieved in the normal state, it is possible to shift to the first easy-to-enter state (for example, A short-time). If the normal ball entering state is not a big hit, it is possible to shift to the second easy ball entering state (for example, short time B or short time C).

In the first easy-to-enter state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (for example, 100%), and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 90 (so-called electric chew, ball entrance fluctuation mechanism). The opening time becomes short (for example, 1.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the second easy-to-enter state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is low (for example, 25%), and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90 when winning the normal symbol lottery is long (for example, 5.5%). seconds). As a result, when the player continues to hit right in the easy-to-enter state, the performance of the second starting hole 12 regarding the ease of entering the ball is substantially the same in the first easy-to-enter state and the second easy-to-enter state.

The pachinko game machine 100 has a test signal output terminal (not shown) for outputting a test signal and an external information output terminal 160 for outputting an outer end signal. The test signal output terminal outputs the signal created by the test signal output process (S348 in FIG. 19) to the test device. The test device is a device external to the gaming machine, and it sends a signal corresponding to the state and situation of the gaming machine to check whether the current gaming state of the gaming machine and the operation status of the special electric role item and the normal electric role item are normal. It is a device for confirming whether or not it is output. The external information output terminal 160 outputs the signal generated in the external information output process (S354 in FIG. 19) to, for example, a data display device (data display device connected to the gaming machine by the hall management side) which is an external device connected to the gaming machine. device).

The test signal output terminals are a first terminal for outputting a first test signal indicating the first easy-entering state and a second terminal for outputting a second test signal indicating the second easy-entering state. and at least two terminals. The external information output terminals are the first easy-entering state, the second easy-entering state, or a third terminal for outputting a time-saving medium signal indicating that a special game is in progress, and indicating the start of the second easy-entering state. It has at least a fourth terminal for outputting a second time saving start signal and a fifth terminal for outputting a second time saving signal indicating the second easy-entering state. The test signal output terminal does not need to have a terminal for outputting a test signal indicating that working hours are being reduced. Basically, the A time saving mode, the latent mode and the extension mode correspond to the first easy entry state, and the B time saving mode and the C time saving mode correspond to the second easy entry state.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of outputs of the test signal and the outer end signal regarding the easy-ball-entry state. In FIG. 67, a big hit occurs in the normal mode (normal ball entry state), and after the special game ends, the transition is made to the first easy ball entry state. After the special mode is completed, the normal mode is entered, and then the second easy-entering state is entered. It shows a case where the mode is shifted to the special mode without any change, and then shifted to the normal mode after the special mode ends.

The first test signal is ON only in the first easy-ball-entering state, and is OFF otherwise. The first test signal is in the off state during the normal ball-entering state, the second easy-ball-entering state, and during execution of the special game. The final variation of the first easy-to-enter state (for example, the final variation of the A short-time mode or the final variation of the latent mode in which the game state at the time of winning/failure determination becomes a low-probability state) is lost and shifted to a special mode. In this case, the first test signal changes from the on state to the off state with the pattern stop of the final variation of the first easy-entering state as a trigger. In addition, if you do not win the fall judgment in the latent mode and shift to the extension mode, the first test signal is turned off from the on state with the start of the pattern variation that wins the fall judgment or the success or failure judgment in the extension mode. become.

The second test signal is ON only in the second easy-ball-entering state, and is OFF otherwise. The second test signal is OFF during the normal ball-entering state, the first easy-ball-entering state, and during execution of the special game. If the final variation in the second easy-to-enter state (B time-saving mode or C time-saving mode) is missed and the transition to a special mode is made, the second test is triggered by the pattern stop of the final change in the second easy-to-enter state. The signal changes from ON state to OFF state.

The first test signal is off in the second easy-entering state, and the second test signal is off in the first easy-entering state. will not be. By separately providing the first test signal and the second test signal, the first easy ball-entering state and the second easy ball-entering state can be clearly distinguished, and the time reduction type can be reliably distinguished in the game machine test. be able to.

The second test signal may be a signal common to B time saving and C time saving. The second test signal may be prepared separately for B time saving and C time saving (for example, the second test signal B which is a B time saving test signal and the second test signal C which is a C time saving test signal ). The test signal output terminal may separately have a terminal for outputting the B time saving test signal and a terminal for outputting the C time saving test signal. The B time saving test signal is turned on only during the B time saving, and is turned off during the C time saving. The C time reduction test signal is turned on only during the C time reduction, and is turned off during the B time reduction. Therefore, the test signal for time saving B and the test signal for time saving C are not turned on at the same time.

The time-saving medium signal is a signal common to the first easy-entering state and the second easy-entering state, and is turned on when the high-entering state continues. The signal during time saving is turned on when the first test signal is turned on and when the second test signal is turned on. The signal during time saving is in an ON state during execution of the special game. When a special game is executed with a big hit in the first easy-entering state or the second easy-entering state, and the state is shifted to the first easy-entering state after the execution of the special game, easy entry before and after the execution of the special game. It is in the ON state throughout the state and execution of the special game. When the first special symbol 51 is changed in a low probability and low ball entering state, that is, when staying in the normal mode, the time saving medium signal is in the OFF state, but is in the first easy entering state or the second entering state. When the second special symbol 52 is varied with a low probability and a low ball entry state immediately after the ball easy state ends (that is, when staying in the special mode), the ON state continues. The time-saving medium signal remains ON when the first easy-entering state or the second easy-entering state ends and transitions to the special mode, and the timing when the special mode ends and shifts to the normal mode ( That is, immediately after the end of the first easy-entering state or the second easy-entering state, the reserve of the remaining second lottery value is completely extinguished, and the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the last remaining second lottery value is released. It switches from the on state to the off state at the timing of stop display. The time-saving signal may be turned off when the final change in the first easy-entering state or the second easy-entering state stops. In that case, even in the pattern variation that wins the fall judgment or the success/failure judgment in the extension mode, the symbol is stopped and displayed to be turned off.

The second time-saving start signal turns on with the start of the second easy-entering state, and switches to the off state after the on state continues for a certain period of time (for example, one second). A 2nd time saving start signal will be in an ON state, for example, when a signal changes from an OFF state to an ON state during a 2nd time saving. The second time saving start signal may be a signal common to the start of B time saving and C time saving. As the second time saving start signal, separate signals may be prepared for B time saving and C time saving. For example, the external information output terminal 160 may separately have a terminal that outputs the B time saving start signal and a terminal that outputs the C time saving start signal.

The second time-saving intermediate signal is a time-saving intermediate signal specialized for the second easy-entering state, and is turned on when the high-entering state continues with the start of the second easy-entering state as a trigger. The second time-shortening signal is turned on when the low ball-entering state is shifted to the second easy-entering state. The second time-saving signal is turned off at the timing when the second easy-entering state ends, that is, when the final fluctuation of the second easy-entering state stops. Therefore, when the first special symbol 51 is varied with a low probability and a low ball entry state, that is, when staying in the normal mode, the state is OFF. When a big win is achieved in the second easy-entering state, the second time-saving medium signal is turned off upon stopping the symbol that has caused the big win. The second time-saving signal is turned off during the special game and in the first easy-to-enter state to be shifted after the special game. As a modification, when the second special symbol 52 is changed in the low probability and low ball entry state immediately after the second easy ball entry state ends (that is, when staying in the special mode), the ON state In that case, the ON state continues at the time when the second easy-entering state ends and the transition to the special mode continues, and the timing at which the special mode ends and transitions to the normal mode (second Immediately after the easy-to-enter state ends, the remaining second lottery value is completely reserved, and the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the last remaining second lottery value is stopped and displayed. switch to state.

By providing the signal during time saving as the outer end signal, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the advantageous state continues for the player. In addition, by providing the second time-saving start signal, it is possible to reliably grasp the presence or absence of a time-saving rush that is not triggered by a big hit. By providing the second time-saving medium signal separately from the time-saving medium signal, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the situation during the time-saving rush that is not triggered by a big hit.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of output of the test signal and the outer end signal relating to the easy-to-enter state, showing an example in which a plurality of time-saving states continue without the occurrence of a big hit. In FIG. 68, the transition to the special mode is performed without the occurrence of a big hit in the first easy-to-enter state, and the C time-saving design stops due to fluctuations during the special mode, and the second easy-to-enter state (C time-saving mode). , and the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling becomes 0 in the middle of the C time saving mode, and the B time saving mode is entered. In addition, it is assumed that the second special symbol 52 is provided with the C time saving symbol.

In the example of FIG. 68, the first test signal is ON only in the first easy-entering state, and is OFF in the special mode and the second easy-entering state (C time saving mode and B time saving mode). The second test signal is off in the first easy-entering state and the special mode, and is continuously on in the second easy-entering state (C time-saving mode and B time-saving mode). The signal is continuously on during the time saving. Although a 2nd time saving start signal will be in an ON state at the time of C time saving mode starting, it will not be in an ON state at the time of B time saving mode starting. This is because when the B time saving mode is started, the state of not being in the second easy-entering state has not transitioned to the second easy-entering state. The second time-saving medium signal is off in the first easy-entering state and the special mode, and is continuously on in the second easy-entering state (C time-saving mode and B time-saving mode).

If the conditions for transitioning to the second easy-to-enter state are met in the first change from the special mode to the normal mode, the time-saving medium signal will turn off at the start of the first change in the normal mode. The ON state may continue without In addition, if the conditions for transitioning to the second easy-to-enter state are satisfied in the first change from the special mode to the normal mode, the time-saving medium signal will be turned off with the start of the first change in the normal mode, and the second The ON state may be triggered by the start of the pattern variation in which the 2-ball easy state starts.

The time-saving medium signal may continue to be on when the transition to the second easy-entering state is triggered by the stopping of the C time-saving symbol or the remaining number of ceiling reaching times becoming 0 in the easy-entering state. . On the other hand, when the second time-saving start signal is shifted to the second easy-entering state when the C time-saving pattern stops or the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling becomes 0 in the easy-entering state, the second entering It may or may not be on at the start of the easy state. When the second easy-entering state transitions directly from the first easy-entering state to the second easy-entering state, the second time-saving signal may remain off in the second easy-entering state, or may be turned on. good.

The time-saving medium signal may remain on when the C time-saving symbol is stopped at the final change of the first easy-entering state and the transition is made to the second easy-entering state (C time-saving mode). For example, in the final variation of the extension mode, the C time-saving symbol can stop in a state of falling to a low probability and a low ball entry state. For example, as one of the conditions for entering the C time saving mode, if the condition is that it is in a low probability state when the pattern is stopped, the game state when the pattern is stopped in the final variation of the extension mode is a low probability state. When the pattern for C time saving stops at the final change of the mode, it becomes possible to shift to C time saving. In this case, after the extension mode ends, that is, after the first easy-entering state ends, the state may be shifted to the second easy-entering state, and the ON state of the time-saving signal may continue. On the other hand, if it is possible to shift to the C time saving mode on the condition that it is in a low probability state at the start of the fluctuation, the game state at the start of the fluctuation in the final fluctuation of the extension mode is a high probability state, so in the final fluctuation of the extension mode Even if the C time saving pattern stops, it is not shifted to C time saving. In this case, the termination of the extended mode, that is, the termination of the first easy-enter state may be used as a trigger to switch the time-saving signal from the ON state to the OFF state (that is, the C time-saving mode may not be entered).

Several aspects of the present embodiment have been described above. The technology described in this embodiment may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 100 described in the first underlying technique or the first embodiment, or may be applied to the slot machine 1010 described in the second underlying technique. For example, the operation instruction effect described in aspect 2-3 and the suggestive effect in which the execution mode can be selected described in aspect 2-7 can be applied to the slot machine shown in the underlying technique 2, and the casino. It can also be applied to slot machines and gaming machines installed in game centers and the like.

In the above-described second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 100 shows the case where both the B time saving and the C time saving are provided. In a modification, the pachinko game machine 100 may be provided with only one of the B time saving and the C time saving, and may not be provided with the other.

The techniques described in the examples and modifications may be identified by the following items.

[Item 1]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
and a production control means for controlling production,
As the easy-ball-entering state, a first easy-ball-entering state that can be shifted to when the special game is executed, and a second easy-ball-entering state that can be shifted to when the result of the winning/failure determination is other than a big win. there is
a first specific effect and a second specific effect suggesting a degree of expectation that the result of the success/failure determination will result in a big hit, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning/failure determination is other than a big hit is stopped and displayed after the execution of the first specific effect, the transition to the second easy-to-enter state is not made after the stopped display,
A pinball game in which, when a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail determination is other than a big hit is stopped and displayed after execution of the second specific effect, the game may be shifted to the second ball easy-to-enter state after the stopped display. machine.

[Item 2]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
Success/failure determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole. When,
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
holding control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the symbol corresponding to the lottery starts to fluctuate;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
and a production control means for controlling production,
a normal effect can be executed when a symbol corresponding to the first lottery value is variably displayed in the normal ball-entering state;
When one or more second lottery values reserved when shifting from the easy ball-entering state to the normal ball-entering state are digested in the normal ball-entering state and symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a special effect is produced. is executable and
When the symbol corresponding to the second lottery value is variably displayed while the second lottery value is not reserved in the normal ball entry state, and the symbol indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is lost is displayed in a stopped state. , a pinball game machine in which the normal performance is executed before the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special performance is not executed after the symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Item 3]
a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
production control means for controlling production;
and an input operation means for receiving an input operation from a player,
It is possible to display an operation means image simulating the input operation means, and to execute an operation instruction effect for instructing the player to perform an input operation to the input operation means,
After the operation instruction effect is executed and an input operation is performed on the input operation means, there is a first effect that can be executed by hiding the operation means image,
The game machine has a second effect that can be executed while the operation means image is displayed after the operation instruction effect is executed and the input operation is performed to the input operation means.

[Item 4]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
Probability state control means for shifting from a low probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is normal to a high probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a jackpot is higher than normal;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
and a production control means for controlling production,
In the low-probability state, it is possible to shift to the easy-to-enter state when the number of consecutive symbol variations that result in a failure in the determination of success or failure reaches a predetermined number of times,
A special effect with a different execution mode can be executed according to the remaining number of times until the number of consecutive times reaches the predetermined number of times,
The special performance cannot be executed until the number of pattern variations reaches a specific number after the RAM clearing process, after the power-off recovery process, or after the standby demo screen is displayed.

[Item 5]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
and a production control means for controlling production,
It is possible to execute a special effect that can be continued over a special period from the start of the pattern fluctuation until at least a predetermined time elapses,
Symbol variation can be performed up to N times (N is 2 or more) in the special period,
When the symbol variation executed in the special period results in a big win, the special period ends regardless of the number of symbol variations performed in the special period from M times (M is less than N) to N times. The symbol indicating that it will be a big hit will be stopped and displayed,
It is possible to execute a specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit in the special period, and from the start of the special period even if the number of symbol variations executed in the special period is any of M times to N times. A specific effect can be executed after a specific time has elapsed,
When the specific effect is executed after the specific time elapses from the start of the special period, the special period depends on whether the number of symbol variations executed during the special period is from M times to N times. A pinball game machine in which the number of pattern variations executed from the start of the above to the execution of the specific performance can be different.

[Item 6]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a special symbol display device in which a special symbol is variably displayed and the result of the success/failure determination is indicated by the stop display of the special symbol;
special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a symbol indicating that the result of the winning/failure determination is a big win on the special symbol display device; ,
A production display device for displaying a production,
When the special symbols are variably displayed, the decorative symbols and the simple symbols are variably displayed on the effect display device from the start of the variation of the special symbols to the stop of the variation,
There are a first effect of displaying a normal color effect on the effect display device and a second effect of displaying a special color effect different from the normal color on the effect display device,
The display color of the decorative pattern that is superimposed and variably displayed on the first effect is different from the display color of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed and superimposed on the second effect,
The pinball game machine, wherein the display color of the simple symbols variably displayed by being superimposed on the first effect is the same as the display color of the simple symbols variably displayed by being superimposed on the second effect.

[Item 7]
a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
production control means for controlling production;
and an input operation means for receiving an input operation from a player,
Suggestive effects suggesting the degree of expectation that results will be advantageous to the player include a fixed effect in which the advantageous result is confirmed and a non-confirmed effect in which the advantageous result is not confirmed,
An input operation is possible for a player to select an execution mode of the suggestive effect during the progress of the game,
There are a first mode and a second mode as selection candidates for the execution mode of the suggestive effect,
The number of types of non-determined effects executable after selection of the first mode is less than the number of types of non-determined effects executable after selection of the second mode,
A gaming machine in which the probability of executing the fixed effect after selecting the first mode is higher than the probability of executing the fixed effect after selecting the second mode.

[Item 8]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
and a production control means for controlling production,
When transitioning to the easy-to-enter state after the end of the special game, or when the number of fluctuations of the symbol from the end of the special game to the specific end of the easy-to-enter state is the first number. , and there is a case where the second number of times is greater than the first number of times,
In the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to display the actual remaining number of times until reaching the specific final stage or a false remaining number of times that is less than the actual remaining number of times,
In the case where the fake remaining number of times is displayed, the fake remaining number of times is increased if the number of fluctuations of the pattern after transition to the easy-to-ball state is less than a predetermined number of times smaller than the first number of times. The pinball game machine is capable of executing the number-increasing performance when the number-of-times increasing performance cannot be executed and when the number of variations of the pattern after shifting to the ball-entering easy state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times.

[Item 9]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
and a production control means for controlling production,
There are a first effect and a second effect that are executed over a plurality of symbol variations triggered by the start of the symbol variation,
When a new symbol variation is started after the first effect is completed, a second effect can be executed with the start of the new symbol variation,
A pinball game machine in which, when a new pattern variation is started before the end of the first performance, a second performance triggered by the start of the new pattern variation cannot be executed.

[Item 10]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired with the entry of a ball into the starting hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
and a production control means for controlling production,
There is a video reproduction effect in which a video is continuously reproduced over a plurality of pattern variations of the pattern,
During the execution of the moving image reproduction effect, if a new pattern change is started after the first time has passed since the pattern is stopped and displayed, the period from the stop display of the pattern to the start of the new pattern change the video continues to play
During execution of the moving picture reproduction effect, if a new pattern change does not start after the lapse of a second time longer than the first time since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the moving picture will not be reproduced after the symbols are stopped and displayed. A pinball game machine that is paused and displays a paused animation.

[Item 11]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
Probability state control means for shifting from a low probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is normal to a high probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a jackpot is higher than normal;
fall determination means for determining fall from the high-probability state to the low-probability state;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; , and
When the variable display of the symbol is started, the variable display of the symbol is started after execution of a variation start process in which a decision regarding the symbol is executed,
When the fluctuation start process of the pattern is started in the high probability state, the fall judgment is executed after the fluctuation start process relating to the pattern is executed, and then the success/failure judgment is executed, and when the fall judgment is won, the low probability. The success/failure determination is performed in the state, and if the fall determination is not won, the success/failure determination is performed in the high-probability state,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the high probability state and the easy-to-enter state, and the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game is within a predetermined number. The number of pattern fluctuations after the end of is transferred to the normal ball entry state after the pattern fluctuation stops when the predetermined number of times,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the high probability state and the easy-to-enter state, and when the number of pattern fluctuations after the end of the special game wins the fall determination related to the pattern fluctuation exceeding the predetermined number of times, the winning is won. After the fall is determined, it is shifted to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state,
When the pattern variation start processing is started in the low probability state and the normal ball entry state, and the result of the win/loss determination related to the pattern is other than a big win, the easy entry state is triggered by the stop display of the pattern. may be transferred to
The pattern variation start processing is started in the high-probability state and the easy-to-ball-enter state, and the fall judgment is won before execution of the win-or-fail judgment related to the pattern, and the state is shifted to the low-probability state and the normal ball-entering state. In this case, the pinball game machine is not shifted to the easy-to-ball-enter state when the symbol is stopped, even if the result of the hit/or-fail judgment related to the symbol is other than a big hit.

[Item 12]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
Variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern that determines the variation time from the start of variation of the pattern to the stop display based on the variation pattern selection state;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
Probability state control means for shifting from a low probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is normal to a high probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a jackpot is higher than normal;
fall determination means for determining fall from the high-probability state to the low-probability state;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; , and
When the variable display of the symbol is started, the variable display of the symbol is started after execution of a variation start process in which a decision regarding the symbol is executed,
When the fluctuation start processing of the pattern is started in the high probability state, the hit/fail judgment is executed after the fall judgment is executed in the fluctuation start processing, and if the fall judgment is won, the hit/fail is set in the low probability state. Judgment is executed, and if the fall judgment is not won, success or failure judgment is executed in the high probability state,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the high probability state and the easy-to-enter state, and the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game is within a predetermined number. The number of pattern fluctuations after the end of is transferred to the normal ball entry state after the pattern fluctuation stops when the predetermined number of times,
After the end of the special game, the state is shifted to the high probability state and the easy-to-enter state, and when the number of pattern fluctuations after the end of the special game wins the fall determination related to the pattern fluctuation exceeding the predetermined number of times, the winning is won. After the fall is determined, it is shifted to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state,
When the pattern variation start processing is started, the variation pattern selection state is determined after the suitability determination is performed in the variation start processing, and the variation pattern that determines the variation time of the symbol based on the determined variation pattern selection state. decided,
The variation pattern selection state when determining the variation pattern related to the symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after shifting to the high probability state and the easy entry state is the predetermined number is the high probability state and the easy entry state. Unlike the variation pattern selection state when a variation pattern related to a symbol variation in which the number of symbol variations after shifting to the state is less than the predetermined number is determined, when a variation pattern related to a symbol variation exceeding the predetermined number is determined Unlike the fluctuation pattern selection state of
When the number of pattern variations after shifting to the high probability state and the easy-to-enter state is less than the predetermined number, the variation pattern selection state determined after winning the fall judgment is determined after not winning the fall judgment. is the same as the variation pattern selection criteria for
When the number of pattern variations after shifting to the high-probability state and the easy-to-enter state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, and the result of the winning/failing determination is a loss, the variation determined after winning the fall determination. A pinball game machine in which the pattern selection criteria are different from the fluctuation pattern selection criteria that are determined after the fall judgment is not won.

[Item 13]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
Probability state control means for shifting from a low probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a big hit is normal to a high probability state in which the probability of the result of the success/failure determination to be a jackpot is higher than normal;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; , and
As the easy-ball-entering state, there are a first easy-ball-entering state and a second easy-ball-entering state that is more advantageous to the player than the first easy-ball-entering state,
When the pattern variation start processing is started in the easy-enter state, and the result of the winning/failure determination related to the pattern is other than a big hit, the stopped display of the symbol is used as a trigger to shift to the easy-enter state. updating the first number of times related to the execution of the symbol variation, and executing a first process of shifting to the normal ball-entering state when the updated first number of times satisfies the first condition;
When the pattern variation start processing is started in the normal state, and the result of the winning/failure determination relating to the pattern is other than a big hit, the stop display of the pattern is used as a trigger, based on the lottery value related to the pattern. executing a second process of determining whether to shift to the first easy-entering state, and shifting to the first easy-entering state if the transition decision is successful,
When the pattern variation start processing is started in the low probability state, and the result of the win/loss determination related to the symbol is other than a big win, the stop display of the symbol is used as a trigger to start the win/fail determination in the low probability state. A third process of updating the second number of times related to the execution of the symbol variation resulting in a result other than a big win and shifting to the second easy-to-enter state when the updated second number of times satisfies the second condition is executed,
The first process can be executed at least before the third process,
The pinball game machine, wherein the second process can be executed at least before the third process.

[Item 14]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
a test signal output terminal for outputting a test signal;
an external information output terminal for outputting an outer end signal,
As the easy-ball-entering state, a first easy-ball-entering state that can be shifted to when the special game is executed, and a second easy-ball-entering state that can be shifted to when the result of the winning/failure determination is other than a big win. there is
As the test signal output terminals, a first terminal for outputting a test signal indicating the first easy-entering state and a second terminal for outputting a test signal indicating the second easy-entering state. and
As the external information output terminal, a third terminal for outputting an outer end signal indicating that the first easy-entering state, the second easy-entering state, or the special game is in progress, and the second easy-entering state. A pinball game machine having a fourth terminal for outputting an outer end signal indicating the start of a state, and a fifth terminal for outputting an outer end signal indicating a second easy-entering state.

11 first starting port 12 second starting port 60 effect display device 80 game board 81 game area 210 lottery means 213 normal figure lottery means 220 success/failure determination means 230 variation pattern determination means 260 special game control means, 275 opening/closing control means, 303 effect determination means, 304 effect control means.

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting port provided in the game area;
a second start port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the entry state of a game ball from a relatively difficult state to an easy state;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start hole or the second start hole;
a symbol display device in which symbols are variably displayed and the result of the determination is indicated by stop display of the symbols;
a special game control means for enabling execution of a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game after the stop display of a pattern indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit on the pattern display device;
a ball entering state control means for shifting from a normal ball entering state in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to a state of easy ball entering in which the ease of entering a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high; ,
and a production control means for controlling production,
When transitioning to the easy-to-enter state after the end of the special game, or when the number of fluctuations of the symbol from the end of the special game to the specific end of the easy-to-enter state is the first number. , and there is a case where the second number of times is greater than the first number of times,
In the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to display the actual remaining number of times until reaching the specific final stage or a false remaining number of times that is less than the actual remaining number of times,
In the case where the fake remaining number of times is displayed, the fake remaining number of times is increased if the number of fluctuations of the pattern after transition to the easy-to-ball state is less than a predetermined number of times smaller than the first number of times. The pinball game machine is capable of executing the number-increasing performance when the number-of-times increasing performance cannot be executed and when the number of variations of the pattern after shifting to the ball-entering easy state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times.

Images